Home

User Guide

1. Cable entry gt E Recommended fixing bolt size M6 21 5 0 85 pt i a 6 5 0 26 161 4 2 42 107 5 4 232 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 BR Alo i Pa gt lt gt lt gt gt gt Maa AE A A B D AA Cas a Go aT ID O EG AO eg at crea oa O v s v s v v s Safety earth M6 Recommended tig htening is pam a AGA pna te E fue ci torque 5 Nm 3 7 ft lb Puldowntorelease and pull down to release and pull down to release door door door Cy o A Ka Es Front view N a E gt E 8 E eiii inch Soon Door Dimensions in millimetres inches mo p open wi 0 ca lt O yoo ers fee peas sears a E F G H oS ees ia E o o lo Y NG E GN M NG Mm N ST D SE View on underside N a Ole O_o AP y A y HO KI ER ERA Yy y Overall Widths mm Note Units are shown with individual mounting No of
2. Recommended fixing bolt size M6 Cable entry gi lg 21 5 0 85 22 0 6 5 0 26 61 4 2 42 107 5 4 232 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 1 65 Y pa ma a PA PA PA Es ca E mi i far Sep ele te mr gt O S so o o Ho dO fo Oo N GA GA vs 3 A uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm Insert uninsulated 5mm os Safety earth M8 a o ee wa adi Recommended tightening naaa Pa kaawa lt torque 12 5 Nm 9 2 ft Ib Front view o aol N rs PEN wn WwW X imensions in millimetres inches El E Door S 9 open mM y LA ee aa E F 000007 y AG E View on mM a pA o kal El 513 Es SEN El gs MERN al SE SNN v KIS EY o y Sig ia O Al co 0000 UU nov TA E a Pa Overall Widths mm Note Units are shown with individual mounting No of phases 1 2 3 4 brackets Multi phase units come supplied with Door closed 149 5 234 5 319 5 404 5 two three or four phase brackets as Door open 211 0 296 0 381 0 466 0 appropriat
3. Single phase Multiple networks Network Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 LIAVG VAVG Power Enrgy WSP SPselect DD E Reset Back to IAVG 2 IAVG O VAVG O Power O Enrgy O WSP O SPselect O E Reset o Three phase Two networks Figure A5 4 1b Various scrolling sequences Note For single networks each EPower summary value parameter is displayed in turn For multiple networks the same parameter is displayed for each network in turn the scroll key being used to select a different parameter if required HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 229 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A6 OTHER FEATURES A6 1 ALARMS AND ERRORS A6 1 1 Alarm indication Up to four alarms can be set up in configuration level refer to HA029006 for full details Each alarm can be configured as nonE off HI high Lo low r roc rising rate of change or F roc falling rate of change If any alarm occurs the ALM
4. A gt LES feedback AN gt A v2 via n 52 Ref Feedbac 3P2 EPower 1 3P1 2P2 2P1 Phase 3 feedback V2 vilfi2 n Ref Feedbac EPower 2 geen Phase 2 UE feedback ea sae A g g Gg v2 vilfi2 n Ref Feedback EPower 3 Figure B2 2 7 Three phase control with open delta primary and four wire star secondary driving 4S load B2 2 8 Three phase control with 6D primary secondary with three independent loads Rarely used not recommended because this configuration is not fault tolerant Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 2 om feedback 57 V2 vii it Ref Feedback EPower 1 v2 vi 12 Ref Feedback EPower 2 NG Phase 1 feedback V2 va fia Ref Feedbac EPower 3 Figure B2 2 8 Three phase control with open delta primary secondary and four wire star secondary driving three independent floating loads Page 242 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Index Symbols Analogue output occ 52 A
5. Y Y Input type Display units Decimal places Display top line PV colour Home display B Type BT C C Degrees Celsius O nnmn G Green N PV only J TypeJT C F Degrees Fahrenheit 1 nnmn R Red A First alarm setpoint SP only K Type K T C K Kelvins 2 nnn nn C Redin alarm else green 1 PV Alarm SP Read write L TypeLT C None 3 nn nnn 2 PV Alarm SP Read only N Type N T C P 9b 4 n nmn Current see note R TypeRT C O Pa Pascals V Voltage see note S TypeST C 1 mPa milli Pascals P Power see note T Type TT C 2 kPa kilo Pascals E Energy see note C Custom T C 3 Bar WE Linear to GD 5 Pa The inear 0 to 80 m i 2 Linear 0 to 20 mA 6 kg cm Select the first list Erol eee 4 Linear 4 to 20 mA 7 mmwG used to access the parameter for O Linear 0 to 10V de 8 inwG other networks 3 Linear 2 to 10V de 9 mmHg g 6 Linear0 to 5V dc A Torr Select the next list B litres hr D litres min E RH Q G o2 Change to the next H Co2 character J CP 7 O M Amp R mA T mv U Ohm W ppm Y RPM Z metres sec Table Ada Set 1 parameter coding HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 217 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A4 FIRST SWITCH ON Cont Y Y y DITIMDWUSBODNDTYZIN IX Relay output OP1 Not configured High alarm only Low alarm only Rate of change ROC alarm only New alarm Sensor break only After power fail only High alarm or sensor break
6. o1v1 V2 vir fi h Ref Feedback Phase 1 EPower 1 l V2 vifi2 li Ref Feedback Phase 2 EPower 2 Phase 3 Figure B2 2 1 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load B2 2 2 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load V2 vir fi Ref Feedback Ph Tal des EPower 1 V2 vi 12 Ref Feedback Ph 2 dd EPower 2 Phase 3 Figure B2 2 2 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 239 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE B2 2 3 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load 1v1 Phase 1 112 V2 va r 1 Ref Feedback EPower 1 Phase 2 V2 va r 1 Feedback EPower 2 Ref Phase 3 B2 2 4 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 0111 gt S2 V2 valfi2 n 02V1 312 311 gt SI Ref Feedback EPower 3
7. Load Fuse Ka Fuse a paa LL Return 5 Return 6 Isolating device Isolating device Internal feedback connections Standard External feedback connections Option Figure 2 2 2b Fusing for remote voltage sensing input and neutral reference inputs NEUTRAL PHASE REFERENCE INPUT WARNING For 4S 6D and two leg configurations the reference input described below is connected to neutral or to a phase supply as appropriate figure 2 2 2g For these configurations a fuse must be fitted in the reference input circuit or under certain fault conditions the reference input cable could attempt to carry the full load current leading to overheating and potentially to a fire hazard The current rating of the fuse must be lower than the current rating of the reference input cable CAUTION 1 For 4S and single phase configurations loss of the neutral supply causes the reference to be lost as well For 6D and two leg configurations loss of the relevant phase supply also causes the loss of the reference 2 The reference connection must be made before power is applied and not disconnected until after power has been switched off In order to ensure correct firing for 4S 6D and two leg configurations a connection to neutral or to the relevant phase must be made using the relevant two pin connector on the underside of the unit figure 2 2 2a Both pins are connected together internally so e
8. 94 6 24 A Mains kanal a al eas A ous SE A es 94 6 21 2 Predictive Load management Station Menu 000 00008 96 6 21 3 Predictive Load Management Network menu 00000008 97 6 21 4 Predictive Load Management Alarm menus 0000004 98 6 22 PLMCHAN LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION INTERFACE MENU 99 6 23 LOAD TAP CHANGER LTC OPTION 2 200 100 6 23 1 MainPrm parameters 272x208 ah KABANG NENG ADAN APART DAD LAG 101 Contents HA179769 Page iv Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 6 23 2 LTGAlar mpa aa tates KING LANG BAN PIN AN Pee ad NAG DB LENG 101 PARAMETERS ia da TNT aa 6 ke eel NINA oe oe oe es 101 6 23 3 LTC Application wiring upon Sines beet hea ee Aaa ed 102 6 24 RELAY MENU o BG NAA gested indies oa eels Baia eddie hanes 105 6 24 1 Relay parameters 00002 105 6 25 SETPROM MENU is tas dad cae abe tered tas 106 6 25 1 Setpoint provider parameters 0 000 cee 107 6 26 TIMERMENU coo ta Gilden A a 108 6 26 41 TimekConfiguratioh A it JANA 108 6 26 2 Timer examples iisi irinci cet egg oe eed NEA LK NG KG tbe tne 109 6 27 TOTALISER MENU dranie ah pan ala NGA NG Gn LAGA 110 6 28 USERVALUE MENU usos a dd ta da 111 7SUSINGITOOLS pirine e a AN NANG a as 112 721 Tools CONNECTION danao coal Km NEA ING Anier aside eal Lany mma NG 112 FAA SerialicommunicatioNs a eee dc a 112 7 1
9. PMmax 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 66848 1000 Reduction factor r 50 216kW 900 800 700 600 500 P 400 300 100 Modulation period Figure 9 4 3d Non synchronised without load sharing r 50 WITH LOAD SHARING In this example the Sharing algorithm has been applied The total power and power demand are the same as in previous examples but the power profile is approximately flat with a value close to Pt kW Haaa Pmax 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 93696 1000 Reduction factor r 100 433kW 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 Modulation period Figure 9 4 3e Load sharing r 100 HA179769 Page 188 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 94 3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISONS Cont WITH LOAD SHARING REDUCTION FACTOR 50 KW et P ma x 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 96031 1000 Reduction factor r 50 216kW
10. No use power scaling configured in UsrUnit or TotUnit No Yes Autoscale the power display WE A ES Back to Input or to Reset for Global Counter Figure 6 10 Energy counter menu HA179769 Page 70 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 10 1 Energy counter parameters Input Reset Hold UsrEnergy TotEnergy Pulse UsrUnit TotUnit PulseScale PulseLen IsGlobal Autoscale Shows the instantaneous power input from the measuring source Normally wired to the Meas P output of a Network block Does not appear for the Global Energy Counter see IsGlobal below 1 Energy counter output goes to zero and immediately starts accumulating 0 Energy counter not reset Ifthe Global Energy counter is reset it resets all other Energy counters see IsGlobal below 1 Hold output value This freezes the output value forthe block at the current value The input continues to be totalised so when the Hold input returns to O the output value is instantaneously updated to the new current value 0 output value is not held and represents the current accumulated Energy value Ifthe Global Energy counter is held all other Energy counters are held as well see IsGlobal below Shows the current value for the selected Energy Counter block If this is the global counter this value is the sum of the energy values of all those networks being to
11. SK9 Figure 2 2 1b Connector locations Note It is physically possible to insert an RJ11 plug into an RJ45 socket Care must therefore be taken to ensure that the Configuration port cable is not mistakenly plugged into an RJ45 communications connector if fitted or the Remote display connector HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 11 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont SK1 Standard I O 10 Volts out Analogue i p 1 Analogue i p 1 Analogue i p 2 Analogue i p 2 Predictive Load Management Relevant manual sections Terminator A Low Shield High Terminator B Analogue o p 1 Analogue o p 1 0V Digital i o 1 Digital i o 2 Digital i o OV W CO N NUI BW Nh gt o Analogue l P Section 6 4 Analogue O P Section 6 5 Digital 1 O Section 6 9 Relays Section 621 E Polarising pin Optional I O 1 10 Volts out Analogue i p 3 Analogue i p 3 Analogue o p 2 Analogue o p 2 OV Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital OV Not used Relay 2 No 24 Relay 2 Com 21 Relay 2 NC 22 Polarising pins Fixed connector pins 1 and 2 Mating connector pin 3 COND UB win SK4 Optional I O 2 10 Volts out Analogue i p 4 Analogue i p 4 Analogue 0 p 3 Analogue o p 3 0V
12. 173 174 TOYS EA ee ae 92 200 USFENGEGY sto a Oh es NG a de 71 Thyristor Us Unit 233 sa hee ware a8 reta ea lease pee NA 71 Enable we eae daen NAGA NENA AD PUNA 10 V Short open circuit aaa anan anan 13 NANG TAG ura lr Naga Liliw 88 Thyristor heatsink temperature a 200 A A O KAN 88 Thyristor open circuit aaa eee eee es 200 ME ETA PE 88 Thyristor short circuit cs 200 e ROI A AA E 88 TM ti 58 59 A A TO 88 MIN E AA A 109 A A ce tak SOR raan 138 Time Above oon anuna asaan a nanan A II BA 200 Timer VdipsThreshold 2 2 13 90 200 MENU umaani 108 VextScale cito nahin aaah hain acne BANA 90 Modbus parameter addresses 172 173 Vibration specification a 204 TLE ook cee eee eee aa 32 92 201 231 Mine Nominal tacita oo ab ena dae ch os 89 90 Total Vline Vline2 Vline 3 0 2 0 aaa aaa 88 CELL Cagaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaaaaa 7 VloddNominal tic rann ar ess pias AG 89 Stations Laan 97 DI re od did clot 92 231 Total Channels 196 Voltage sensing remote 20 Total Load Failure TLF alarm A A nA tices aa nd ae gs 92 231 Total power demand oon Naa MGa NAE A KU Aa 222 Totaliser W Menu AA 110 Modbus parameter addresses 173 sha i aco AA o Gp pcs AA Nag TotalStation III ge Capture current values into a data set 136 NN NA ga ec tye KAN ld ang Oa oe geo 71 Clear the selected data set 136 TOUNIN i ire rene
13. Fuse rating must be lower S gt w N wu N N lt N than cable current rating CI En EPower 3 EPower 4 EPower 2 Neutral reference 7 Current feedback Voltage feedback IN mn Ss 3 IN igo s a IN Current transformer Figure 6 23 3c Four tap primary L lap Fuse blown alarm Over temp alarm o 0 0 QO o RA Fs1 Fs2 Tap 1 L Tap2 Fuse Thyristor N T o ETENEE Current 2 z a Thyristor transformer S 5 Load Phase reference Ie oa m YA Ah 3 12 NG Tap 2 control ya Voltage feedback Tap contr O ak 3 Current feedback Phase ann z E o O Voltage feedback j urren t transformer Current feedback Figure 6 23 3d Two tap secondary alternative layouts HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 103 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 23 3 LTC APPLICATION WIRING Cont L Tap 3 Tap 2 Tap 1 2 Tap 0 Si w S N uw S N Phase reference EPower 1 EPower 2 EPower 3 N 9 be N S N Load Voltage feedback Current feedback Fuse rating must be lower rrent than cable current rating o Figure 6 23 3e Three tap secondary L Tap 4 N N EPower 3 Phase reference EPower 4 IS gt
14. SP limit I limit V limit P limit power limit or Transfer Allows for example a potentiometer to be connected to Analogue input 1 so that setpoint can be dynamically varied Allows the user to select the analogue input type as O to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V O to 5V 0 to 20MA 4 to 20mA This menu item does not appear if Unused is selected in IP1 Func above As for Analog IP 1 Func except Setpoint does not appear if it has already been selected as Analog IP 1 type As for Analog IP 1 type Allows the user to select Unused Power Current Voltage or Impedance to be selected as output type Allows the user to select the analogue output type as 0 to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V O to 5V 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA This menu item does not appear if Unused is selected in OP1 Func above Select Digital input 2 function as Unused RemSP Sel Remote setpoint select or Alarm Ack Allows the function of Relay 1 to be set as Unused Any Alarm NetwAlarm or Fuse Blown HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 35 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 1 QUICKSTART PARAMETERS Cont Relay 1 Func Energy Load Man Type Allows the function of Relay 1 to be set as Unused Any Alarm NetwAlarm or Fuse Blown Appears only if one or more Energy counter blocks section 6 10 are included in the configuration Allows energy c
15. Command Prompt 2 When the Command Prompt box appears type in IPConfig lt Enter gt The response is a display such as that shown below giving the IP address and Subnet mask of the pc Choose an address in the range covered by these two values A subnet mask element of 255 means that the equivalent element of the IP address must be used unchanged A subnet mask element of 0 means that the equivalent element of the IP address may take any value between 1 and 255 0 is not allowed In the example below the range of IP addresses which may be chosen for the Driver Module is 123 456 789 2 to 123 456 789 255 123 456 789 0 is not allowed and 123 456 789 1 is the same as the pc s address and may therefore not be used ca Command Prompt Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2660 CC Copyright 1985 2681 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings richardne gt IPConf ig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Addy 123 456 789 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway C Documents and Settings richardne gt Figure 7 1 3a IP Config command 3 In Comms configuration section 6 6 enter the selected IP address and the subnet mask as it appears in the command prompt window in the relevant parts of the configuration menu 4 Check communications by pinging as described in section 7 1 2 above Once the link to the instrument has been verified iTools c
16. Notes 1 If the unit has been fully configured at the factory the Quickstart menu will be skipped and the unit will go into operation mode at first switch on 2 Once quit the Quickstart menu can be returned to at any time from the Engineer or Configuration menus described later in this document by holding the Return key operated for approximately two seconds If values have been changed outside the Quickstart menu these values are displayed as on re entry to the Quickstart menu Language Power Modules Nominal Current Nominal Voltage Network Type Load Coupling Load Type Firing Mode Feedback Transfer Mode Analog IP1 Func Analog IP 1 Type Analog IP 2 Func Analog IP 2 Type Analog OP 1 Func Analog OP 1 Type Digital IP2 Func Relay 1 Func 4 1 QUICKSTART MENU PARAMETERS Initially English French German and Italian may be selected Other languages may be added during the lifetime of this issue of the manual Once confirmed single blink after approximately two seconds then all further displays appear in the selected language Select the number of power modules between 0 and 4 that the driver module is to control The number of phases offered in Network type below depends on this value Editing this value causes a confirmation screen to appear OK confirms the change A value normally between the maximum current the Power Modules are each able safely to sustain
17. a 9 4 LOAD SHEDDING esien esya aperceure 9 4 1 Definitions Seepia pare a E 9 4 2 Reduction of power demand SHEDDING ABILITY FACTOR 9 4 3 Load shedding comparisons WITHOUT LOAD SHARING SYNCHRONISED Page Ue AAA ASA 137 NN 138 E EOS 139 LAS dain te AP DING 140 Sh ied iN so ding ay PATAG 140 AAA Seah we aad os LASERS 140 she NAAN Beate ats tel ea 141 sles gage Ran Kha 141 LAG exalt AG ANG NAA see ee 142 AT AA TA wise 175 di nla aag eno ata 175 AAP emt 175 eta asta tists a KGAD 176 sialelt ingiaidl AN 177 a lr 177 aaa aa banag tab aa AA dle da 178 E Nkaka 179 NA PA gs srs ud 180 Malana ahaha bs Wael whan npa NG 180 TRIED pA AE TGA 181 a EA INA NEE 182 ANA NAAN BANAT a piang 182 do E 182 ca o rd 183 a E eee 184 PAA 184 AHA PA sli 184 A IEL SENE ETT FE EE 185 AA PE 186 nA GAAN GG BE at 186 WITHOUT LOAD SHARING SYNCHRONISED REDUCTION FACTOR 50 187 WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NOT SYNCHRONISED 222200 187 WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NON SYNCHRONISED REDUCTION FACTOR 50 188 WITH LOAD SHARING uu 22000 GG 188 WITH LOAD SHARING REDUCTION FACTOR 50 aaa 189 9 5 CONFIGURATION stos GG KNANG She lh DS NG PANG SR teas 190 9 5 1 riToo s Graphical Wiring vi conta dades da 190 STANDARD POWER CONTROL LOOP 2 cece eee eee eens 190 LOAD MANAGEMENT CHANNELS LMCHAN 1 TO LMCHAN 4 190 GLOBAL LOAD MANAGEMENT CONTROL LOADMNG 0ccccccccccccc oo 19
18. 6 3 ACCESS MENU 6 3 1 Engineer level menu Entered from the Engineer top level menu this allows the user to go to any other menu for which the access code is known The default access codes are Operator 1 Engineer 2 Config 3 Quickstart 4 Figure 6 3 1 below shows details pa ENG gt Access Access Goto gt Engineer AD CAD Access Goto 3 Config 8 y Access Goto 3 Quic A le y Wait or ED Wait or ED 2 Use up down arrows to enter code for required level then wait or use Enter key Access Goto Access Pass Code A Wait or Default codes Config 3 Quick 4 Figure 6 3 1 Engineer level Access menu HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 47 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 3 2 Configuration level access menu This menu allows 1 The user to quit the Configuration level menu and Goto a different access level Operator and Engineer level menus require no Pass code as they are considered to be at a lower security level than Configuration Figure 6 3 2a shows the menu layout 2 The user to edit the current Pass codes for Engineer Configuration and Quickstart menus figure 6 3 2b 3 Access to the Operator Interface push buttons to be restricted in Operator and Engineer Level menus figure 6 3 2b GOTO MENU See figure 6 3 2b for other Access menu items Use up down arrows to select required level then wait or use Enter key Acces
19. 6 8 COUNTER MENU The counter output is a 32 bit integer the value of which is recalculated every sample period When a clock state change from 0 false to 1 true is detected the counter value is incremented if the count direction is up or decremented if the direction is down At reset the counter value is set to 0 for count up counters or to the Target value for count down counters 6 8 1 Counter configuration menu CONF 3 Count Use up down arrows to select Counter number then Enter Use return ED key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Enable Use up down arrows to enable or disable the selected counter Use up down arrows to set count direction as Up or Down Count N gt Ripple C Shows whether ripple carry is active On or not Off Yes if up counter has exceeded tar get OR if down counter has reached zero Otherwise No Use up down arrows to change state of clock Counter increments or decre 0 ments on 0 to 1 Clock transition Target value for count up counters or starting value for count down counters The current value of the counter Use up down arrows to select Yes to carry out counter reset Use up down arrows to clear the over 7 low flag Back to Enable Figure 6 8 1 Counter menu Enable The counter responds to clock transitions when enabled the count is fr
20. invensys Eurotherm EPower Controller User Guide EPower Power management and control units Versions 3 06 and later HA179769 issue 9 August 2012 Eurotherm Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Automation SA 6 chemin des Joncs 69574 Dardilly France Manufacturer s address Product type Power Management and Control units Models Status level Module Status level A1 upwards F2 upwards A1 upwards A1 upwards 800A 1000A 1300A 1700A G3 upwards G3 upwards G3 upwards G3 upwards A1 upwards 2000A air cooled G3 upwards A1 upwards 2000A water cooled G4 upwards E2 upwards 3000A water cooled G4 upwards F2 upwards 4000A water cooled G4 upwards EN60947 4 3 2000 Including amendment A1 Safety specification EN60947 4 3 2000 Class A Including amendment A1 EMC emissions specification EN60947 4 3 2000 Including amendment A1 EMC immunity specification Eurotherm Automation SA hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Automation SA further declares that the above products comply with the EMC directive 2004 108 EC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Has Dated 12103 Jio Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Automation Kevin Shaw R amp D Director C Signed 1A249986U740 Issue 6 Feb 10 CN26093 40 Eurotherm Restricti
21. For Burst firing only the average value of I taken over the dura tion ofthe burst period The main period average value of I used for I control The maximum value out of 12 122 132 Used in current limiting and alarm strategies The RMS value of I maximum over one mains period Displays load voltage of primary power module phase to phase or phase neutral according to setup Displays load voltage of 2nd phase power module phase to phase or phase neutral according to setup Displays load voltage of 3rd phase power module phase to phase or phase neutral according to setup A oO So y w nm R NG n Sr E E aka PA Zal E oO NOTE Nae Ogle wn wn nm lt m v 0 Meas gt HSink3 T Figure 6 20 1 Meas submenu layout eas gt V Average Y 8 y 8 y E a aaa alla 9 lel lel la a Ql y ga Displays the average of the RMS voltage for three phase and two leg systems For Burst firing only the average value of V taken over the duration of the burst period 4 he main period average value V2 used for V control o The maximum value out of V V22 V32 Used in current limiting and alarm strategies The RMS value of V maximum over the mains period Used for voltage limiting or voltage transfer Displays true power measurement for the power network over the modula tion pe
22. SPselect parameter Table A5 1 1 REM MAN beacon characteristics A5 2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION Level 1 operation is entered when Set2 is quit or after applying power to the instrument other than at first power up Level 1 operation allows the user to scroll through the various parameters associated with the instrument on a Read only basis The parameters which appear depend on the configuration Figure A5 2a is an example showing the display pages where the home page set 1 is PV only and the configuration comprises one or more single phase EPower units Figure A5 2b is an example giving the parameters for a 2x2 leg three phase configuration Page 220 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION Cont Exit from Set 2 N or power up Home display 100 C MESSAGES 9 450 ENRGY Total energy since switch on or reset 9 180 c HIGH Highest value since switch on or reset 120 C LOW Lowest value since switch on or reset 9 Alarm 1 threshold Type selected in Set 2 150 C A1 HI Exit from Set 2N or power up J gt Home display 100 C MESSAGES Total energy since see switch on or reset 180 C Highest value see HIGH switch on or reset 120 C
23. 0 ee eee 26 THREE PHASE DELTA CONFIGURATIONS 000 eee eee teens 27 TWO LEG CONFIGURATIONS 0 0 0 cece eee een eet e eens 28 THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK 29 3 OPERATOR INTERFACE t033 eis ls UA SAAN 31 Sl DISPLANA e Ah GE e NG 31 32 PUSHBUTTONS Lada ml eet Nap ad nala loins ts lada 31 3 21 Configurati0N zsa rii I a ona Ad 31 3 22 Operation a naaa Dada cece car BAG ia oe ee E STAG ka 31 3 2 3 Me uitem value selection voii a 31 3 3 BEAGONS 2 aaa a a AA a a Nain nn a a nana 32 3 4 FRONT PANEL MESSAGES 22 220 cece t tenes 32 IA Instrumentievents xa cc a ND aoe NLA 32 3 4 2 Indication alarms oi da 32 IMSS yl AOS Maa maang Ye vag Han NG PAGG PANG BAT BEA ie see 32 3 44 Process ala rinS A da Da LANGAN AG BRA harana 32 3 4 5 Configuration errors a 33 34 6 Stand by errorss av pul PE e aves NOY PB pin NAG gaa ee tee 33 Contents HA179769 Page ii Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 3 4 7 Powermoquls error cite nand HUBAD UPIN WIGAN ead NI PDA AND SANG 33 IAB Generalierrors ii haaa TENG GANA KANAN RANA Haha 33 JAI ROSSO a NN te eR Wee Saag ests AMAG A ANG 33 A A NENG AKEN GA NG mh Aa 33 4 QUICKSTART 2 AAA A BG na 34 4 1 QUICKSTART MENU PARAMETERS 02222200000 35 4 2 5OME DEFINITIONS copos to EEE PALA add oe dades 37 424 Firing modes A ABG TANG KAT eae ea aaa 37 LOGIC si aa Site AS NAGA NG Da a BNG NAN UG 37
24. 15 CE units only as specified at time of order 47 to 63 Hz 16 to 630 A depending on power module 1 3W per Amp per phase CE Rated 92kA all modules except 98kA for 500A modules 105kA for 630A modules UL SCCR Rated 100kA for all modules Natural convection Fan cooling Fans are connected in parallel to driver module connector figure 2 2 14 115 or 230V ac as specified at time of order see Caution above 10 W for 160A 250A modules 15W for 400A 500 and 630A modules RC circuits and high speed fuses Pollution degree 2 nstallation category Ill up to 600V CE and UL units nstallation category Il up to 690V CE units only nstallation category Il assuming nominal phase voltage with respect to earth is lt 300V rms AC51 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads resistance furnaces AC56a Switching of transformers Uninterrupted duty continuous operation Form 4 Type 1 high speed fuses only ePower units do not incorporate branch circuit protection It is the user s responsibility to incorporate branch circuit protection upstream of the ePower unit The installation must comply in its entirety with all applicable local safety and emissions regulations UL the above brach circuit protection is necessary in order to meet NEC requirements Single or multiphase control of resistive loads low high temperature coefficient and non aging aging types and transformer primaries Load voltage current feedbac
25. 404 vars dira ATE ae Wrasse Geena NG 126 Remote Panel aaa 55 216 Data set creation 135 Specification anan aan 208 Days above ss havc itil eda eee sre AUG 79 USEF Meloidae 54 Delay Component Selection a 118 Comme AA AG 54 COMPUN S ir AA 125 TRAE abu AN ANG a We Bos Ss ado PRA 183 ContiEntiyata aca cana da Ae Add el dido ne Bana 32 Delayed Trigger 75 CON aba aah baal KA a a ios 32 Delete Conf level Operation Remote panel 227 COMMENT AA ENG LAGE 122 Configuration level menu cee eee eee 44 Function blockc ontext ment ea LT LINO 120 Configuration Port 15 Ya AA AA EE 123 Context Menu A MEO eee mae 122 Function LA Kies ib PB 119 Wiring editor items 000ceeeeeee esse eee 124 Wire ieee ee tet e ete 121 Derating information 204 Control Device Panel 0 c cece eee eens 134 Menu DeviceNet UA 65 PINGUit me apie te Ea A A ER LAND AALAGA 16 AlmDet HE KE MA LITA a eee 62 Specification a 208 AlmDiS Laon sasaka tsaa 6l DHCP Enables ser sirio mausia nate Pad attain ork 54 AlmLat A BALAG OA a E 64 Digital I O AlmSig maana aanak 63 Modbus parameter addresses 154 AIMStop eee ee aaa tees 66 SPECICATION tt NG Malana ALY ohare ahaa 205 AN 60 Digital IP sl de Alaala PA LA es 35 Limit 59 Direct Connection iTools aa 115 Main nn 58 Dicta paaa Saad A LA DIR eS a 67 Overview Laan 56 Displays ARA AA GTA aah 31 SETUP aanak 57 Language umi Kaw LA ad
26. 9 2 2 Incremental control type 2 This kind of control is similar to Incremental control type 1 but the modulated channel is always channel 1 Other channels are always either at 10096 Full conduction or at 096 No conduction The total power distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint For example for 11 Channels and setpoint of 50 i e input of Master channel 1 0 5 channels 2 to 6 are continuously on and channels 7 to 11 are continuously off Channel 1 modulates with a duty cycle of 5096 figure 9 2 2 Chan 11 Chan 10 Chan 9 Chan 8 Chan 7 Chan 6 Chan 5 Chan 4 Chan 3 Chan 2 Chan 1 100 0 100 A o DA TI o po Figure 9 2 2 Incremental control type 2 example Page 178 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 2 3 Rotating Incremental control This kind of control is similar to Incremental control type 1 but the modulated channel varies Non modulating channels are always either at 100 Full conduction or at 096 No conduction The total power distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint Figure 9 2 3 shows the process for 11 Channels and setpoint 50 i e input of Master channel 1 0 5 Chan 11 Je 096 10096 Chan10 gy LC 10096 Chan9 o 10096 Chan8 vy 10096 Chan7 vy 10096 Chan o Chan 5 10096 Chan 4 pa 10096 Chan 3 ie 100 Chan 2 m l Chan 1 iya Figure 9 2
27. ChopOff1 Threshold ChopOff2Threshold NumberChopOff WindowChopOff OverVoltThreshold UnderVoltThreshold PreTempHeatsink PLFAdjustReq PLFAdjusted PLFSensitivity External voltage scale adjustment for use when IMaximum is set to external feedback If an external transformer is fitted VextScale should be set to the nominal primary voltage of the external transformer If an external transformer is not fitted VextScale should be set to Vnominal Displays the maximum permissible temperature of the heat sink This forms an alarm threshold for the Heat sink Overtemperature alarm Voltage dips threshold This is a percentage difference relative to Vline Nominal between 2 consecutive half cycles Each half cycle voltage measurement is integrated and at the end of each half cycle the last 2 voltage integrals are compared The supply frequency is checked every half cycle and if the percentage change between 1 2 cycles exceeds this threshold value a Mains Frequency System Alarm is generated The threshold may be set to a maximum of 5 to cater for the effects of heavily inductive networks The Chop off alarm becomes active if load current exceeds this threshold for more than five seconds Threshold values lie between 10096 and 15096 of INominal The Chop off alarm also becomes active if this second current threshold is exceeded more than a predefined number of times NumberChopOff within a predefined time period WindowChopOff
28. Vrms Vems2 Vrms3 3 Average square value of load voltage in burst firing taken over the duration of the burst period Typically used for monitoring and alarm strategies over the burst period Square value of load voltage in Burst Firing and on main period in Phase Angle Firing Typically used for Vsq control In three phase or Two leg control this is the average of the three network squared voltages calculated as Vsq VsqPhase1 VsqPhase2 VsqPhase3 3 The maximum squared voltage out of VsqPhase1 VsqPhase2 VsqPhase3 Typically used for voltage limiting in three phase networks and for alarm strategies The RMS value of V7Max measured over the mains period Typically used for voltage limiting or transfer in 3 phase networks in phase angle mode Measurement of true power on the network This is calculated over the modulation period in Burst Firing mode Typically used for monitoring alarm strategy and in Load management if option fitted True power measurement in Burst Firing and over the modulation period in Phase Angle firing Typically used for true power control Apparent power measurement For phase angle firing S Vline x lkus for burst firing S Vems X rms Calculation of power factor Defined as Power Factor True Power Apparent Power In phase angle this is PF P S in burst firing PF PBurst S Cosb Load Calculation of the reactive power defined in phase angle as Q S2 P2 or in burst firing as Q N SAS Pira i
29. 0 Not latched 1 Latched HA179769 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 1 AlmSig FreqFault System alarm signalling status Frequency Faultuint8 0166 358 0 Not Latched 1 Ph1 latched 2 Ph2 latched 3 Ph1 amp Ph2 latched 4 Ph3 latched 5 Ph1 amp Ph3 latched 6 Ph2 amp Ph3 latched 7 Ph1 Ph2 7 Ph3 latched Network 1 AlmSig FuseBlown System alarm signalling status Fuse Blown uint8 0163 355 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 016 364 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig MissMains System alarm signalling status Missing Mains uint8 0160 352 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig NetworkDips System alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0165 357 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig OpenThyr System alarm signalling status Open Thyristor uint8 0162 354 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status Over Current uint8 016E 366 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig OverTemp System alarm signalling status Over Temperature uint8 0164 356 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig PB24VFail System alarm signalling status Power Board 24V Failure As FreqFault uint8 0167 359 Network 1 AlmSig PLF Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Failure uint8 016A 362 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig PLU Process alarm signalling status Partial Loa
30. 250A M10 120 mm2 25 Nm 18 4 ft Ib 400A M12 240 mm 28 8 Nm 21 2 ft Ib 500A 2xM12 2 x 150 mm 30 Nm 22 1 ft Ib 630A 2xM12 2 x 185 mm 30 Nm 22 1 ft Ib Table 2 2 2 Line Load termination details RIBBON CABLE The ribbon cable is daisy chained from the Driver Module to the power modules Note In order to maintain protection against damage due to electrostatic discharge any ribbon cable which is chafed scratched or otherwise damaged must be replaced EXTERNAL CURRENT FEEDBACK Ifthe option is fitted a two pin connector on the underside of the unit allows the connection of an external current transformer to measure the load current The option also includes the Remote Voltage sensing input described below Both connectors must have polarising devices fitted by the user to prevent mis connection The currrent transformer ratio must be such that its full scale output is 5 Amps For example when measuring up to 400 Amps a 400 5 ratio transformer should be chosen CAUTION External feedback connections must be correctly phased figure 2 2 2b or the unit might switch to full conduction at start up See also Appendix B for more details about external feedback L Load cable exit Voltage feedback connector V1 amp V2 UOWO Module 4 V1 amp V2 None Underneath view HO DID Module 3 118 12 None 11812 pl Polarising details for external feedback connectors Polaris
31. 900 800 700 600 500 Pt 400 P 300 SI 200 Ps 100 Modulation period Figure 9 4 3f With load sharing r 50 In this example it can be seen that the Sharing algorithm has been re calculated with the new values This gives a different shape to the global power distribution but as with the previous example the power profile is approximately flat with a value close to Ps HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 189 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 CONFIGURATION 9 5 1 iTools Graphical wiring Load Management configuration is carried out in the following stages STANDARD POWER CONTROL LOOP Each Channel is built and configured from standard blocks Figure 9 5 1a shows a typical example E3 epower 123 456 789 100 502 ID255 ePower Graphical Wiring 5 wires used 75 free al a FiringOP 1 Safety Ramp Status if i Figure 9 5 1a Control loop wiring in iTools Each channel may be of any type single phase 2 legs or three phase Note Load Management sets the Modulator type to BurstFix Similarly Burst length is defined by the LM Master LOAD MANAGEMENT CHANNELS LMCHAN 1 TO LMCHAN 4 For each Channel the Modulator Block input LMIn must be wired to the LMout parameter of an LMChan Block Each channel is then managed by its own LMChan block Figure 9 5 1b shows a configuration of three single phase control channels GLOBAL LOA
32. A Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load o1v1 y 211 Figure B2 2 3 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load 0112 V2 V4 12 1 Feedback EPower 1 Ref v2 V1 12 1 Ref Feedback EPower 2 0111 gt S2 v2 V4 12 1 2V1 312 311 gt SI Ref Feedback EPower 3 a y 211 Figure B2 2 4 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load Page 240 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE B2 2 5 Three phase control with Star Star transformer and 4S load CAUTION The star star configuration is not recommended as it may become unsafe under fault conditions and permanent damage to one or more power units may result o1v1 Q112 0111 V2 vi
33. Current threshold values lie between 10096 to 35096 of INominal NumberChopOff can be set to between one and 16 inclusive and any value between 1 and 65535 seconds may be configured for WindowChopOft Each time an over current is detected the unit stops firing raises a Chop off condition alarm waits for about 100ms and then restarts firing using an up going safety ramp The Chop off condition alarm is cleared if the unit restarts successfully after an over current event If NumberChopOff is reached within the WindowChopOff period the unit stops firing and remains stopped A chop off state alarm is triggered making it necessary for the user to acknowledge the chop off state alarm before restarting firing Displays the number of Chop Off events that can occur within the WindowChopOff period before a Chop Off alarm is enabled Used only with ChopOff2Threshold Displays the Chop Off window in seconds Used only with ChopOff2Threshold The threshold for detecting an over voltage condition as a percentage of VLineNominal If Vline rises above the threshold a Mains Voltage Alarm is set DetMainsVoltFault This is the threshold for detecting an under voltage condition as a percentage of VLineNominal If Vline falls below the threshold a Mains Voltage Alarm occurs DetMainsVoltFault The threshold for the heat sink temperature pre alarm in degrees C which if exceeded causes a pre temperature DetPreTemp alarm to occur Pa
34. EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Once in SP the up and down arrows are used to edit the setpoint value Once this is complete the display times out to the original power summary SP page after a few seconds Figure A5 2 3 attempts to show this Issue 9 Aug 12 process CTL SP No This presentation is the only one available up to CTL SP Yes and including version V1 10 O A Network Display 30 A Network Display IRMS WSP 20 The value of the working setpoint is displayed 20 The value of the working setpoint is displayed WSP WSP 20 The value of the local setpoint is displayed 20 The value of the local setpoint is displayed SP SP O Q Use the up down arrows to edit the value O Q Use the up down arrows to edit the value 50 50 SP SP One the edit is confirmed or no edit has taken One the edit is confirmed or no edit has taken place the display reverts to the parameter place the display reverts to the parameter y orginally being viewed y orginally being viewed 40 A 40 A IRMS WSP Figure A5 2 3 Setpoint editing HA179769 Page 223 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 3 LEVEL 2 OPERATION To switch to level 2 parameters figure A5 3a 1 2 3 4 From any display press and hold the page key until the Lev 1 display appears Operate the up or down arrow to display Lev 2 After a few seconds the Code page appears Use
35. FFOffset The entered value is applied to the Feedforward input after the Gain value has been applied to it HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 57 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 2 Control Main Parameters This menu contains all the parameters associated with the Main control loop CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use ED Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Control Mai PV SP Trans PV Transfer Span TI 3 Trans PV Use up down arrows to select Main then Enter ain Use up down arrows to set the value of the Main PV of the controller Use the up down arrows to set the main Setpoint of Nominal PV 7 The PV measurement for transfer Use the up down arrows to define the span of operation for transfer Use the up down arrows to define the integration time of the main PI loop Jp Back to PV Figure 6 7 2 Control Main parameters Displays the main Controller Process Variable PV Wired to the measurement which itis to be controlled For example to perform V control Vsq should be wired to this PV parameter and Nominal PV configured appropriately section 6 7 1 The Setpoint to control at as a percentage of Nominal PV the upper range of the loop in engineering units For example if NominalPV 500V RMS and SP is set to 20 the controller attempts to regulate
36. Frequency resolution 0 1 Hz Measurement resolution Load RMS voltage squared Vsq Thyristor RMS current squared Isq True load power P 11 bits of Nominal value noise free lt 0 02 of reading C Further parameters S PF Q Z lavg IsqBurst IsqMax Vavg Vsq Burst VsqMax and PBurst are derived from the above for each network if relevant See section 6 20 1 Meas submenu for further details Measurement drift with ambient temp Note For external current feedback the above specification does not include errors associated with external current transformers EXTERNAL CURRENT TRANSFORMER Ratio Chosen such that the full scale output from the current transformer is 5 Amps COMMUNICATIONS CC Link Protocol CC Link version 1 1 Connector 5 way Indicators RUN and ERR DeviceNet Protocol DeviceNet Connector Five way Indicators Network status and Module status EtherNet Type 10baseT IEEE801 Protocol Modbus TCP Connector RJ45 Indicators Tx activity green and communications activity yellow EtherNet IP Protocol EtherNet IP Connector RJ45 Indicators NS Network status MS Module status and LINK Link status Modbus RTU Protocol Modbus RTU slave Transmission standard Connector Indicators Isolation EN60947 4 3 Terminals to ground Three wire ElA485 Twin parallel wired RJ45 Tx activity green and Rx activity yellow Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 50V RMS
37. Parameter G address Parameter D address Further addresses 1 1 1 i Further addresses Li I Figure 7 5b Block read and block write note 3 EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR CAUTION For software versions prior to version 3 only The EEPROM used to retain configuration parameters whilst power is off has a lifetime of at least 100 000 writes If the Fieldbus Gateway is configured to include such configuration parameters see list below then the lifetime of the EEPROM may be reduced In this case an EE Checksum Fail Error message appears at power up and the Driver Module will fail to start and will have to be replaced It is therefore recommended that an alternative method is used when communicating with these parameters For example rather than writing directly to the parameter Control MainSP saved in EEPROM it is possible to use a SetProv block and write into SetProv Remote 1 not saved in EEPROM instead For software version 3 0 onwards no parameters modified via the I O Gateway will be saved in EEPROM Saving to EEPROM will be achieved by other wiring methods HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 131 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY Cont EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR Cont The following is a list of parameters which are stored in EEPROM and which should therefore not be included in the I O Gateway configuration Access ClearMemory Access ConfigurationPasscode Access EngineerPassc
38. not detected Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms AlmLat 3 Miss Mai Miss Mains Use up down arrows to select alarm e g Missing mains then Enter key to display it Use up down keys to change latching status f Alarm not latching Alarm latching Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms 4 CONF gt Network Network N AlmDis etwork N AlmDet D DA Network N 3 AlmStop Use up down arrows to select network number then Enter Use return key Eb one or more times from within menu to return to this page Figure 6 20 1 Figure 6 20 2 AlmDis 3 Miss Mai AlmDis Miss Mains AlmAc Miss Mains Y Use up down arrows to select alarm e g Missing mains then Enter key to display it Use up down keys to change disable status Alarm not disabled Alarm disabled Once one alarm is displayed the Enter key can be used to scroll through the others Use up down arrows to select alarm e g Missing mains then Enter key to display it O OK A Alarm active Number of phases depends on network configuration Use Enter key to scroll through other alarms Use up down arrows to select alarm e g Missing mains then Enter key to display it Use up down key to acknowledge A Alarm not active U Alarm active acknowledged if steady unacknowledged if flashing Once one alarm is displayed the Enter key
39. y y IC KW Ta jim Overall Widths mm Note Units are shown with individual mounting No of phases 1 2 3 4 brackets Multi phase units come supplied with Door closed 189 5 314 5 439 5 564 5 two three or four phase brackets as Dooropen 251 0 376 0 501 0 626 0 appropriate See table below for details Overall Widths inches Upper bracket Lower bracket No of phases 1 2 3 4 2 phase Use A and B Use E and F Door closed 7 46 12 38 17 30 22 22 3 phase Use A Band C Use E F and G Door open 9 88 14 80 19 72 24 65 4 phase Use A B C and D Use E F G and H Figure 2 1 1e Fixing details 400 Amp unit Page 8 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 1 1 DIMENSIONAL DETAILS Cont Recommended fixing bolt size M8 68 2 68 lt lt a lt gt 30 Line cable entry gt 127 5mm 5 02in gt lt 125mm 4 921 La 125mm pit a 125mm 4 921 Le 244 1 18 A a AA CAB C DM KA En cao 1 8 5 0 33 a a O asa O a 0 a e J Safety earth M12 Recommended tightening torque 25 N
40. 34 91 6619093 E mail info eurotherm es invensys com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone 46 40 384500 Fax 46 40 384545 E mail info eurotherm se invensys com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG Telephone 41 44 7871040 Fax 41 44 7871044 E mail info eurotherm ch invensys com UAE DUBAI Invensys Middle East FZE Telephone 971 4 8074700 Fax 4971 4 8074777 E mail marketing mena invensys com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited Telephone 44 1903 268500 Fax 44 1903 265982 E mail info eurotherm uk invensys com U S A Ashburn VA Invensys Eurotherm Telephone 1 703 724 7300 Fax 1 703 724 7301 E mail info eurotherm us invensys com ED68 Contact details correct at time of print Invensys Eurotherm the Eurotherm logo Chessell EurothermSuite Mini8 EPower nanodac piccolo Eycon Eyris Foxboro and Wonderware are trade marks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners All rights are strictly reserved No part ofthis document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means neither may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permis sion of Eurotherm Limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifi
41. 4S 3 6D FiringOP 2 LoadType Load type configuration 0 Resistive 1 XFMR uint8 04CA 1226 FiringOP 2 Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04CB 1227 0 IHC 1 Burst 2 PA 3 None FiringOP 2 PaLimitln Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04D1 1233 FiringOP 2 SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04CC 1228 FiringOP 2 SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp O Ramping 1 Finished uint8 04D2 1234 FiringOP 2 SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04CD 1229 FiringOP 2 SoftStop Soft stop duration 0 Off 1 On float32 04CE 1230 FiringOP 3 DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04E4 1252 FiringOP 3 Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04E8 1256 FiringOP 3 In Input of the firing output block float32 04E5 1253 FiringOP 3 LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04DE 1246 0 3S 1 3D 2 4S 3 6D FiringOP 3 LoadType Load type configuration 0 Resistive 1 XFMR uint8 04DF 1247 FiringOP 3 Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04E0 1248 0 IHC 1 Burst 2 PA 3 None HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 151 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 152 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec FiringOP 3 PaLimitln Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04E6 1254 FiringOP 3 SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04E1 1249 FiringOP 3 S
42. BURST FIXED FIRING gare gri csi sr 37 BURST VARIABLE FIRING ooo sue is PWD GNG eae NGANGA 38 PHASE ANGLE CONTROL adea oe ae is NENA be En NN 38 HALE CYCLE MODE mawa ba NGA st Mame hia 38 42 2 Feedback type amak ala cio kalabasa paang weal to man 39 4 2 3 Iranster Mode ba pa tira 40 42 4 Limitation teatures i e kan pantie Pa a NG LL 40 FIRING ANGLE LIMITING 0 cence a 40 DUTY CYCLE LIMITING ts ora Di ed 40 5 OPERATOR MENU an ira a ee eats 41 91 SUMMARY PAGES it ir atte fade gene gee here A PANA 41 5 1 1 Single phase summary page eee 41 5 1 2 Two or three phase summary page eee eee 41 5 1 3 Two by two phase summary page occccccccccccccc eee 41 5 2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR USER MENU 222222000000 aa 42 5 2 1 Alarm Summary Pages wavs torr seas seven sa a see EA 42 522 VIA Bo AA AA AA AA 42 5 2 3 Strategy Standby mode 0 0 cee eee 43 6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS 2222202000000 44 6 1 ACCESS TO THE ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION MENUS 44 6 11 Engineer level MENU paa Kaka BENG NG GG KARD ALALA aw NG STAGE PASAY ING 44 6 12 Configuration level menu si Da ad PIN Seas 45 6 2 TOP LEVEE MENU innri hokea te See hes ree a Gn 46 6 3 ACCESSIMENU sre sis maam dete MARANAN Lists KA A Ea edie Ka BB 47 6 3 1 Engineer level menu 27774770043 poses a peered e KANA KA ee 47 6 3 2 Configuration level access Menu teenies 48 GOTO MENU sangoa ees
43. Click to Select Output icon in the bottom right hand corner to display a full list of parameters in the if block figure 7 3 2c below Click on one of these to start a wire Down arrow 14 Math2 1 no oto ind Out In2 Current Value Off 0 7 dasal o New Value fort 0 Position in execution order Figure 7 3 2a Function block example E Function Block Yiew Right click in the function block to display the context menu Re Route Wires Function block View Displays a list of parameters associated with the function Re Route Input Wires block Hidden parameters can be displayed by de Re Route Output Wires selecting Hide Parameters and Lists when not Relevant Show Wires Using Tags in the Options menu Parameter availability Settings Hide Unwired Connections item Re Route wires Redraws all wiring associated with the function block cur ae Re Route Input Redraws all Input wiring associated with the function Copy Coe wires block amp Paste Ctrl Re Route Output wires X Delete Del Redraws all Output wiring associated with the function Undelete block Show Wires Using Tags pl O Wires are not drawn buttheir Start and End destinations db bli are indicated by tags instead Reduces wire clutter in Edit Parameter Value diagrams where source and destination are widely Parameter Properties separated l Parameter Help Figure 7 3 2b Function block context menu 10 MnalogO
44. Connection Type MODBUS TCP v Timeout Edit Host Host List Host Name IP Address Host Name Address Port 502 Block Read f 25 Registers default 125 applies to MODBUS TCP only IV Ping Host Before Connecting ox Cancel Figure 7 1 2a Adding a new Ethernet port HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 113 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 1 2 ETHERNET TCP IP COMMUNICATIONS Cont To check that the pc can now communicate with the instrument Click Start All Programs Accessories Command Prompt when the Command Prompt box appears type in Ping lt Space gt IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4 lt Enter gt where IP1 toIP4 are the IP address of the instrument If the Ethernet link to the instrument is operating correctly the successful reply arrives Otherwise the failed reply arrives in which case the Ethernet link IP address and pc port details should be verified restarted and the Scan toolbar icon used to find the instrument The scan can be stopped at any rosoft Windows RP Version 5 1 2666 CC Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settingsyrichardne Ping 123 456 789 6 Pinging 123 456 789 Bwith 32 bytes of data Reply from 123 456 789 6 Reply from 123 456 789 8 Reply from 123 456 789 6 Reply from 123 456 789 6 bytes 32 time 1ms Ping statistics for 123 456 789 6 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost Approximate round trip times in milli s
45. EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page This page is deliberately left blank HA179769 Contents Issue 9 Aug 12 Page ix EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Contents HA179769 Page x Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE SAFETY NOTES WARNING BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND SAFETY OVERLOAD PROTECTION This product does not contain any branch circuit protection or internal safety overload protection It is the responsibility of the user to add branch circuit protection upstream of the unit It is also the responsibility of the user to provide external or remote safety overload protection to the end instal lation Such branch circuit and safety oveload protection must comply with applicable local regula tions UL The abovementioned branch circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Electric Code NEC requirements WARNINGS 1 Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault condi tions Intentional interruption is prohibited 2 Before carrying out any wiring to the unit it must be ensured that all relevant power and control cables leads or harnesses are isolated from voltage sources Wire conductor cross sections must comply with table 1 of EN60947 1 or with table 2 2 2 of this manual This equipment is not suitabl
46. Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec PLMChan 2 LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 06E4 1764 PLMChan 2 LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uintl 06E5 1765 PLMChan 2 PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06E1 1761 PLMChan 2 ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06E3 1763 PLMChan 3 Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06F1 1777 PLMChan 3 LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uintl 06F3 1779 PLMChan 3 LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uintl 06F4 1780 PLMChan 3 PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 O6FO 1776 PLMChan 3 ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06F2 1778 PLMChan 4 Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 0700 1792 PLMChan 4 LMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uint16 0702 1794 PLMChan 4 LMOut PLM Channel Interface Output uintl 0703 1795 PLMChan 4 PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 O6FF 1791 PLMChan 4 ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 0701 1793 OStart AnaloglP1Func Analogue input 1 function uint8 084A 2122 0 Unused 1 Setpoint 2 SetpointLimit 3 CurrentLimit 4 VoltageLimit 5 PowerLimit 6 Transfer OStart AnaloglP2Func Analog input 2 function as AnalogIP1 uint8 084B 2123 OStart AnalogOP1Func Analogue output 1 function uint8 0848 2120 0 Unused 1 True Power 2 IRMS 3 VRMS 4 Resistance OStart DigitallP2F
47. Mains Voltage Fault as ChopOff uint8 018A 394 Network 1 AlmAck MissMains System alarm ack Missing Mains as ChopOff uint8 017E 382 Network 1 AlmAck NetworkDips System alarm ack Mains Voltage Dips as ChopOff uint8 0183 387 Network 1 AlmAck OpenThyr System alarm ack Open Thyristor as ChopOff uint8 0180 384 Network 1 AlmAck OverCurrent Indication alarm ack Over Current as ChopOff uint8 018C 396 Network 1 AlmAck OverTemp System alarm ack Over Temperature as ChopOff uint8 0182 386 Network 1 AlmAck PB24VFail System alarm ack Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0185 389 as ChopOff Network 1 AlmAck PLF Process alarm ack Partial Load Failure as ChopOff uint8 0188 392 Network 1 AlmAck PLU Process alarm ack Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0189 393 as ChopOff Network 1 AlmAck PreTemp Process alarm ack Pre Temperature as ChopOff uint8 018B 395 Network 1 AlmAck ThyrSC System alarm ack Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 017F 383 as ChopOff Network 1 AImAck TLF Process alarm ack Total Load Failure as ChopOff uint8 0186 390 Network 1 AlmDet ChopOff Process alarm detection status Chop Off uint8 015A 346 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet FreqFault System alarm detection status Frequency Fault uint8 0157 343 O Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet FuseBlown System alarm detection status Fuse Blown uint8 0154 340 O Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 015D
48. Open Loop to select None I or mg to select Unused Setpoint SP limit limit V limit P limit Transfer Appears only if IP Func is not Unused Type Use up down scro 0 10V 1 5V 2 10V 0 5V 0 20mA 4 20mA to select to select Unused Setpoint on is required as shown aao PWR Loe ALM BDO a CO Note Confirmation is required if the number of power modules is edited P 2 gt a o Q Appears only if IP Func is Type Use up down scroll to se not Unused ect 0 10V 1 5V 2 10V 0 5V 0 20mA 4 20mA Use up down scroll to select Unused Power Current Voltage Impedance Appears only if OP Func is not Unused Use up down scroll to select 0 10V 1 5V 2 10V 0 5V 0 20mA 4 20mA Use up down scroll to select Unused RemSP Sel Alarm Ack Use up down scroll to select Unused Any Alarm NetwAlarm Fuse Blown Appears only if Energy Counter option enabled Use up down keys to select Energy Counter on or off Use up down keys to select Load Management type see text fitted Use up down keys to set Load Management address Appear only if Load Management option Use up down scroll to select No Yes Confirm Finish Yes Cancel OK Figure 4 Typical Quickstart menu Page 34 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 QUICKSTART MENU Cont
49. PV transfer uint8 03EA 1002 Control 2 AlmDet ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status Closed loop break uint8 03E0 992 Control 2 AlmDet Limitation Indication alarm detection status Limitation uint8 03E2 994 Control 2 AlmDet PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status PV transfer uint8 03E1 993 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Control 2 AlmDis ClosedLoop Process alarm Closed loop break uint8 03DD 989 Control 2 AlmDis Limitation Indication alarm Limitation uint8 03DF 991 Control 2 AlmDis PVTransfer Indication alarm PV transfer uint8 03DE 990 Control 2 AlmLat ClosedLoop Process alarm latch Closed loop break uint8 03E6 998 Control 2 AlmLat Limitation Indication alarm latch Limitation uint8 03E8 1000 Control 2 AlmLat PVTransfer Indication alarm latch PV transfer uint8 03E7 999 Control 2 AlmSig ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status Closed loop break uint8 03E3 995 Control 2 AlmSig Limitation Indication alarm signalling status Limitation uint8 03E5 997 Control 2 AlmSig PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status PV transfer uint8 03E4 996 Control 2 AlmStop ClosedLoop Process alarm stop Closed loop break uint8 03EC 1004 Control 2 AlmStop Limitation Indication alarm stop Limitation uint8 O3EE 1006 Control 2 AlmStop PVTransfer Indication alarm stop PV transfer uint8 03ED 1005 Control 2 Diag Outp
50. Page 197 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Cont MASTER ADDRESS Address of elected Master on the PLM network Normally the lowest address on the PLM link If this Station is master this address is the same as the Station s PLM address otherwise it is different Function block location LoadMng Network Parameter name MasterAddr Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Read only Type Uint8 Values 1 to 63 9 6 MASTER ELECTION This mechanism ensures that the Active Station with the lowest address is elected the Master The election process can be initiated in any ofthe circumstances detailed below During the election process the Station Status is Pending As soon a Station has been recognized as Master its Status changes to IsMaster As soon a Station has been recognized as Slave its Status changes to IsSlave 9 6 1 Master Election triggers 1 The election process starts at Initialisation Time and continues until all Stations have found the Master 2 The election process is initiated if a Station has not received a firing demand for 100ms or more 3 It is assumed that if a Master has lost control it will be re initialised before being re inserted into the Network automatically activating the Master election process 4 Anew Station inserted into the System automatically triggers the Master election Notes 1 The Election mechanism is asyn
51. Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values LMChan ShedFactor With Sharing or Distributed Control only Engineer Uint8 0 to 10096 Page 194 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Cont GROUP This allows the channel to be allocated to a specific group for Incremental Distributed and Rotating Incremental Distributed control types Function block location LMChan Parameter name Group With Incremental Distributed and Rotating Incremental Accessible ea Distributed Minimum access level for editing Config Type Uint8 Values Oto 7 PZMAX Total Power installed on the channel the sum of all the maximum load powers Function block location LMChan Parameter name PZMax Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Read only Type Float32 Values Any Watts STATUS Indicates the current status of the Station Function block location LoadMng Station Parameter name Status Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Read only Type Enumeration Values 0 Pending The election of a master is in progress section 9 6 1 IsMaster This unit Station is the Master 2 IsSlave This unit is a Slave 3 DuplAddr This Station has the same address as one or more others All such Stations are disabled from taking part in Load Management Note If Pending appears perma
52. Profibus only NetStatus Read Only Appears to Fieldbus protocols only Shows the status of the communications network as follows Setup Anybus module set up in progress Init Anybus module is initialising network specific functionality Ready Process Data channel ready but inactive Idle Interface is inactive Active Process Data channel is active and error free Error One or more errors have been detected Fault Host fault detected 6 6 2 COMMS REMOTE PANEL PARAMETERS See fig 6 6 Comms 3 User Set a unique address between 1 and 254 inclusive for each instrument Use the up down arrows to select 9600 or 19200 as Baud rate for the remote panel network Figure 6 6 2 Communications remote panel menu Address Each instrument on the link must be given a unique address between 1 and 254 inclusive This may be the same or different from the address set in the CONF User Menu section 6 6 1 Baud Displays the Baud rate for the Remote panel communications Either 9600 or 19200 This may be the same or different from the Baud rate set in the CONF User Menu section 6 6 1 Note Remote Panel parity setting should be set to No parity or None HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 55 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 CONTROL MENU The control menu provides the control algorithm to perform power control and transfer threshold limiting and phase angle reduction in the case of burst firing Figure 6 7 below
53. Promote Parameter List to display the Select Item Style window figure 7 8 1a 3 Click on the required style then on OK 4 A parameter Browse window appears figure 7 8 1b for the selected row 1 in the figure allowing the user to select a parameter 5 Click OK to insert the parameter into the list 6 If required click on white square on the relevant Graph Low or Graph High title bar and set the low and high values to appear with an associated bargraph figure 7 8 1c Select Item Style Style E kz Value Only CESS Singe Row mr Left origin Bar BE Bar Graph Title 1 BEE Bar Graph Title 2 Edit item 1 Description User text only left justified Figure 7 8 1a Style selection o lo 1 AnalogIP 1 AnalogoP o1 S Main T Type T RangeHigh T RangeLow T Odput H AlmDis cab pies 1 1 AlmSig Delete Wire Figure 7 8 1b Parameter browse Graph Bounds Input low limit 6 00 Graph Low A Graph High MN 0 00 60 00 Figure 7 8 1c Graph limit setting HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 137 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 8 2 Style examples mg EUROTHERM PWR E EUROTHERM Loc ALM Figure 7 8 2a Figure 7 8 2b Text Value only single Row and Left origin Bar styles Bar Graph Title 1 Left origin bar and Bar Graph Title 2 styles Text If Text is selected a text entry window appears allowing the user to ent
54. Shock EN60068 2 29 10g peak 6ms duration 100 bumps 200 160 Amp unit Vibration EN60068 2 6 67 to 150 Hz at 1g io 100 Amp unit a 50 Amp unit 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 Temperature C EMC Standard EN60947 4 3 Emissions class A This product has been designed for environment A Industrial Use of this product in environment B domestic commercial and light industrial may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbances in which cases the user may be required to take adequate mitigation measures Immunity criteria Immunity criterion 1 but criterion 3 for voltage dips and short time interruptions OPERATOR INTERFACE Display Four lines of up to 10 characters each Display pages can be used to view process variable values and to view and edit the configuration of the unit Editing of the configuration is better carried out using configuration software iTools In addition to the standard displays up to four custom pages can be defined which allow bargraph displays text entry etc Character format Seven high x five wide yellow green LCD dot matrix array Push buttons Four push buttons provide page and item entry and scroll facilities LED indicators beacons Three indicators PWR LOC and ALM are supplied to indicate that power is applied that Local Control is selected and that there is one or more active alarm respectively HA179769 Page 204 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Con
55. The figure above shows all four channels used In reality any number between 1 and 4 can be set up for Load Management 3 The Station with the lowest address is deemed to be the master HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 175 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 1 2 Power modulation and accuracy Fixed modulation is automatically selected for all channels participating to the Load Management The Modulation period T is constant and is selected between 50 and 1000 mains periods during configuration Le lag Ton pa Tos gt o Ll Y Duty cycle n 2 Figure 9 1 2 Modulation period definitions Ton and To are related to the Modulation Period T and each corresponds to an integer number of mains periods The duty cycle n T T defines the power delivered to the load during the Modulation period T is selected during configuration and its value determines the accuracy of the power control The default value is 100 cycles T cycles Accuracy 50 2 100 1 200 0 5 500 0 2 1000 0 1 Table 9 1 2 Accuracy versus modulation period Note The value of T is chosen according to the thermal inertia speed of response of the load For loads with high thermal inertia a long modulation period may be chosen as the control integration time may be several minutes Where the load has low inertia long modulation periods can make the control process unstable if the modulation period approaches the integrati
56. Typical wiring schemes Delta CAUTION Neutral phase reference connections if applicable must be located between any isolating device and the relevant Power Module HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 27 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont TWO LEG CONFIGURATIONS Phase Ee T Phase 1 O_O Phase 2 Phase 370 Isolating device Load 1 Vline3 Vline y v3 Fuse ES Ly Reference inputs V2 Phase ES woo Vline2 Star 3S Fuse rating must be lower than cable current rating Phase 1 Phase Phase 7m EPower 1 A Phase2 0 QO C Phase 3 O Isolating device Vline3 Vline Fuse Reference inputs connected together to phase 3 Phase Phase Delta 3D Figure 2 2 2g Cont Typical wiring schemes 2 leg CAUTION Neutral phase reference connections if applicable must be located between any isolating device and the relevant Power Module HA179769 Page 28 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK See fora discussion about external feedback including more examples Note The current transformer should be chosen such that its full
57. Yes resets the totaliser value to zero and resets the totaliser alarm e Back to Total Out Figure 6 27 Totaliser menu Total Out The integrated total between 101 and 1019 i e 10 000 000 000 In The parameter to be totalised Units Units of the totalised measurement Resolution Set the number of decimal places for the totaliser value AlarmSP Totaliser alarm setpoint This threshold is applied to the totalised measurement When totalising positive values a positive AlarmSP value must be entered the totaliser alarm being triggered when the totaliser value reaches or exceeds AlarmSP When totalising negative values a negative value must be entered the totaliser alarm being triggered when the totaliser value reaches or goes more negative than AlarmSP If set to zero the alarm is disabled AlarmOut The on off status of the totaliser alarm Run Yes initiates integration No inhibits integration Hold Yes suspends integration No restarts integration Reset Yes resets the totaliser value to zero and resets the totaliser alarm HA179769 Page 110 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 28 USER VALUE MENU This provides storage for a user defined constant Typical uses are as a source for a maths function or as storage for values written over the communications link UsrVal N 3 Status Use up down arrows to select required user value then Enter Use return key EP one
58. Z INSTALLATION c53 haban a a diia 4 3 OPERATOR INTERFACE 2222200 ccc eee eee e seen e nae 31 4 QUICKSTART eisted BAGA GA KANA KALA ha him pa hah LABAG OLGA Aha eaea tas 34 5 OPERATOR MENU 273g paisa A BOK NN dna PNG 41 6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS 2222200000 44 7 USING TOOLS 2mm ma BBL R ALINA LAG BA a es 112 8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES MODBUS 0 000 ce cece eee eee eens 140 9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION 00 00 eee eee eee eee 175 TO ALARMS na ooh casted dan anan AG kano nadal dua tend lia amn NG 200 11 TECHINICALSPECIFICATION Za daama mal maat A ad LANGAW NG 203 12 MAINTENANCE 6 i0sacnicnc baga go A A ea kph GUDANG 209 APPENDIXA REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT oc AMG ma ma Dha AKA LU weal Seed S 211 APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK 222220 0 000000 ccc cece eee eee 235 INDEX 1 ost rt AA i ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS HA179770 Communications Manual HA028838 iTools help manual SOFTWARE EFFECTIVITY This manual relates to units with software version 3 05 PATENTS This product is covered by one or the more of the following patents France FR 06 02582 Published 2899038 Europe 07104780 7 Pending US 11 726 906 Pending China 200710089399 5 Pending HA179769 Contents Issue 9 Aug 12 Page i EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page List OSUNA DAA dha eee eee A ae i ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS re tose boat Cap Sade Cage Bp tL eee diets ke SOFTWARE EFFECTIVITY coi ai pe aa dds oe eal
59. can be used to scroll through the others Figure 6 20 3 Network alarm menu NETWORK ALMDIS SUBMENU This menu allows individual network block alarms listed below to be enabled disabled Section 10 gives more details of these alarms MissMains Thyr SC Open Thyr Fuse Blown Over Temp Volt Dips Freq Fault PB 24V TLF Chop Off PLF PLU VoltFault PreTemp Over Missing Mains Thyristor Short Circuit Thyristor open Circuit Fuse Blown Over Temperature Mains Voltage Dips Frequency Fault Power Board 24V Failure Total Load Failure Chop Off Partial Load Failure Partial Load Unbalance Mains Voltage Fault Pre Temperature Over Current Page 92 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 3 NETWORK ALARMS Cont NETWORK ALMDET SUBMENU As for Alarm Disable above but this Alarm detect submenu indicates whether any of the network alarms has been detected and is currently active NETWORK ALMSIG SUBMENU These displays show whether an alarm has occurred and also contains latching information The relevant AlarmSig parameter is used when wiring to a relay for example The alarm list is as given above NETWORK ALMLAT SUBMENU As for Alarm Disable above but this Alarm Latch submenu allows each individual network block alarm to be defined as latching or non latching NETWORK ALMACK SUBMENU As for Alarm Disable above but this Alarm Acknowledge submenu allows each individual netw
60. dashed green wire changes to solid black after being downloaded THICK WIRES When attempting to wire between blocks which are located in different tasks if no task break is inserted then all the affected wires are highlighted by being drawn with a much thicker line than usual Thick wires still execute but the results are unpredictable as the unit cannot resolve the strategy COMMENTS Comments are added to a wiring diagram by click dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the diagram As soon as the mouse is released a dialogue box opens to allow the comment text to be entered Carriage returns are used to control the width of the comment Once text entry is complete OK causes the comment to appear on the diagram There are no restrictions on the size of a comment Comments are saved to the instrument along with the diagram layout information Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right hand corner of the comment box and then clicking again on the required block or wire A dashed line is drawn to the top of the block or to the selected wire segment figure 7 3 2f Note once the comment has been linked the Chain icon disappears It re appears when the mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right hand corner of the comment box as shown in figure 7 3 2f below Comment Context Menu Edit Opens the Comment dialogue box to allow the comment text to be edited
61. gives an overview of the menu which is described in the following sections 6 1 1 lad 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 6 ES 6 7 8 67 9 62 10 Setup Main Limit Diag Diagnostics AlmDis Alarm disable AlmDet Alarm detection AlmSig Alarm signalling AlmLat Alarm latch AlmAck Alarm Acknowledge AlmStop Stop firing on alarm Use up down arrows to select the required control algorithm then Enter Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Section 6 7 3 Section 6 7 4 QD gt Diag 3 PA Limit wa Section 6 7 5 Section 6 7 6 Page 56 Section 6 7 7 Section 6 7 8 Section 6 7 9 Section 6 7 10 Ao gt 5 a 5 AlmLat DD Y VD Y gt Limitati gt Limitati DW DW Figure 6 7 Control menu HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 1 Control Setup Parameters This contains parameters for setting the type of control to be performed PAD CONF gt Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use ED Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Control gt Setup Setup ED Standby Use up down arrows to set the 3 Standby XD 7 unit to standby Yes or not No Setup ED Nominal PV Enter Nominal PV value gt NominalPV ED 457500 see text for more details Setup ED Lim
62. in the top level diagram within the bounding rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected Creates a new wiring diagram as described in Compound below Ctrl x Ctrl C Ctrl amp Cut Copy A Paste Re Route Wires Align Tops Align Lefts Space Evenly X Delete Undelete Select All Create Compound Rename Copy Graphic Save Graphic Copy Fragment To File Paste Fragment From File Centre Figure 7 3 2h Diagram context menu Allows a new name to entered for the current wiring diagram This name appears in the relevant tab Copies the selected items or the whole diagram if no items are selected to the clipboard as a Windows metafile suitable for pasting into a documentation application Wiring entering leaving the selection if any are drawn in tag mode As for Copy Graphic above but saves to a user specified file location instead of the clipboard Copy Fragment To File Copies selected items to a user named file in folder My Tools Wiring Fragments located in My Documents Paste Fragment From File Allows the user to select a stored fragment for inclusion in the wiring diagram Centre Places the display window at the centre of the selected items If Select All has previously been clicked on then the display widow is placed over the centre ofthe diagram HA179769 Page 124 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATIN
63. period below If the input returns to the on state before the time period has elapsed the elapsed time is reset to zero so that the full time period is added to the On period when the input switches off again Triggered is On whilst the elapsed time is greater than zero Time Allows the user to set a time period for use as described in Type above Initially the display is in the form Minutes seconds 10ths of seconds but as the input value increases the format changes first to Hours Mins Secs then to Hrs Mins Holding the up arrow key continuously operated causes the speed at which the value increments to increase Minimum entry is 0 1 seconds maximum is 500 hours Elapsed Time Shows how much of the time period has passed so far In The timer trigger input The function of this input varies according to timer type as described above Out Shows the timer on off status Trigger Function depends on timer type as described above 6 26 2 Timer examples Figure 6 26 2 shows some timing examples for the different types of timer available On Pulse timer One Shot timer Input Output A FEA Time Time Elapsed _ l l Trigger l l Input Input re triggers before Time expires Elapsed 1 I i l Trigger Output Input Time edited input high lak Time edited input low Output A l l A B l ee A B Time wo Ap UN Elapsed l UA l N n l Trigger Input gates output Dara Tim
64. transport requirements HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 3 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2 1 1 Fixing details Units are designed to operate at an operating temperature not exceeding 40 C unless the modules are de rated see specification Units must be installed in a fan cooled cabinet with fan failure detection or thermal safety cutout Condensation and conductive pollution should be excluded to IEC 664 class 2 The cabinet must be closed and connected to the protective earth according to IEC 60634 or applicable national standard Units must be mounted with the heat sink vertical with no obstructions above or below which impede the airflow Where more than one set of modules is enclosed in the same cabinet they must be mounted such that air from one unit is not drawn in by another mounted above it An air gap of at least 5 cm should be maintained between adjacent sets of modules The units are designed for fitting to the front face of a mounting panel using the fixings supplied The thyristor power modules are heavy so a Health and Safety risk assessment should be carried out before personnel attempt to lift the units It should also be ensured prior to fitting that the mechanical strength of the panel is sufficient for the mechanical load being applied Table 2 1 1 gives the weights of the various units GENERAL Figure 2 1 1a below shows details of a generalised mechanical assembly f
65. 0 Off 1 On bool O9CA 2506 Lgc8 2 In4 Input 4 Value O Off 1 On bool 09CB 2507 Lgc8 2 In5 Input 5 Value O Off 1 On bool 09CC 2508 Lgc8 2 In6 Input 6 Value O Off 1 On bool 09CD 2509 Lgc8 2 In7 Input 7 Value O Off 1 On bool O9CE 2510 Lgc8 2 In8 Input 8 Value bool 09CF 2511 Lgc8 2 InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09C6 2502 Lgc8 2 NumlIn Number of Inputs uint8 09C7 2503 Lgc8 2 Oper Operation 0 Off 1 AND 2 OR 3 XOR uint8 09C5 2501 Lgc8 2 Out Output Value bool 09D0 2512 Lgc8 2 Outlnvert Invert the Output 0 No 1 Yes bool 09D1 2513 Lgc8 3 In1 Input 1 Value 0 Off 1 On bool O9DF 2527 Lgc8 3 In2 Input 2 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E0 2528 Lgc8 3 In3 Input 3 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E1 2529 Lgc8 3 In4 Input 4 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E2 2530 Lgc8 3 In5 Input 5 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E3 2531 Lgc8 3 In6 Input 6 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E4 2532 Lgc8 3 In7 Input 7 Value O Off 1 On bool 09E5 2533 Lgc8 3 1n8 Input 8 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09E6 2534 Lgc8 3 InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09DD 2525 Lgc8 3 Numln Number of Inputs uint8 09DE 2526 Lgc8 3 Oper Operation 0 Off 1 AND 2 OR 3 XOR uint8 09DC 2524 Lgc8 3 Out Output Value bool 09E7 2535 Lgc8 3 Outlnvert Invert the Output 0 No 1 Yes bool 09E8 2536 Lgc8 4 In1 Input 1 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09F6 2550 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4
66. 054B 1355 SetProv 4 RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 054C 1356 SetProv 4 SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 0546 1350 SetProv 4 SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 054E 1358 SetProv 4 SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0550 1360 SetProv 4 WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0545 1349 Timer 1 ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0916 2326 Timer 1 In Trigger Gate input 0 Off 1 On bool 091B 2331 Timer 1 Out Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0917 2327 Timer 1 Time Time time32 0918 2328 Timer 1 Triggered Triggered Flag 0 Off 1 On bool 0919 2329 Timer 1 Type Type of Timer 0 Off 1 OnPulse 2 OnDelay uint8 091A 2330 3 One shot 4 MinOnTime Timer 2 ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0927 2343 Timer 2 ln Trigger Gate input 0 Off 1 On bool 092C 2348 Timer 2 Out Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0928 2344 Timer 2 Time Time time32 0929 2345 Timer 2 Triggered Triggered Flag 0 Off 1 On bool 092A 2346 Timer 2 Type Type of Timer As Timer 1 Type uint8 092B 2347 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Timer 3 ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0938 2360 Timer 3 In Trigger Gate input 0 Off 1 On bool 093D 2365 Timer 3 Out Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0939 2361 Timer 3 Time Time time32 093A 2362 Timer 3 Triggered Triggered Flag 0 Off 1 On bool 093B 2363 Timer 3 Typ
67. 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS Cont RUN LED Indication Pin Function j 3 110R 1 2W 5 LED state Interpretation 1 DA Rett ID baa adzo Off Off line or no power 2 DB Rx Tx first and last connec Green Normal operation 3 DG Signal ground Red Major fault fatal error 4 SLD Cable shield SLD and FG con 5 FG Protective earth nected internally Notes ERR LED Indication 1 A 110 Ohm 5 1 2 watt terminating resistor LED state Interpretation should be connected across pins 1 and 2 of the Of Na enro ror ne nana connectors at each end of the transmision line Steady red Exception or a event 2 The cable shield should be connected to pin 4 of each CC Link connector 3 The shield and Protective earth terminals pins 4 and 5 are internally connected Flickering red CRC Error Flashing red Station number or Baud rate has changed since startup Figure 2 2 1k CC Link connector pinout NS Network status LED LED state Interpretation Off No power or no IP address Steady green On line one or more connections established CIP class 1 or 3 Flashing green On line no connections enabled E Steady red Duplicate IP address fatal error a Flashing red One or more connections timed out CIP class 1 or 3 6 MS Module status LED LINK LED LED s
68. 227 Type A Me ella otha Het tks WOM Te Aa KAG tod 177 Lgc2 AA ao AA Maran MUS Lacie arcada Savas a 80 AY PO 2 AAA Cee ee eee kaaa 178 Modbus parameter addresses 155 156 Gr Ae etait a NANG a Ena 95 177 193 Lgc8 eed SRR sso eased AA ag ey ca te E E 82 O cen fad aaa NAA 95 178 193 Modbus parameter addresses rnt sat 156 Indication Alarms a 202 Limit o e hf Sat ike 107 fi ae he ee Be Lain AA 60 Nominal A AS A igen YG 89 limit Enables to a BA NA le PNG gana 57 Input Limit Chis 0G Na A A AL NT na 32 Definida PORN ALam 130 Limitation Energy count ao nn potatoe ingen oe 71 Alarm Acknowledge 06 s steerer tenes 65 Mediterraneo 85 Alarm Detection eee earra 62 Alarm Disable cocina aus eee 61 Index HA179769 Page iv Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Alar eaten aka nan aan a 64 Frequency fault alarm a 200 Alarm Signalling a 63 Network measurements aa 208 NEE AA AA tds 66 Voltage fault alarm ooo 201 limitation active aa an rd 202 Wiring Line and Load terminations a 21 Driver Umit ad PANG anit TAAS iSANG 10 Line power wiring Thyristor power unit eee eee eee 19 BINA AA PAPA AA 10 Mains Freges ps kaaa aba Paa an NG Gn kn aang 32 LMONEFSEN e terrano KABAN nl laa 32 Maintenance vecina di delas 209 AA A AA 84 MainVFault 842 ova es de lirio ae aca 32 E TO DE 230 MAN peac meene aa taco panna 219 220 L
69. 3 NI an 2 gt NI co x N Ly Current transformer Figure 6 23 3f Four tap secondary HA179769 Page 104 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 24 RELAY MENU Use up down arrows to select relay number then Enter Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Relay 1 fitted as standard Shows the status of the Relay driver signal as Off or On The current status of the relay 1 coil energised 0 coil not energised gt Meas Val Figure 6 24 Relay menu 6 24 1 Relay parameters PV This shows the status of the input to the relay as either On True or Off False Meas Val Shows the current state of the relay coil 1 energised O de energised where energised is off and de energised is on See figures 2 2 1c and 2 2 1d for relay pinout details HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 105 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 25 SETPROV MENU This feature supplies 1 local and two remote setpoints CONF gt SetProv Hip SN SetProv N SP Select SetProv N gt Remote S SetProv N 3 Local SP SetProv N gt Remotel1 SetProv N gt RampRate SetProv N 3 DisRamp ID 3 SPUnits 45 Prov Rang y DD SetProv N D D Set N gt H e gt Eng Work Remote select PRem1 6 Figure 6 25 SetProv men
70. 4 Resolution Output Resolution as for Math2 1 uint8 0908 2312 Math2 4 Select Select Between Input 1 0 and Input 2 1 bool 090B 2315 Math2 4 Status Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool 0906 2310 Math2 4 Units Output Units as for Math2 1 uint8 0909 2313 Modultr 1 CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uintl 045F 1119 Modultr 1 In Input of the modulator block float32 045D 1117 Modultr 1 LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection uint8 0460 1120 0 1 2 cycle 1 Full cycle Modultr 1 MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 045E 1118 Modultr 1 Mode Modulator mode uint8 0462 1122 0 IHC 1 BurstVar 2 BurstFix 3 Lgc 4 PA Modultr 1 Out Modulator logical output float32 045C 1116 Modultr 1 PLMin Load management interface input uintl 0461 1121 Modultr 1 SwitchPA Switch Burst PA 0 Burst 1 PA uint8 0466 1126 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Modultr 2 CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 0475 1141 Modultr 2 In Input of the modulator block float32 0473 1139 Modultr 2 LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection as Modultr1 uint8 0476 1142 Modultr 2 MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uintl 0474 1140 Modultr 2 Mode Modulator mode as Modultr1 uint8 0478 1144 Modultr 2 Out Modulator logical output float32 0472 1138 Modultr 2 PLMin Load management inte
71. 690V I 6kV 690V Auxiliary Fan supply II 2 5kV 230V POWER at 40 C CAUTION Although the driver module supply voltage range is 85 to 265V ac the fans if any fitted to the power thyristor modules are specified for use at one of 115V ac or 230V ac as specified at time of order Before plugging the fan harness into the driver module ensure that the utility supply voltage is suitable for the fan s Otherwise fan life may be shortened or the cooling effect may not be sufficient either case presenting a possible hazard to the equipment or to the operator Driver Module Installation Category Power Module Rated short circu Cooling Voltage range Frequency range Power requirement Number of modules Voltage range Frequency range Nominal current Power dissipation it conditional current Up to and including 100A Above 100A Fan supply voltage Fan power requirement Protection Pollution degree Installation category Utilization categories Duty cycle Form designation Short circuit protection Load Types Thyristor drive Power network Auxiliary fan supply co ordination type 100 to 240 V ac 10 15 47 to 63 Hz 60W Power Module fans 15W each for 400 500 630A power modules 10W each for 160A 250A modules Installation category Il category Ill for relays Up to four identical units per Driver Module 100 to 600 V ac 10 15 CE and UL units or 100 to 690 V ac 10
72. 80 Control uu nananana 61 AS ep ab PAA an ak Banat tanan Ah ND DE 80 Load Management LL naaa anna 78 BS a ute aa mr Reece ao e S 80 Network unan 92 e it ANAN nG ete Cree ANA nee 80 AlmLat OE tere ent eae Es AA des ae 80 Analogue output Lana nan ana nana 52 IA A ALT APNE AOR AEA 80 Control eee eee eee 64 Load Management a 98 101 Numerics NetWork A E A IA 93 10x Lopes sca es Acad Al aah An na ek lc aN E ang 84 AlmSig 2 leg WITING cc 28 30 Analogue output 52 zdela WING tive wi gd MA KNANG akg ale Sed SY es 27 30 a I er ONE 63 Two leg AKA AA 28 30 Load Management u s 98 101 S2Star WING duo BE NG AGNO a Gace oe naina 26 29 A a aan A 93 ASA o EE 26 AlmStop sss 6 delia WING a an a erang kawa 27 29 Analogue output 52 A Con NN ANG Kh 66 PMG amen AR AA DEN AGA KA PR TE ARIES t 222 226 Load Management a 98 101 AURORA ida 101 Network 93 Alem e tas eh 101 Altitude maxiMUM aa 204 O Na ein an EP TY Na oad 84 Analog IP Access KUNG tn elit le mng Aaah Ras seals atan 35 A gat Ah anal kaaa ra sitions Bahan 47 Meni is ab shh tats Aton as 50 MSU aa ar 47 Specifications KO KANG aa 205 Acknowledge alarms nnna ananasa 31 65 219 230 pena a Aa wives Shands he ter ahd 35 7 NG o A RAP RA CPP GA 84 Analog O AA AA o Eo pda e 51 Adding parameters to the Watch list 135 O dhe Paka AA ha ue Naa nG 35 ADD r tee ryt Steak te NE e ta oks 226 Modbus parameter addresses 153 Addre
73. 9 Aug 12 Page 201 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 10 2 6 Partial Load Failure PLF See also PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS in section 6 20 2 This alarm detects a static increase in load impedance by comparing the reference load impedance as configured by the user with the actual measured load impedance over a mains cycle for phase angle firing and over the burst period for burst and logic firing The sensitivity of the partial load failure measurement can be set to any value between 2 to 6 inclusive where an entry of 2 for example means that one half of the elements or more must be open circuit in order to trigger the alarm an entry of 3 means that one third of the elements or more must be open circuit in order to trigger the alarm and so on down to one sixth All elements must have identical characteristics and identical impedance values and must be connected in parallel The relevant parameters PLFAdjustReq and PLFSensitivity are both to be found in Network Setup as described in section 6 20 2 For three phase loads the impedance reference can be set only if the load is balanced Note This Alarm is returned FALSE if the TLF Total Load Failure Alarm is set on this phase 10 2 7 Partial Load Unbalance PLU This alarm is applicable only to three phase load configurations and indicates when the difference between highest and lowest current value reaches a threshold PLUthreshold configurable between 5 and 50
74. CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 23 2 LTC ALARM Cont CONF gt LTC ES LTC See figure 6 23 for gt MainPrm MainPrm menu WD WA Used to disable the external Fuse a blown alarm SI E Solid yellow Alarm disabled y D LTC 3 AlmDet Used to disable the external over tempera _ ture alarm 0 z ol E Solid yellow Alarm disabled ED 3 Temp 8 y LTC gt AlmSig Back to Fuse 4 y LTC Structure as for AlmDis 3 AlmLat See text for details d LTC gt AlmAck y LTC gt AlmStop 3 y AO Figure 6 23 2 Load tap changer alarm menu 6 23 3 LTC Application wiring The following illustrations give typical wiring information for a number of different Load Tap Change applications The diagrams are meant for guidance only and are not definitive Neutral reference 7 Current feedback Voltage feedback Fuse rating must be lower N than cable current rating Current transformer Figure 6 23 3a Two tap primary HA179769 Page 102 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 23 3 LTC APPLICATION WIRING Cont S gt w gt N uw N EPower 1 EPower 2 EPower 3 N Ss Xx 4 N 5 N Neutral reference Current feedback Voltage feedback Load Current transformer Figure 6 23 3b Three tap primary
75. Configuration level HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 227 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Home display ConF a a a a a gt INPUT OP 1 Op 3 LA See HA029006 for details y of other parameters LB ALARM RECIP COMMS CAL i ACCES O Select access level ConF GOTO O See HA029006 for details of other parameters Within menus the Page key i moves user up one level 0 Static Home message A OFF MESG O scrolling 5 10 30 ogag O ASCRL O ASCRL Q gt ASCRL Q gt Oz Homepage No Q gt Yes Q gt HHOME HHOME Qu and Setpoint Display No Q p Yes Q CTL SP CTL SP Figure A5 4 1a Level 3 and configuration level menu structure ASCRL Auto scrolling The up or down arrow is used to scroll through the values available these being Off No scrolling or 5 10 or 30 seconds where the selected time value specifies the time between scrolls See AUTO SCROLL below for further details HHOME Hide Homepage If set to Yes the home page is never displayed so the associated parameters can never be viewed at lower access levels CTL SP Control and Setpoint Display If set to Yes the EPower control parameters Current Voltage
76. Control 1 Limit SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 03A4 932 Control 1 Limit SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 03A5 933 Control 1 Limit SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 03A6 934 Control 1 Limit Tl Integral time of the limit loop float32 03A7 935 Control 1 Main PV The main PV of the controller float32 039C 924 Control 1 Main SP Main SP to control at float32 039D 925 Control 1 Main TI Integral time ofthe main loop float32 03A0 928 Control 1 Main TransferPV The transfer proportional limit PV float32 039E 926 Control 1 Main TransferSpan The transfer proportional limit span float32 039F 927 Control 1 Setup EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit 0 No 1 Yes uint8 0396 918 Control 1 Setup FFGain Feedforward gain float32 0399 921 Control 1 Setup FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 039A 922 Control 1 Setup FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 0398 920 0 Off 1 Trim 2 FFOnly Control 1 Setup NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 0395 917 Control 1 Setup Standby Put controller into standby 0 No 1 Yes uint8 0394 916 Control 1 Setup TransferEn Enable Transfer Proportional limit 0 NO 1 Yes uint8 0397 919 Control 2 See Control 1 for enumeration values Control 2 AlmAck ClosedLoop Process alarm ack Closed loop break uint8 03E9 1001 Control 2 AlmAck Limitation Indication alarm ack Limitation uint8 03EB 1003 Control 2 AlmAck PVTransfer Indication alarm ack
77. Cs cotas ona NG Aaa PLAN NG 199 TO ALARMS sio A E op BEING dile 200 LO SYSTEM ALARMS ol AA it aS 200 103141 4Missingimains lA a A E ERRE ENE NADERA NAG PDE arene 200 T0 1x2 Thytistor short circuit waaa dag maakay GNG UG ln Laag anga sad 200 T0 1 3 Thyristor open circuit veas paaa paa IA aa eee ie oe dows ARE ANA 200 TO Td RUSS lO WA ssid a ak NA an ala a NA NG BELA 200 10 1 5 Overtemperature 2 0 0 cece eee eens 200 T016 Network CIPS sss wie ahs Soe nce ae i Ss ae toda ana DA ais ae ky 200 10 1 7 Mains frequency fault 2 0 0 emie naa eia aa eens 200 10 1 8 Power board 24V fail 27 73 coria tao ghee eee da epee DAGA D LINA NANA 200 10 2 PROCESSTALARMS maana na Aa KAN eek Shee ee E Peay LAB AGANG aes 201 10 2 1 Total Load Failure TEF a ee eee un PAGING PAN BANG 201 10 22 Outputshort circuit o NG ANG a 201 10 2 3 Chop Ofic NG A PAA A 201 10 2 4 Mains Voltage Fault ressaire ienai cc 201 10 2 5 Temiperature pre Alarm nicas ces Dha ie ae ABER NN Npa haa 201 10 2 6 Partial Load Failure PLF 0c cece ccc cence ene n eee 202 10 2 7 Partial Load Unbalance PLU 0 ccc eee eee 202 10 3 INDICATION ALARMS peces roseis ncn 202 10 3 1 Process Value Transfer active a 202 103 2 Limitation active pi REL ANA ANONG a NADAAN 202 10 3 3 Load Ove r Current mica AnG a PALING PAREN BAKLA NAGA 202 10 3 4 Over Load Shedding Ps over Pr alarm an 202 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 22
78. Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital OV Not used Relay 3 No 34 Relay 3 Com 31 Relay 3 NC 32 O 09 oT wW N Polarising pins Fixed connector pins 2 and 3 Mating connector pin 1 Mating connector section Polarising key Position 3 Optional I O 3 10 Volts out Analogue i p 5 Analogue i p 5 Analogue o p 4 Analogue o p 4 OV Digital input 7 Digital input 8 Digital OV Not used Relay 4 No 44 Relay 4 Com 41 Relay 4 NC 42 Polarising pins Fixed connector pins 1 and 3 COND UI BB win Mating connector pin 2 SK1 SKI 10Voutput o 1 5 4 10V output MENE 5 Analogue g a Analogue 2 IA VE aa 2 0d 55 input 1 3 a Vinput inpu Maa 2 Analogue 4 TMA input Analogue 4 24 2 input2 5 iz 240R internal shunt input215 04 o Analogue 6 jj Analogue 6 d output 1l 7 o ov mA or Voltage output output1l7 o aaa E 8 J01 3 le yO 1 4V lt Vin lt 30V High Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 1 02 2 lt Vin lt 4V not defined 9 f sae 9 07 High 4 to 30 V Contact logic input ov 10 TON YEA Low 30V to 2 V 1 0 2 shown I O 1 similar 8 1 01 Digital 1 O 9 102 output 4 ov 15V 10mA current source Notes 1 0 2 shown I O 1 simi
79. EN ES UT HODODODDD GODDODODO sim 000000000 000000000 OOOOOOOOO GT N JA it 711I Overall Widths mm Note Units are shown with individual No of phases 1 2 3 4 mounting brackets Multi phase units come Door closed 149 5 234 5 319 5 404 5 supplied with two three or four phase brackets as appropriate See table below for Dooropen 211 0 296 0 381 0 466 0 details Overall Widths inches Upper bracket Lower bracket No of phases 1 2 3 4 2 phase Use A and B Use E and F Door closed 5 89 9 23 12 58 15 93 3 phase Use A Band C Use E F and G Door open 8 31 11 65 15 00 18 35 4 phase Use A B C and D Use E F G and H Figure 2 1 1c Fixing details 160 Amp unit Page 6 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 1 1 FIXING DETAILS Cont
80. Each Burst B is seen as a Rectangle R where i is between 1 and n inclusive Eventually these i rectangles will be placed in time but initially they are not placed 4 Cumulative Band Initialisation 5 Calculation of Pt and Pmax from the following equations where L duty cycle and H load power n P Y RLXRH Py RH i l i l 6 Rectangle placement Each rectangle is placed and the bands modified in consequence The same algorithm is performed several times and iteratively for all the rectangles From the result the solution with the best Efficiency Factor is taken as definitive result HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 183 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 4 LOAD SHEDDING Load Shedding controls the total power distribution amongst loads by reducing the amount of Power distributed for each load so that the global power demanded is less than a given maximum Ps Load Shedding and Load Sharing may be used together if required 9 4 1 Definitions Pz the power installed on a particular channel zone For channel i Pz is given by the following equation 2 Pai 4 R 1 This parameter PZMax is available to the user in the Block LMChan The Total Installed Power is the sum of all the relevant Maximum Load Powers Thus for n channels the total Installed Power on the network Pmax is given by n Tras Y PA i l Pmax is available to the user in the Block LoadMng Network The actual power
81. Energy in Watt hours float32 0B11 2833 Energy 1 Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B09 2825 Energy 1 PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uintl OBOA 2826 Energy 1 PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse uint8 OBOC 2828 0 Disabled 1 1 2 10 3 100 4 1k 5 10k 6 100k 7 1M Energy 1 Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B07 2823 Energy 1 TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B08 2824 Energy 1 TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units multiplier uint8 OBOD 2829 0 1 1 10 2 100 3 1k 4 10k 5 100k 6 1M 7 10M 8 100M 9 1G Energy 1 Type Type of energy counter 0 Normal 1 Global bool OBOE 2830 Energy 1 UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B04 2820 Energy 1 UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier uint8 OBOB 2827 0 1 1 10 2 100 3 1k 4 10k 5 100k 6 1M 7 10M 8 100M 9 1G Energy 2 AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy O No 1 Yes bool 0B23 2851 Energy 2 Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B19 2841 Energy 2 Input Input to totalise float32 OBIA 2842 Energy 2 prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B24 2852 Energy 2 prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B25 2853 Energy 2 Pulse Pulsed output bool OB1D 2845 Energy 2 PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 JOB1E 2846 Energy 2 PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse as Energy 1 uint8 0B20 2848 Energy 2 Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool
82. Firing stops in the relevant power module each time the threshold is met or exceeded Firing restarts after 100ms providing that the threshold has not been exceeded the specified number of times within the specified number of seconds Otherwise firing remains disabled until the alarm is acknowledged Note for two or three phase systems the over current measurements relate to the maximum current in any phase regardless of which phase may be at fault 10 2 4 Mains Voltage Fault Two thresholds OverVoltThreshold and UnderVoltThreshold can be configured as a percentage of VLineNominal Both parameters are to be found in the Network Setup area of configuration section 6 20 2 The threshold check of each line voltage is implemented in the corresponding network task of the power controller This fault is indicated within 1 mains cycle period Note This Alarm is returned FALSE if the MissingMains Alarm is set on this phase 10 2 5 Temperature pre Alarm This function acts as a warning which becomes active when unexpectedly high operational temperatures are reached The warning becomes active before unit operation stops HeatsinkPreTemp threshold is configured between 30 C and 107 C and if this value is exceeded by the heat sink in any Power module the alarm is triggered A hysteresis of 2 C is applied to avoid fast toggling The parameter is to be found in Network Setup as described in section 6 20 2 HA179769 Issue
83. G11 1 pH ino SG a Figure 9 2 5b Incremental distributed control example two groups 9 2 6 Rotating Incremental Distributed control This method of control is similar to Incremental distributed control described above but within each group the modulating channel number is incremented every modulation period Chan G25 10 096 100 Chan G24 9 100 2 J chanG2318 l Lo O 096 LL 100 O Chan G22 4 096 100 Chan G21 3 100 Chan G16 11 096 100 Chan G15 7 l 0 y 100 a Chan G14 6 5 h 100 pes o Chan G13 5 mi 100 Chan G12 2 096 100 Chan G11 1 Figure 9 2 6 Rotating Incremental distributed control example two groups HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 181 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 3 LOAD SHARING Load Sharing controls the time distribution of Total Power amongst loads taking into account the amount of Power required by each load 9 3 1 Total power demand Each burst of power is defined by three parameters 1 P Maximum load power Depends on line voltage and load impedance P V2 Z 2 n Duty cycle T T 3 D Delay time Where more than one load channel is being used the Total power demand varies in a complex way as can be seen in the simple example with just two channels shown in figure 9 3 1 below T pe gt Ton1 D2 Ton2 CB
84. Graphical wiring window for E Graphical Wirin the current instrument configuration to open Initially this reflects the function block wiring p a as set in the Quick Start menu File Device Wiring View Options Window Help O ce A A A New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Views Help EE Graphical Wiring ES Parameter Explorer BS Fieldbus 1 0 Gateway E Device Panel fi Watch Recipe O User Pages Pai OPC Scope Tools Secure E Y epower 123 456 789 100 502 E3 epower 123 456 789 100 502 1D001 ePower Graphical Wiring YH PR ios vb Alix 2 a j Al Nd 30 wires used 50 free A0 Top Compound 1 lt gt TI Browse Id Find O Blocks 0 AAA i i Main PY Diag Status 4 Comment Main 5P Diag Output 12 Monitor Limit Pv1 Diag PAOP 20 10 s Limit 5P1 F 10 AnaloglP Do 10 AnalogOP F 10 AnalogOP 1 10 AnalogOP 2 D Analog0P 3 SPSelect WorkingSP IF 0 AnalogOP 4 RemSelect RateDone Usrval 2 Val DJ I0 Digital Remote1 OF 10 Relay Remote2 TE Instriment A Level 2 Engineer ePower v E2 22 Figure 7 3 Graphical wiring Editor The graphical wiring editor allows 1 Function blocks notes comments etc to be drag and dropped into the wiring diagram from the tree list left pane 2 Parameters to be wired to one another by clicking on the output the clicking on the required input 3 Viewing and or editing of parameter values by right clicking on a function block and se
85. HA179769 Page 84 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 19 MODULATOR MENU This function implements the modulation type firing modes such as fixed and variable period modulation CONF 3 Modultr Modultr2 N Use up domn arrows to select modulator number then Enter Use return kE one or more times from within menu to return to this page TA Allows modulation firing mode to be selected from Modultr N Logic PA phase angle Half Cycle BurstVar or 3 Mode BurstFix Input signal representing the required power output Modulator logical output for controlling the power module s If mode PA this is a phase angle demand 71 EP J o 1 I I Min On time Appears only for Mode BurstVar gt gt Min On DA 16 z i UA SN E AB 3 VD WA ATO a ya res T 1 A 1 o Modultr N lt gt gt 5 Cycle Ti Lg SD Cycle Time 75 Appears only for Mode BurstFix Dl eS ee Ee mn a e u u u M E YD MA Cai aiai a For Mode Logic only defines when the output from Modultr N gt Logic Mode 1 the modulator block is to be stopped gt Half Cycle stops on next zero crossing Full Cycle stops at next full cycle zero crossing Use up down arrows to select the oad management interface input nput fillter time in modulation periods 0 Filter disabled Switch PA Use up down arrows to select Burst Burst or Phase Angle Figure 6 19 Modulator m
86. Hazardous Substances RoHS Product group 3200 Table listing restricted substances Chinese Pe Fl 5S FP AR RBA SMREBBAEMAYRA ATH SBE SJ TI 1363 2006 PHEMEN REE RUF RIRBABASMRELEBRBAHR HRPADN SMBH SIT 1363 2006 XEM RMER English Restricted Materials Table Product Toxic and hazardous substances and elements 3200 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Approval Name Position Signature Date o o o Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager inka Cuad NA LL 01 48 24 14029470U600 CN23172 Issue 1 Feb 07 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 235 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank HA179769 Page 236 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK B1 TRANSFORMER REPRESENTATION AND LABELLING Note The current transformer should be chosen such that its full scale output is 5 Amps Figure B1 shows a common way of showing typical three phase transformers of various types Each type is useful for particular applications for example a Delta primary helps with a more even distribution of loading if the secondary loads are not well matched whilst a Star wound second
87. LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION CONNECTOR This option allows a number of systems to communicate with one another to allow load management techniques such as Load Sharing and Load Shedding to be implemented The connector is located as shown in figure 2 2 1b Note Connecting pins 1 and 5 together has the effect of introducing a terminating 120 Ohm resistor across pins 2 and 4 It is recommended that this be done at each end of the transmission line 1 Terminator A 1 Signal Low Shield Signal High 5 Terminator B 5 Signal low Station 1 Station 2 Station i Station n Shield Signal high Nmax 64 Maximum Trunk line length 100 metres 328 ft Maximum individual drop length 5 metres 16 ft Maximum cumulative drop length 30 metres 98 ft Conductor pair size 24 gauge 0 25 mm Characteristic impedance at 500kHz 120 Ohms 10 Nominal capacitance 800Hz lt 40pF Unbalance capacitance lt 4 10 pF m Capacitance between conductors 100pF metre Attenuation at 500kHz 1 64dB 100 metres Note The figures above are for a network of up to 100 metres with up to 64 units connected The actual network impedance is a function of cable type cable length and the number of units connected For futher details contact the manufacturer or local agent Figure 2 2 1e Predictive Load Management wiring Load Shari
88. Load Management The lowest address on the network normally becomes the master Indicates the current master slave status for thisunit as follows Pending The election of the master is not yet complete IsMAster The unit is athe PLM network master IsSlave This unit is a slave Duplicate address Two or more units have the same address Units with identical addresses are excluded from the load management process This shows the number of channels participating in load management for this unit Automatically configured from the load management wiring for this unit Maximum number of channels 64 Maximum number of channels per station 4 Maximum number of stations 64 Maximum number of groups 8 Example1 There can be a maximum of 16 four channel units i e 64 channels Example 2 There can be a maximum of 63 three phase units i e 63 channels These outputs must be wired to the load management channel function block PLMChan1 to 4 PLMIn in order to connect a power control channel to the load management network Page 96 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 21 3 Predictive Load Management Network menu This includes load management network parameters Total Stations Total Channels Pmax Pt Ps Pr Efficiency Master Address See figure 6 21 1 for Main figure 6 21 2 for Station and figure 6 21 4 for Alarm parameters Network Shows
89. Load impedance measurement on first power module defined as Z Vrms Irms Measurement uses line current not leg current and load voltage so value may not be accurate for some multi phase wiring configurations Load impedance measurement on the 2nd and 3rd phase of the network respectively Heat sink temperatures Used to protect the Power Modules from overheating Page 88 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 2 Network Setup Submenu This displays the setup of the network and associated functions Network gt Setup AD y Setup gt Network AD a Network Type e y AD y Vline Nominal lt 4230 Use up down arrows to request adjust Vdips Threshold PLF WS Use Enter key to select next phase 410 Adjust Req ogo a Solid yellow Setup adjust requested js D amp amp FreqDrift Threshold PLF Adjusted 4 2 O E Solid yellow Adjustment complete Dy PLF Sensitivity 2 s Dey ChopOff2 Zref Threshold 200 0 ED aY ED SS y Number Zref2 Chop Off 5 0 ED DY EP DY Window Zref3 Chop Off 60 0 ED DY ED Sy OverVolt PLU Threshold For 3 phase networks only Threshold 10 10 Dey bay UnderVolt Over Threshold Threshold 15 120 De y PreTemp Heatsink Heater Type Resistive a0 lt amp gt Network Type Vline Nominal VloadNominal Maximum INominal lextScale Figure 6
90. Low alarm or sensor break ROC alarm or sensor break High alarm or after power fail Low alarm or after power fail ROC alarm or after power fail High alarm or sensor break or power fail Low alarm or sensor break or power fail ROC alarm or sensor break or power fail Analogue output OP3 Not used x Not configured 1 4to 20mA output 2 Oto 20mA output 3 Oto5V dc output 4 1to5V dc output 5 Oto 10V dc output 6 2to 10V dc output Select the first list O Select the next list Q Change to the next O character Digital input A Not configured Alarm acknowledge Keylock Remote up button Remote down button Recipe 2 select Alarm inhibit Peak Reset Freeze PV lt zZO lt UCAEX Digital input B Not configured Alarm acknowledge Keylock Remote up button Remote down button Recipe 2 select Alarm inhibit Peak Reset Freeze PV lt ZC lt UCAS Table A4b Set 2 parameter coding Notes il 2 selected as a high alarm thus enter an alarm state when power is removed from the unit To re enter quickstart mode Remove power from the unit Keeping the Page key operated continuously restore power and wait until a password is requested Release the Page key and use the up down arrow keys to enter the quickstart password default 4 In order for the unit to act as an over temperature police officer the OP1 alarm type should be The relay o
91. Lowest value since LOW switch on or reset Alarm 1 threshold 150 C Type selected in A1 HI Set 2 9 Further alarms appear if configured at level 3 Further y Network 1 networks y Final network 98 A RMS currentor B p BJ 95 A IRMS this network IRMS 227 V RMS Voltage for 234 V VRMS this network VRMS 14728 W Network Power 14844w POWER POWER 200 Total energy for this 250 ENRGY network ENRGY 63 Yo Working setpoint 57 Yo WSP See section A5 2 3 to change WSP Figure A5 2a Single phase example configuration Network 2 appears only for 2 x 2 leg configurations y Network 1 y Network 2 A A 50 A1 current for 50 A 2 current for this IAVG this network IAVG network 240 V 1 Average Voltage 240 V 2 Average Voltage VAVG for this network VAVG for this network 11350W 1 11350W 2 POWER POWER 150 1 150 ENRGY ENRGY 71 69 2 WSP WSP 2A1 2A2 IRMS1 IRMS1 1A1 142 IRMS2 IRMS2 47A1 47A2 IRMS3 IRMS3 239V1 239V VRMS1 VRMS1 237V1 237 V2 VRMS2 VRMS2 242 V1 242 V2 VRMS3 VRMS3 Figure A5 2b Three phase 2x2leg example configuration HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 221 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 2 LEVEL 1 OPERATION Cont A5 2 1 Process Parameters ENRGY Energy Shows the global energy counter in the EPower instrument This is only
92. Main Print mamamana DYAN sd 101 Watch Recipe lad rd os 136 A kas aLak maka na a 100 MAA AA AB do 84 M N MACTto MAC Ou ndn cial iaa let Wal bi kaha 55 NetStatuss csi ls tecdony tada ele 55 Magenta wiring editor items 124 NetWwDip ita PNTA drei a han 32 Main Network Analogue output a 51 A O a a doin 73 PWE Banaga PE ae ee 60 Acknowledge menu 0 0a 93 Moin Pina 55 54 bose A Napaan ye ch 101 Detect MenuU 6 eee eee 93 Mains Disabl m nuis cs cu cide ea dae NARE ANNA wees 92 HA179769 Index Issue 9 Aug 12 Page v EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE katGhiME RW ti ALLAN tia 93 HALINA a tt add ahha Bk 60 75 Signalling menu a 93 PaGe KEY Laci tile Atay nds 219 Stop firing menu eee eee eee 93 PAN tOOl me pLa Gag rr 118 Communications Menu a 55 ANG AN PAA 101 BT ose IA NG NN AA NAN ED 200 Parameter MENU a A eed et 86 BING ads pa ia deb pd 128 E kaa yen kOe gag weed lees 87 Explore i eere kennar one po hole de dee g 127 SETUP esate tne ee as ds 89 A ka kag km ieee Coen Raa 120 123 129 Modbus parameter addresses 159 162 165 167 Properties aha Ha ate da aed ALA 120 129 PE sra AA 35 77 89 PANY AA AA AA 54 Network dips 02m paa GAYA ND ANI ee 13 Remote Panel 55 Neutral reference input a 20 Partial Load Failure PLF NG Br ic SY Ga ml tato BG na kpag AA 95 A A NGARAN ANG Pala aaa 202 Nominal Curtent s serre GN veep decade heen KANA 35 Calculati
93. Missing Mains uint8 02AA 682 Network 3 AlmSig NetworkDips System alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02AF 687 Network 3 AlmSig OpenThyr System alarm signalling status Open Thyristor uint8 02AC 684 Network 3 AlmSig OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status Over Current uint8 02B8 696 Network 3 AlmSig OverTemp System alarm signalling status Over Temperature uint8 02AE 686 Network 3 AlmSig PB24VFail System alarm signalling status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02B1 689 Network 3 AlmSig PLF Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Failure uint8 02B4 692 Network 3 AlmSig PLU Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02B5 693 Network 3 AlmSig PreTemp Process alarm signalling status Pre Temperature uint8 02B7 695 Network 3 AlmSig ThyrSC System alarm signalling status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02AB 683 Network 3 AlmSig TLF Process alarm signalling status Total Load Failure uint8 02B2 690 Network 3 AlmStop ChopOff Process alarm stop Chop Off uint8 02E0 736 Network 3 AlmStop FreqFault System alarm stop Frequency Fault uint8 02DD 733 Network 3 AlmStop FuseBlown System alarm stop Fuse Blown uint8 02DA 730 Network 3 AlmStop MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02E3 739 Network 3 AlmStop MissMains System alarm stop Missing Mains uint8 02D7 727 Network 3 AlmStop NetworkDips System alarm stop Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02DC 732 Network 3 AlmStop OpenThyr System alarm stop Open Thyri
94. PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Lgc8 4 In2 Input 2 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09F7 2551 Lgc8 4 In3 Input 3 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09F8 2552 Lgc8 4 1n4 Input 4 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09F9 2553 Lgc8 4 In5 Input 5 Value O Off 1 On bool O9FA 2554 Lgc8 4 In6 Input 6 Value O Off 1 On bool 09FB 2555 Lgc8 4 In7 Input 7 Value O Off 1 On bool O9FC 2556 Lgc8 4 In8 Input 8 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09FD 2557 Lgc8 4 InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 09F4 2548 Lgc8 4 Numln Number of Inputs uint8 09F5 2549 Lgc8 4 Oper Operation 0 Off 1 AND 2 OR 3 XOR uint8 09F3 2547 Lgc8 4 Out Output Value bool O9FE 2558 Lgc8 4 Outlnvert Invert the Output 0 No 1 Yes bool O9FF 2559 LTC AlmAck Fuse System alarm ack Fuse blown uint8 OAF2 2802 LTC AlmAck Temp System alarm ack Over Temp uint8 OAF3 2803 LTC AlmDet Fuse System alarm detection status Fuse Blown uint8 OAEC 2796 LTC AlmDet Temp System alarm detection status Over Temp uint8 OAED 2797 LTC AlmDis Fuse System alarm Disable External Fuse blown uint8 OAEA 2794 LTC AlmDis Temp System alarm Disable External Over Temp uint8 OAEB 2795 LTC AlmLat Fuse System alarm latch External Fuse Blown uint8 OAFO 2800 LTC AlmLat Temp System alarm latch External Over Temp uint8 OAF1 2801 LTC AlmSig Fuse System alarm signalling status external Fuse Blown uint8 OAEE 2798 LTC AlmSig Temp System alarm signalling status ext
95. Page 65 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 10 Control Alarm Stop parameters Allows individual channels to be configured such that it will stop the associated power channel from firing whilst the alarm is active This feature is activated by the signalling parameters so the alarm stop may be latching CONF 3 Control ED ES Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use ED Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Control gt AlmStop AlmStop gt ClosedLo A gt Limitati moo Use up down arrows to select AlmStop then Enter ClosedLoop Solid yellow the closed loop alarm pre 0 E vents firing when active Solid yellow the transfer alarm pre vents firing when active E Solid yellow the limitation alarm pre vents firing when active gt Back to ClosedLoop Figure 6 7 10 Control Alarm Stop menu Closed Loop The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether the closed loop alarm has been configured to disable firing or not An empty key indicates that the firing is enabled a solid yellow key indicates that the firing is disabled PV Transfer As for Closed Loop but for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Page 66 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE
96. Setup VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 0312 786 Network 4 Setup VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 032F 815 Network 4 Setup VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 031F 799 Network 4 Setup VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 0323 803 Network 4 Setup VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 0330 816 Network 4 Setup Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0328 808 Network 4 Setup Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 0329 809 Network 4 Setup Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 032A 810 PLM AlmAck PrOverPs Indication alarm acknowledge Pr Over Ps uint8 06C6 1734 0 NoAck 1 Ack PLM AlmDet PrOverPs Indication alarm detection status Pr Over Ps uint8 06C3 1731 O Inactive 1 Active PLM AImDis PrOverPs Indication alarm Pr Over Ps O Enable 1 Disable uint8 06C2 1730 PLM AlmLat PrOverPs Indication alarm latch request Pr Over Ps uint8 06C5 1733 0 NoLatch 1 Latch PLM AlmSig PrOverPs Indication alarm signalling status Pr Over Ps uint8 06C4 1732 0 Not latched 1 Latched PLM AlmStop PrOverPs Indication alarm stop request Pr Over Ps uint8 06C7 1735 0 NoStop 1 Stop PLM Main Period Modulation period uintl 06B2 1714 PLM Main Type Load Management Type 0 None 1 Sharing uint8 06B1 1713 2 IncrT1 3 IncrT2 4 Rotlncr 5 Distr 6 IncrDistr 7 RotIncrDistr PLM Network Efficiency Load management efficiency factor uint8 06C0 1728 PLM N
97. Setup VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 027A 634 Network 3 Setup VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 027E 638 Network 3 Setup VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 028B 651 Network 3 Setup Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0283 643 Network 3 Setup Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 0284 644 Network 3 Setup Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 0285 645 Network 4 See Network 1 for enumeration values Network 4 AlmAck ChopOff Process alarm ack Chop Off uint8 0376 886 Network 4 AlmAck FreqFault System alarm ack Frequency Fault uint8 0373 883 Network 4 AlmAck FuseBlown System alarm ack Fuse Blown uint8 0370 880 Network 4 AlmAck MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0379 889 Network 4 AlmAck MissMains System alarm ack Missing Mains uint8 036D 877 Network 4 AlmAck NetworkDips System alarm ack Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0372 882 Network 4 AlmAck OpenThyr System alarm ack Open Thyristor uint8 036F 879 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 167 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 168 Issue 9 Aug 12 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 4 AlmAck OverCurrent Indication alarm ack Over Current uint8 037B 891 Network 4 AlmAck OverTemp System alarm ack Over Temperature uint8 0371 881 Network 4 AlmAck PB24VFail System alarm ack Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0374 884 Network 4 AlmAck PLF Proces
98. The instrument has been placed in configuration mode The instrument has been taken out of configuration mode A global acknowledgement of all safe latched alarms has been performed The instrument has restarted after a power down The Quick Start menu has been re entered The Quick Start menu has been left One or more limits are active in the control block An over current alarm has become active in one or more Network blocks Predictive Load Management over schedule The actual power Pr is greater than the requested shed power value Ps detected in the PLM block Process value transfer is active in one or more control blocks One or more thyristor protection fuses is ruptured Mains Frequency is outside the acceptable range One or more supply phases is missing One or more network dip alarms has been detected One or more over temperature alarms has been detected A power supply problem has been detected on the Driver Unit power board ChopOff One or more Chop off alarm has been detected ClosedLp One or more Control block Closed Loop alarm has been detected InputBrk An Input Break alarm has been detected in one or more Analogue input blocks MainVFault One or more Mains Voltage Fault over or under has been detected OutFault An Output short Circuit alarm has been detected in one or more Analogue output blocks PLF One or more Partial Load Failure alarm has been detected PLU O
99. User Comms IP address 4 User Comms Network Version User Comms Parity User Comms Pref Mstr IP 1 User Comms Pref Mstr IP 2 User Comms Pref Mstr IP 3 User Comms Pref Mstr IP 4 User Comms Protocol User Comms ShowMac User Comms Subnet Mask 1 User Comms Subnet Mask 2 User Comms Subnet Mask 3 User Comms Subnet Mask 4 User Comms Unitldent UsrVal HighLimit UsrVal LowLimit UsrVal Resolution UsrVal Status UsrVal Units UsrVal Val Wire Dest Wire Src HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 133 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 6 DEVICE PANEL amp Device Panel When this toolbar icon is clicked on a representation of the connected instrument either on line or a clone appears in the iTools window The operator interface acts as in the real instrument note 1 but instead of operating the push buttons by hand the relevant items are clicked on using the mouse Changes made at the operator interface are reflected at the iTools screen and vice versa The display can be scaled as required by click dragging on the sides bottom or corners Notes 1 An up down arrow key appears above the display for operations e g acknowledging VA system alarms which require simultaneous operation ofthe up and down arrow keys 2 Real instruments can be recognised by the factthat the representation ofthe display is in green whereas for cloned instruments the display is shown in white see figure 7 6 below epower 123 456 7
100. User IP address 2 2nd byte of IP address uint8 0771 1905 Comms User IP address 3 3rd byte of IP address uint8 0772 1906 Comms User IP address 4 4th byte of IP address uint8 0773 1907 Comms User MAC1 MAC address 1 uint8 0789 1929 Comms User MAC2 MAC address 2 uint8 078A 1930 Comms User MAC3 MAC address 3 uint8 078B 1931 Comms User MAC4 MAC address 4 uint8 078C 1932 Comms User MAC5 MAC address 5 uint8 078D 1933 Comms User MAC6 MAC address 6 uint8 078E 1934 Comms User NetStatus Fieldbus Status uint8 0795 1941 Comms User Network Ethernet Network status int16 0781 1921 Comms User Network Version CC Link Network Version uint8 0798 1944 Comms User Occupied Stations Occupied Stations uint8 079A 1946 Comms User Parity Parity setting O none 1 even 2 odd uint8 076E 1902 Comms User PNDevNum Profibus station number uint8 0C01 3073 Comms User PNinitMode Profibus initialise mode uint8 0C00 3072 Comms User Pref_Mstr_IP_1 1st byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077C 1916 Comms User Pref_Mstr_IP_2 2nd byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077D 1917 Comms User Pref_Mstr_IP_3 3rd byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077E 1918 Comms User Pref Mstr IP 4 4th byte of Preferred Master IP address uint8 077F 1919 Comms User Protocol Comms Protocol uint8 076B 1899 0 Modbus 5 Ethernet 10 Network 11 Profibus 12 DeviceNet 13 CanOpen 14 CCLink 15 Profinet 16 Ethernet IP Comms User ShowMac Show MAC address bool 0788 1928 Com
101. Z Edit Unlink Deletes the current link from the comment Unlink Cut Moves the comment to the Clipboard ready to be pasted Cut Ctrl x elsewhere Short cut lt ctrl gt lt X gt Copy Ctrl C Copy Copies the comment from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard ready to be pasted elsewhere Short cut lt ctrl gt lt C gt X Delete Del Paste Copies a comment from the Clipboard to the wiring diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt V gt Delete Marks the comment for deletion at next download Figure 7 3 2e Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken place nee since HA179769 Page 122 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont MONITORS Monitor points are added to a wiring diagram by click dragging them from the Function Block tree onto the diagram A monitor shows the current value updated at the iTools parameter list update rate of the parameter to which it is linked By default the name of the parameter is shown To hide the parameter name either double click on the monitor box or Show Names in the context right click menu can be used to toggle the parameter name on and off Monitors are linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the bottom right hand corner of the box and then clicking again on the required parameter A dashed line is drawn to the top of the block or the selected wire segment Note once the monitor has been linked
102. acknowledgement status of the output Fault alarm AlmStop Allows the user to set up the alarm to disable Power Module firing whilst active Note Output fault may be triggered by either short circuit or open circuit HA179769 Page 52 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 6 COMMS MENU CONF 3 Comms User gt Baud Rate User gt Subnet2 User gt Subnet3 See fig 6 6 2 NO Comms Displays type of communications fit ted Displays the protocol for the type of communications fitted Allows Baud Rate to be selected for relevant protocols Selectable values depend on communications type Allows the unit address to be set Each instrument on the link must have a unique address Displays the number of addresses occupied by this EPower unit See text for details Allows Odd Even or None to be selected for relevant protocols Select Comms delay on or off for rel evant protocols Allows Unit ID checking ensble to be set up Choose Fixed or Dynamic Enter first Byte of IP address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter second Byte of IP address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter third Byte of IP address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter fourth Byte of IP address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter first Byte of Subnet Mask address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter second Byte of Subnet Mask address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter third Byte of Subnet Mask address
103. adjustment float32 O1E5 485 Network 2 Setup VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 01D5 469 Network 2 Setup VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 01D9 473 Network 2 Setup VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack uint8 01E6 486 Network 2 Setup Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 01DE 478 Network 2 Setup Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 01DF 479 Network 2 Setup Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 01E0 480 Network 3 See Network 1 for enumeration values Network 3 AlmAck ChopOff Process alarm ack Chop Off uint8 02D1 721 Network 3 AlmAck FreqFault System alarm ack Frequency Fault uint8 02CE 718 Network 3 AlmAck FuseBlown System alarm ack Fuse Blown uint8 02CB 715 Network 3 AlmAck MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02D4 724 Network 3 AlmAck MissMains System alarm ack Missing Mains uint8 02C8 712 Network 3 AlmAck NetworkDips System alarm ack Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02CD 717 Network 3 AlmAck OpenThyr System alarm ack Open Thyristor uint8 02CA 714 Network 3 AlmAck OverCurrent Indication alarm ack Over Current uint8 02D6 726 Network 3 AlmAck OverTemp System alarm ack Over Temperature uint8 02CC 716 Network 3 AlmAck PB24VFail System alarm ack Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02CF 719 Network 3 AlmAck PLF Process alarm ack Partial Load Failure uint8 02D2 722 Network 3 AlmAck PLU Process alarm ack Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02D3 723 Network 3 AlmAck PreTemp Process alarm
104. all hazardous voltages and secured against accidental application of power before the doors are opened It is recommended that voltage checks are carried out within the unit if wired or at the supply and load cables before any work is started For 50A 100A 160A and 250A units to remove the doors insert a non insulated screwdriver with a 5 mm flat blade into the slot near the top of the door and gently lever downwards to disengage the catch and pull the top of the door away from the unit Once free the door can be lifted off its pivots which are located at the bottom of the case For the 400A unit the door is released by undoing the two fasteners near the top of the door and then pulling the top of the door away from the unit Once free the door can be lifted off its pivots which are located at the bottom of the case The 500A 630Amp module door is similar to the 400Amp module but once released the bottom of the door is pulled downwards to disengage it from its securing lugs not lifted off as described for the 400A module i pea Door removal 500 630A units HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 21 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont Supply voltage termination Nut KI Spring washer Washer gt poong A Crimp tag gt EE Termination detail Cable termination recommended torque 50A 100A 160A 12 5Nm 250A 25
105. and a quarter of this value Thus for a 400 Amp unit any nominal current value between 100 and 400 may be selected Lower values are not recommended as in such cases the resulting accuracy and linearity are not guaranteed to be within specification A value between the maximum permanent supply voltage 10 to the modules and a quarter of this value Available values are 100 110 115 120 127 200 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 460 480 500 575 and 600 Allows the user to select 1 2 or 3 phases depending on the Power Modules Network Type selection made in Power Modules above The table shows the 0 0 choices 1 1 For Network Type entries other than single phase 5 a 2 phase allows 3 Star or 3 Delta to be selected a Tor2 3 phase allows 3 Star 3 Delta 4 Star or 6 Delta to be selected Allows Resistive or Txformer transformer to be selected as the type of load If Txformer is selected this modifies the start up procedure to limit the inrush current Select from Logic BurstVar BurstFix HalfCycle or Ph Angle Allows the user to choose open Loop V 1 Power Vrms or Irms If Feedback is set to any value other than Open Loop None I or Irms can be selected as transfer mode If Feedback is set to Open Loop the Transfer Mode page does not appear Selects the Analogue input 1 function as Unused Setpoint
106. as Lgc2 1 uint8 0AC8 2760 Lgc2 3 Out The Result 0 Off 1 On bool OACD 2765 Lgc2 3 Status Output Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool OACE 2766 Lgc2 4 FallbackType Fallback Condition as Lgc2 1 uint8 OAD5 2773 Lgc2 4 Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 OAD9 2777 Lgc2 4 In1 Input Value 1 float32 OAD3 2771 Lgc2 4 In2 Input Value 2 float32 OAD4 2772 Lgc2 4 Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 OAD6 2774 Lgc2 4 Oper Logic Operation as Lgc2 1 uint8 OAD2 2770 Lgc2 4 Out The Result O Off 1 On bool OAD7 2775 Lgc2 4 Status Output Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool OAD8 2776 Lgc8 1 In1 Input 1 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09B1 2481 Lgc8 1 In2 Input 2 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B2 2482 Lgc8 1 In3 Input 3 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B3 2483 Lgc8 1 In4 Input 4 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B4 2484 Lgc8 1 In5 Input 5 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B5 2485 Lgc8 1 In6 Input 6 Value 0 Off 1 On bool 09B6 2486 Lgc8 1 In7 Input 7 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B7 2487 Lgc8 1 In8 Input 8 Value O Off 1 On bool 09B8 2488 Lgc8 1 InInvert Invert Selected Inputs uint8 O9AF 2479 Lgc8 1 NumlIn Number of Inputs uint8 09B0 2480 Lgc8 1 Oper Operation 0 Off 1 AND 2 OR 3 XOR uint8 O9AE 2478 Lgc8 1 Out Output Value bool 09B9 2489 Lgc8 1 Outinvert Invert the Output 0 No 1 Yes bool 09BA 2490 Lgc8 2 In1 Input 1 Value O Off 1 On bool 09C8 2504 Lgc8 2 In2 Input 2 Value O Off 1 On bool 09C9 2505 Lgc8 2 In3 Input 3 Value
107. closure inputs Source current 10mA min 15mA max Open contact non active resistance gt 5000 Closed contact active resistance lt 1500 Current source output Source current 9MA lt l ource lt 14MA 14V 10MA lt lsource lt 15MA OV 9MA lt lsource lt 14MA 15V Open circuit voltage lt 14V Internal pull down resistance 10kQ to O V Absolute Maxima terminal 30V or 25mA OV terminal 2A Notes 1 Absolute maximum ratings refer to externally applied signals 2 The 10V potentiometer supply is designed to supply two 5kQ potentiometers connected in parallel with one another 3 The maximum current for any OV terminal is 2A HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 205 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Cont Analogue input Voltage input performance Parameter Typical Max Min Total voltage working input span note 1 0 25V to 12 5V Resolution noise free note 2 13 bits Calibration error notes 3 4 lt 0 25 lt 0 5 Linearity error note 3 0 1 Ambient temperature error note 3 lt 0 01 C Input resistance ve terminal to OV gt 140kQ Input resistance ve terminal to OV 150Q Allowable voltage ve terminal to OV 1V Series mode rejection of mains 46dB 5308 interference Common mode dc rejection 46dB gt 40dB Hardware response time 5ms Note 1 w r t to the relevant ve input Note 2 w r t total working span Note 3 of effecti
108. contacted for advice 3 Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired the unit shall be made inoperative and secured against accidental operation The manufacturer s nearest service centre should be contacted for advice 4 Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage is forbidden for safety reasons 5 Units are designed to be installed in a cabinet connected to the protective earth according to IEC364 or applicable national standards The cabinet must be closed under normal operating conditions Adequate air conditioning filtering cooling equipment must be fitted to the cabinet in order to prevent the ingress of conductive pollution the formation of condensation etc 6 Units are designed to be mounted vertically There must be no obstructions above or below which could reduce or hamper airflow If more than one set of units is located in the same cabinet they must be mounted in such a way that air from one unit is not drawn into another 7 Signal and power voltage wiring must be kept separate from one another Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 1 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE SAFETY NOTES Cont 8 Ifthe equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired 9 In order to maintain protection against electrostatic discharge any scratched
109. created the data sets are edited as described above Finally once all the required data sets have been created edited and saved they can be downloaded y the instrument one at a time using the Download tool the Download Values item in the Recipe or context menus or the short cut lt ctrl gt lt D gt 7 7 2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons D Y xied4d Un 30080B8B8 Create a new watch recipe list Creates a new list by clearing out all parameters and data sets from an open window If the current list has not been saved confirmation is requested Short cut lt ctrl gt lt N gt Open an existing watch recipe file If the current list or data set has not been saved confirmation is requested A file dialogue box then opens allowing the user to select a file to be opened Short cut lt ctrl gt lt O gt Save the current watch recipe list Allows the current set to be saved to a user specified location Short cut lt ctrl gt lt S gt Download the selected data set to the device Short cut lt ctrl gt lt D gt Insert item ahead of selected item Short cut lt Insert gt Remove recipe parameter Short cut lt ctrl gt lt Delete gt Move selected item Up arrow moves selected parameter up the list down arrow move the selected parameter down the list Create a new empty data set Short cut lt ctrl gt lt w gt Delete an empty data set Short cut lt ctrl gt lt Delete gt Capture current values into a data set Fill
110. currently participating in the Load Management strategy Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values PT LoadMng Network Pmax Always Read only Float32 No limits Watts Indicates the total amount of power that has been demanded from the network The sum of the powers demanded by each channel participating in the Load Management strategy Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values PR LoadMng Network Pt Always Read only Float32 No limits Watts Indicates the total amount of power that has actually been delivered through the network This value could be larger than Ps depending upon the Shed Factors of all channels Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values EFFICIENCY LoadMng Network Pr Always Read only Float32 No limits Watts Indicates how efficiently Load Management is operating as a percentage value This F is calculated from the equation F Pmax PtMax PtMin Pmax where PtMax the maximum peak value of total power during the modulation period PtMin the minimum peak value of total power during the modulation period Function block location LoadMng Network Parameter name Efficiency Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Read only Type Uint8 Values O to 100 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12
111. detection status Total Load Failure uint8 0159 345 O Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDis ChopOff Process alarm Chop Off 0 Enable 1 Disable uint8 014B 331 Network 1 AlmDis FreqFault System alarm Frequency Fault as for ChopOff uint8 0148 328 Network 1 AlmDis FuseBlown System alarm Fuse Blown as for ChopOff uint8 0145 325 Network 1 AlmDis MainsVoltFault Process alarm Mains Voltage Fault as for ChopOff uint8 014E 334 Network 1 AlmDis MissMains System alarm Missing Mains as for ChopOff uint8 0142 322 Network 1 AlmDis NetworkDips System alarm Mains Voltage Dips as for ChopOff uint8 0147 327 Network 1 AlmDis OpenThyr System alarm Open Thyristor as for ChopOff uint8 0144 324 Network 1 AlmDis OverCurrent Indication alarm Over Current as for ChopOff uint8 0150 336 Network 1 AlmDis OverTemp System alarm Over Temperature as for ChopOff uint8 0146 326 Network 1 AlmDis PB24VFail System alarm Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0149 329 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmDis PLF Process alarm Partial Load Failure as for ChopOff uint8 014C 332 Network 1 AlmDis PLU Process alarm Partial Load Unbalance uint8 014D 333 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmDis PreTemp Process alarm Pre Temperature as for ChopOff uint8 014F 335 Network 1 AlmDis ThyrSC System alarm Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0143 323 as for ChopOff Network 1 AImDis TLF Process alarm Total Load Failure as for ChopOff uint8 014A 330 Network 1 AlmLat ChopOff Process alarm l
112. document Page 212 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION A location should be chosen which is subject to minimum vibrations the allowable ambient temperature range is O to 55 C 32 to 131 F and the acceptable humidity range is 5 to 95 RH non condensing To remove the indicator from its Sleeve ease the latching ears outwards and pull the unit forward When plugging back in ensure that the latching ears click into place maintains the IP65 sealing 1 An aperture with dimensions as shown in figure A2 should be made in the panel 2 Ifitis not already in place fit the IP65 sealing gasket behind the front bezel of the unit 3 From the front of the panel insert the unit through the cut out 4 Spring the panel retaining clips into place and secure the unit in position by pushing both retaining clips forwards until they bear on the back of the panel 5 Peel off the protective cover from the display 96 mm i 102 5 mm lt gt lt A I A vy Latching ear 90 mm 3737 MO ELA Ka o PFroncview g dai v Mode 5 N E x Retaining clip Latching ear Sealing gasket IP65 Aalaga Sleeve Panel cutout mm Width 92 0 0 0 8 Height 45 0 0 0 6 X Minimum inter unit spacing mm Horizontal x 10 View on underside Vertical y 38 g LO Nay ll 0 N o c Y 9 E KO c Oo
113. dual function of remote display and independent policeman to disconnect power should an over temperature or other excess process condition occur The unit is intended for indoor use in a permanent installation enclosed in an electrical panel To ensure IP65 and NEMA 4 front sealing against dust and water the panel should have a non textured surface Communications between the unit and EPower are via RJ45 Panel comms port located on the underside of the controller module The communications standard is 3 wire ElA485 and It uses Modbus protocol The display unit comes complete with one relay output OP1 and one analogue output OP3 A1 1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION NOTES WARNING The safety and EMC protection can be seriously impaired ifthe unit is not used in the manner specified The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of the installation WARNING Live sensors The remote panel is designed to operate if the temperature sensor is connected directly to an electrical heating element However you must ensure that service personnel do not touch connections to these inputs while they are live With a live sensor all cables connectors and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated for use in 240Vac CATII WARNING The Remote Panel must not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 240Vac with respect to ground and the prod
114. ek ee USER GUIDE maan sete one LANGAN BRA SEN Sa ee de ka oh aha Ba eee aided 3 1 INTRODUCTION ciren 2505425 nuance a siii sde 3 1 1 UNPACKING THE UNITS 22222220 tect nett nena 3 2 INSTALLATION paaa NG TAR Wa e s PAN dares DEA eae el eee doa ee 4 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2 0 0 000 000 ccc nett teens 4 214 Fixing details oi ssid Gale te een ia ate pada sd Ss Qk Dae aces 4 GENERAL o eeue cies BAN dak shed gee aig id aa 4 2 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 0 ccc ec cece cee E E eee t nee eene 10 2 21 Driver Module cubas a wien phe ea bah 10 SUPPLY VOLTAGE 3 ngana o a eh as nee ear eas 10 FAN SUPPEIES AA 10 ENABLE INPUT 20x83 24 ees ete a dee aaa 10 SAFETY EARTH 2 fineness NANA aad MIND Cie Ge nuendo gin tebe O 11 SIGNAL WIRING 22003023804 NANG eae thy NG BG bng Daan ee deer 11 WATCHDOG RELAY wesc cu naa eras 13 RELAY T ct AL NA ye eis bere es Kan e aye TEA ee ke a 13 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION CONNECTOR 2 0 0 14 CONFIGURATION PORT cusco aag hey ING NA nG Lia KELAN KG GANA 15 COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS 2222000 e cece eens 16 2232 Powekmodule5 ni aakala a MM bes aba an Soe ak ceeds eect 19 LINE LOAD GABLES ce dd Pa Ngang 19 RIBBON CABLE ceca haa a PAREN ad 19 EXTERNAL CURRENT FEEDBACK 2222200 rr 19 REMOTE VOLTAGE INPUT 27x 20x00 incas LAGA KAG id 20 NEUTRAL PHASE REFERENCE INPUT 22 22000 c cece ee ee eee 20 ACCESS TO LINE AND LOAD TERMINATIONS 00 000 e eens 21 THREE PHASE STAR CONFIGURATIONS
115. empty the word FAIL appears instead of the recipe number A6 3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS If EPower is configured via QuickStart and the analogue input has been set to Setpoint then in a multiple network configuration QuickStart will wire SetProv1 workingSP to the Main SP of all the networks Control blocks so that all the control blocks share the same setpoint Figure A6 3 below shows two examples of this as displayed in the iTools Graphical wiring editor Main PY Diag Status Main SP Diag Output Diag PAOP Control 1 Main PY Diag Status Main SP Diag Output Diag PAOP 2 Q SPSelect WorkingSP Control 2 RemSelect RateDone Main PV Diag Status Remote1 Main SP Diag Output Remote2 Diag PAOP DisRamp OG SPSelect WorkingSP RemSelect RateDone Remote1 Control 3 Remote2 Main PY Diag Status DisRamp Main SP Diag Output 1 Diag PAOP J o Control 3 Main PY Diag Status Main SP Diag Output 3 phase 2 x 2 leg Multiple single phase o Pinapa Figure A6 3 Setpoint to Control block wiring Tools graphical wiring editor display HA179769 Page 232 Issue 9 Aug 12 A6 3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS Cont If EPower is configured using QuickStart and the analogue input is not set to Setpoint then none of the Set Prov function blocks is enabled and each control block setpoint can be set locally If EPower is configured using the Tools Graphical wiring editor then it is po
116. firing time is two half cycles the non firing time is one half cycle figure 4 2 19 Ton Toff Ton Toff i i i For 66 duty cycle Ton 2 half cycles Toff 1 half cycle Figure 4 2 1g Half cycle mode 66 duty cycle 4 2 2 Feedback type All feedback types except Open Loop are based on real time measurement of electrical parameters that are normalised to their equivalent Nominal values Thus Vams is normalised to Nominal Voltage V is normalised to the square of Nominal Voltage and P is normalised to the product of Nominal Voltage and Nominal Current V2 Feedback is directly proportional to the square of the RMS voltage measured across the load For two or three phase systems feedback is proportional to the average of the squares of the individual phase to phase or phase to Neutral RMS voltage across each load Power Feedback is directly proportional to the total true power delivered to the load network 12 Feedback is directly proportional to the square ofthe RMS current through the load For two or three phase systems feedback is proportional to the average of the squares of the individual RMS load currents Vims Feedback is directly proportional to the RMS voltage measured across the load or for multi phase systems to the average of the individual phase to phase or phase to neutral RMS load voltages liins Feedback is directly proportional to the RMS current through the load or for multi phase syst
117. float32 OTAE 430 Network 2 Meas P True power measurement float32 01B6 438 Network 2 Meas PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 01B5 437 Network 2 Meas PF Power Factor float32 01B8 440 Network 2 Meas O Reactive Power float32 01B9 441 Network 2 Meas S Apparent power measurement float32 01B7 439 Network 2 Meas V Vrms of the load float32 OTAF 431 Network 2 Meas V2 Vrms2 ofthe load float32 01B0 432 Network 2 Meas V3 Vrms3 ofthe load float32 01B1 433 Network 2 Meas Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 01B2 434 Network 2 Meas Vline Line voltage measurement float32 01A5 421 Network 2 Meas Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 01A6 422 Network 2 Meas Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 O1A7 423 Network 2 Meas VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network float32 01C6 454 Network 2 Meas Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 01B3 435 Network 2 Meas VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 01BE 446 Network 2 Meas VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network float32 01B4 436 Network 2 Meas Z Load impedance float32 01BA 442 Network 2 Meas Z2 Load impedance2 float32 01BB 443 Network 2 Meas Z3 Load impedance3 float32 01BC 444 Network 2 Setup ChopOfNb Chop Off Number uint8 01CB 459 Network 2 Setup ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 01C9 457 Network 2 Setup ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 O1CA 458 Network 2 Setup ChopOffWindow Chop Off Wind
118. have been configured as anything but Off in Quickstart or if one or more analogue inputs has been enabled using iTools Use up down arrows to select AnaloglP then Enter CONF 3 AnaloglP Use up down arrows to select the required Analogue input 2 in this exam ple then Enter Use the up down arrows to select the parameter to be edited Use the up down arrows to select 0 to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V O to 5V O to 20mA or 4 to 20mA AnaloglP 2 gt Type AnalogIP 2 3 Range Use the up down arrows to set Range High Use the up down arrows to set Range Low Analog gt RangeLow The input in process units clipped by Range High Low if input is over under range AnalogIP 2 gt MaesVal The input value in electrical units Back to Type Figure 6 4 Analogue input menu 6 4 1 Analogue input parameters Type Allows the type of input to be set as one of O to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V O to 5V O to 20mA 4 to 20mA RangeHigh High range of input for scaling from measurement units to process units PV is clipped to range high if input goes over range RangeLow Low range of input for scaling from measurement units to process units PV is clipped to range low if input goes under range PV The scaled value in process units Clipped to the Range High or Range Low value if the signal goes over range or under range respectively MeasVal The value at the instrument terminals in e
119. limit uint8 03C9 969 Control 3 See Control 1 for enumeration values Control 3 AlmAck ClosedLoop Process alarm ack Closed loop break uint8 041B 1051 Control 3 AlmAck Limitation Indication alarm ack Limitation uint8 041D 1053 Control 3 AlmAck PVTransfer Indication alarm ack PV transfer uint8 041 1052 Control 3 AlmDet ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status Closed loop break uint8 0412 1042 Control 3 AlmDet Limitation Indication alarm detection status Limitation uint8 0414 1044 Control 3 AlmDet PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status PV transfer uint8 0413 1043 Control 3 AlmDis ClosedLoop Process alarm Closed loop break uint8 040F 1039 Control 3 AlmDis Limitation Indication alarm Limitation uint8 0411 1041 Control 3 AlmDis PVTransfer Indication alarm PV transfer uint8 0410 1040 Control 3 AlmLat ClosedLoop Process alarm latch Closed loop break uint8 0418 1048 Control 3 AlmLat Limitation Indication alarm latch Limitation uint8 041A 1050 Control 3 AlmLat PVTransfer Indication alarm latch PV transfer uint8 0419 1049 Control 3 AlmSig ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status Closed loop break uint8 0415 1045 Control 3 AlmSig Limitation Indication alarm signalling status Limitation uint8 0417 1047 Control 3 AlmSig PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status PV transfer uint8 0416 1046 Control 3 AlmStop ClosedLoop Process alarm stop Closed loop break uint8 041E 1054 Control 3 AlmStop Limitation Indication alarm stop Limitation uint8 04
120. must be configured before Predictive Load Management PLM will operate The default on delivery is O which means that PLM is inhibited The address may be setin a range of 1 to 63 the lowest address on the network will negotiate to become the Network Master Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values Ps LoadMng Station Address Always Config Uint8 Min 1 Max 63 0 PLM disabled for this Station default The total amount of power allowed on the Network using Load Shedding Configured by the user in order to restrict the power demanded from the network For example the total installed power could be 2 5MW but it is required that the delivered power be restricted to below a tariff band of 2MW In such a case Ps would be set to 2MW and power would be shed across the network to ensure that the total demand remains below 2MW If Ps is set to a value greater than Pmax Load Shedding is disabled The default value for this parameter is set to SMW For almost applications this disables the Load Shedding function Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values SHEDFACTOR LoadMng Network Ps With Sharing or Distributed Control only Engineer Float32 0 to 99999 watts This defines for each channel the threshold at which the reducing factor is applied to the modulator for load shedding Function block location
121. not be reduced for particular channels so each load can be allocated a Shed factor during configuration The Reduction coefficient r is recalculated for each Channel such that if s gt r then r s but if s lt r then r r Thus if s 100 the reducing coefficient is never applied if s 0 the reducing coefficient r is always applied as it is Thus the consumed Power is not Ps as requested but Pr where Ps lt Pr lt Pt The alarm Ps over Pt becomes active when Pr gt Ps to alert the user to the fact that the actual power is greater than the shed power requested Note This alarm appears only at the Load Management master station HA179769 Page 202 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GENERAL STANDARDS The product is designed and produced to comply with EN60947 4 3 Low voltage switch gear and control gear for all versions and with UL 508 and CAN CSA C22 2 for versions rated up to 600V Other applicable standards are cited where appropriate INSTALLATION CATEGORIES General installation category details for the driver and power modules are summarized in the table below e Rated impulse Rated Installation f Category withstand insulation voltage Uimp voltage Communications II 0 5kV 50V Standard lO II 0 5kV 50V Driver module power II 2 5kV 230V Relays III 4kv 230V Power Modules up to 600V 111 6kv 600V Power Modules
122. of the highest load current PLUthreshold appears in Network Setup as described in section 6 20 2 10 3 INDICATION ALARMS Indication Alarms signal events for operator action if required Indication alarms cannot be configured to stop power module firing but they may be latched if required and if latched they must be acknowledged for the Signalling Status to return to the normal non alarm state 10 3 1 Process Value Transfer active Indicates when a transfer control mode e g V2 lt gt 2 P lt gt I or V lt gt 12 is active 10 3 2 Limitation active Indicates when the internal firing control loop limits the firing output 1 or V in order not to exceed the adjusted maximum value 10 3 3 Load Over Current Indicates when a configurable RMS load current threshold Overlthreshold is reached or exceeded The parameter is found in the Network Setup area of configuration section 6 20 2 and is configurable as 10 to 400 of Nominal Current 10 3 4 Over Load Shedding Ps over Pr alarm Applies only to units fitted with the Load Management option section 9 Load Shedding reduces the global power demand Pt to a given level Ps Load Shedding and Load Sharing may be applied simultaneously if required Ps is the reduced Power Pt is the total demanded Power If Ps gt Pt no reduction is applied If Ps lt Pt each Duty Cycle is reduced by multiplying it by a reduction factor r Ps Pt For some applications the Power Demand can
123. of alarms Latched alarms are cleared if their trigger sources are no longer in an alarm state Active indicates that there is one or more System Process or Chop Off alarm active lf the relevant alarms are enabled System alarms and Chop Off alarms always cause the power module to stop firing Process alarms can also be configured to prevent firing in Alarm stop Indicates that a process alarm has occurred in one or more Power Modules Indicates that a fuse has blown in one or more Network blocks Allows the user to disable enable all alarms A coded status word giving strategy information as shown in table 6 12a Watchdog relay status Active or Inactive The watchdog relay is active non energised under fault conditions Two 16 bit words containing alarm status information as shown in tables 6 12b and 6 12c respectively HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 73 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 13 FIRING OUTPUT MENU This forms the link between the control strategy and the physical load Configuration includes Firing mode Network Type and the type of Load coupling This block also supplies Phase Angle Ramp Soft start and Safety Ramp In Engineer level these items are mostly Read only i e their values cannot be edited CONF 2 Firing OF wired input Use up down arrows to select Firing op number then Enter Use return ED key one or more times from within menu to return to this page a E Displays
124. or Power can be viewed in Operator level simultaneously with it s associated Setpoint When displaying an EPower control parameter the bottom line of the display is used to display the working setpoint When set to No the bottom line of the display is used to display the parameter name and parameter description as per other indicator displays Also see section A5 2 3 For all other parameters refer to the 3200i Engineering Handbook HA029006 HA179769 Page 228 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 5 4 1 LEVEL 3 CONF PARAMETERS Cont AUTO SCROLLING This causes the EPower summary parameters to scroll through continuously at a frequency defined by the value selected for the ASCRL parameter The actual order of parameter appearance depends on level of access and complexity of network Note The 3 phase parameters IRMS1 IRMS2 IRMS3 VRMS1 VRMS2 VRMS3 are not included in autoscrolling sequences IRMS IAVG VRMS VAVG POWER aiai ENRGY ENRGY WSP SPselect appears WSP only at access level 2 L SPselect L SPselect Single phase Three phase single network single network Network Y Y y vo y y ower Enr WSP SPselect eset 1 Ea aa P 7 J i E R 2 IRMS VRMS Power oo wee gang E Back to IRMS 3 IRMS O ave O Ea O ki O Wi O a O EReset O 4 _IRMS VRMS Power Enrgy WSP _SPselect E Reset
125. or damaged inter module ribbon cables must be replaced SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage This is defined in EN60947 1 as an electrical circuit in which the voltage cannot exceed ELV under normal conditions or under single fault conditions including earth faults in other circuits The definition of ELV is complex as it depends on environment signal frequency etc See IEC 61140 for further details SYMBOLS USED ON THE INSTRUMENT LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the instrument labelling Protective conductor terminal A Risk of electric shock Nu AC supply only A Arn Precautions against static electrical discharge must be taken when handling this unit c A US LISTED Underwriters laboratories listed mark for Canada and the U S A Refer to the manual for instructions Page 2 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE USER GUIDE 1 INTRODUCTION This document describes the installation operation and configuration of an EPower station Driver Module plus one or more Power Modules The Driver Module comes in one version but the Power Modules are available in a number of different power ratings which are identical in operation and configuration but which differ in physical size according to the number of phases being controlled and the maximum current being supplied All but the 50 Amp and 100 Amp unit come with coolin
126. or dc to ground double isolation Profibus Protocol Profibus DPV1 Connector 9 way D type Indicators Mode and Status Page 208 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 12 MAINTENANCE 12 1 SAFETY WARNING BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND SAFETY OVERLOAD PROTECTION This product does not contain any branch circuit protection or internal safety overload protection It is the responsibility of the user to add branch circuit protection upstream of the unit It is also the responsibility of the user to provide external or remote safety overload protection to the end instal lation Such branch circuit and safety oveload protection must comply with applicable local regula tions UL The abovementioned branch circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Elec tric Code NEC requirements WARNINGS The manufacturer shall not be held responsible for any damage injury losses or expenses caused by inappropriate use of the product or by failure to comply with the instructions in this manual It is the responsibility of the user to check before commissioning the unit that all nominal characteristics correspond to the conditions under which it is to be installed and used The product must be commissioned and maintained by suitably qualified personnel authorized to work in an industrial low voltage environment Voltage of over 600V RMS may exist in and around the units even when the
127. phases 1 2 3 4 brackets Multi phase units come supplied with Door closed 149 5 234 5 319 5 404 5 two three or four phase brackets as appropriate Dooropen 211 0 296 0 381 0 466 0 See table below for details Overall Widths inches Upper bracket Lower bracket No of phases 1 2 3 4 2 phase Use A and B Use E and F Door closed 5 89 9 23 12 58 15 93 3 phase Use A B and C Use E and G Door open 8 31 11 65 15 00 18 35 4 phase Use A B C and D Use E F G and H Figure 2 1 1b Fixing details 50 Amp and 100 Amp units HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 5 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 1 1 FIXING DETAILS Cont Recommended fixing bolt size M6 Cable entry l te 9 2151085 1 6 5 0 26 61 4 2 42 107 5 4 232 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 85 0 3 346 1 65 y Pa PA gt lt gt lt gt lt sax fb 2 KOY A IB CAC D Se TAO OD dal ra v f v A v A wv A is Safety earth M6 A A A Recom mended tig htening as sue ee Pr ia ann torque 5 Nm 3 7 ft Ib down to release andi pull downto release Ill anc pull downto release door door door alll c ES E i Front view a R mad Ku E E aes re eg El E Dimensions in millimetres inches Sig Door ma open EC Mir ana ARA AE GH CC E F G H AA io ae E ET a View on underside o pa a S 2 El lis ARA E IE MEN ERNI ERN N ES E fs zal fs nat fs zal 8 KIN KI xD S als SH WEY NS 33 0 A o UA O
128. pira Dita ee PAGAN NCY Kha 10 203 Comment ssc aii NA 122 AA NA A sod ue Paa NU a Sent 55 Parameter for selected item 139 Fault Stats sien ined NA KUAN AG ka DN 73 Parameter Value a 120 Modbus parameter addresses 151 Style for selected item 139 Feedbaekimode sor han a LAENG 39 User text for selected item 139 Feedback phasing aaa 237 WIKE sig ee ts Ahaha a dee aes edo das 129 A A ale eeu 57 EE Checksum fail error 2 0 0 0 a 131 REO set Ak PALA to bado noel A ate a 57 Ei Cressi evi E e 97 197 FETYPE3 an es rs A ed 57 Efficient POWER ye feos oo rotando ad 183 Find Electrical installation End ania E ae RRA A 121 Driver Unas ars GOR Wea 10 SE AA PA eel a tebe 121 Thyristor power unit eee eee 19 FINISH anced 5 utes A Ania arene DAN NG ences Dha Khan 36 EMC information 0 c cece eee eee ene eens 211 Firing anglelimiting Ae kaaa kia rents dake Pee Pkg 40 Enable Firing Enable anae shail na NALNG MAA dam PIGA esas oe 10 Couto 67 Firing Mod voii aaa sacas 35 37 74 RING din A A ge bese 75 Firing OP ii dee AAA 74 PU P EE E PE EAT 10 Modbus parameter addresses 151 152 Energy Counter o otago NG cono AN AG ee eee 70 Flatten compound 00 ee eee eee 118 125 Modbus parameter addresses 148 149 Kala AA 129 ResolUtiON na DA REA ee tee kan eae 72 Force Exec Break un ana nna PRA nG LENA 121 Energ
129. ra ds bes 48 PASS CODEEDITING riada ata ad 49 6 4 ANALOGIP MENO ui bil ed 50 6 4 1 Analogue input parameters 2 50 6 5 ANALOGOP MENU sois ota oe ke baw poes ENG 51 6 5 1 Analogue output Main submenu parameters 00000008 51 6 5 2 Analogue output Alm parameters 0000s 52 6 6 COMMS MENU ia and 53 6 6 1 Communications User menu parameters a 54 6 6 2 COMMS REMOTE PANEL PARAMETERS 222222200 55 631 CONTROL MENU urraca ie LED Cds 56 6 7 1 Control Setup Parameters o socias pl dea Ao 57 HA179769 Contents Issue 9 Aug 12 Page ili EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 6 7 2 Control Main Parameters a uda 40a vate ei Pinapa LA 58 6 7 3 Control Limit parameters vio i yl eas bien PNG A Nana 59 6 7 4 Control Diag parameters 2 60 6 7 5 Control Alarm disable parameters 0 o 61 6 7 6 Control Alarm detection parameters eee eee eee 62 6 7 7 Control Alarm signalling parameters 000 cece eee 63 6 7 8 Control Alarm Latch parameters 0 0 2 2a 64 6 7 9 Control Alarm Acknowledgement parameters a 65 6 7 10 Control Alarm Stop parameters occ 66 6 8 COUNTER MENU 00b cid rs 67 6 8 1 Counter configuration menu a 67 6 8 2 Cascading counters its sali Sa ed oh NING ened Na DAA nG 68 6 9 DPIGITAL O MENU circa 69 6 10 ENERGY Sesinia tias deal naag sa 70 6 10 1 E
130. respectively This is the value to perform threshold limit control Limit Enable must be set to Yes in the Setup menu section 6 7 1 SP1 to SP3 The setpoint for limit loops 1 to 3 respectively TI The integration time for the limit PI control loop Example If 2 threshold limiting is required Isq is wired to PV1 and the required threshold value is entered at SP1 In phase angle configuration the phase angle is reduced to achieve the limit setpoint in burst firing the unit continues to fire in bursts but these bursts are of phase angle in order to achieve the limit setpoint The modulation continues to attempt to reach the main setpoint Also known as phase angle reduction burst firing HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 59 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 4 Control Diag parameters This menu contains diagnostic parameters related to Control CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use Eb Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use up down arrows to select Diag then Enter Displays the current operating state of the controller Displays the output demand of the controller in 96 Diag PA Limit Phase angle output for Phase 3 PA Limit 100 Angle reduction in burst firing O gt Back to status Figure 6 7 4 Control Diag menu Status Indicates the current operating state of the c
131. scale output is 5 amps Phase 1 V2 V1 12 EPower 1 Reference Phase 2 I2 11 Phase Reference Phase 3 EPower 3 V2 V1 Fuse rating must be lower than cable current rating Star without neutral 3S Phase 1 02 phase reference Load 2 Je OY 1 phase reference Phase 2 V2V1 12 11 o 43 phase reference 5 Load 2 S1 2 Phase 3 Open Delta 6D Figure 2 2 2g cont Typical 3 phase external feedback wiring HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 29 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont THREE PHASE CONFIGURATIONS WITH EXTERNAL FEEDBACK Cont EPower 1 12 11 V2 V1 a Reference Phase 3 2 leg Delta 3D Phase MET Reference pO Oz EPower 1 Phase 1 Phase Reference Ty EPower 2 Phase 2 V2 V1 12 1 3 Reference Phase 3 Closed Delta 3D Figure 2 2 2g cont Typical 3 phase external feedback wiring HA179769 Page 30 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 3 OPERATOR INTERFACE Located at the front of the Driver Module the operator interface consists of a display featuring four lines of up to 10 characters each four push button switche
132. the active firing mode of the control El strategy as one of IHC Burst PA or No Mode ma 5 Firing OPN lt D Load Type A a Select Resistive or TxFormer transformer 3 Load Type EJ Resistive PEP p E Safety Ramp duration applied at startup in mains peri Firing OPN ED Safety Ramp ods from 0 to 255 The ramp is from O to the target Safety R 0 phase angle or from 0 to 100 for burst firing na 5 Firing OP N E Soft Start Use up down arrows to select soft start dura gt Soft Sta ED 4 Off tion in mains 1 2 cycles Use up down arrows to select soft stop duration in mains 1 2 cycles AG For transformer loads use the up down arrows p Firing OPN to select delayed trigger phase angle between gt Delayed 0 to 90 degrees Enable disable the Firing output block Ena ble value must be non zero Displays the input power demand value that the firing must deliver Displays the phase angle reduction factor in 96 used in Burst Firing If this value is below 100 the unit deliv ers a burst of phase angle Can be used to perform threshold current limting in burst firing Ramp Status Ramping Displays the safety ramp status J gt Back to Mode Figure 6 13a Configuration firing Output Mode Displays the current firing mode as Intelligent half cycle IHC Burst firing Phase angle firing or no mode Configured in the Modultr menu described below Load Type Allows the load type to be select
133. the current wiring diagram lt Ctrl gt lt V gt If items are pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied the items will be replicated with different block instances Should this result in more instances of a block than are available a Paste error display appears showing details of which items couldn t be copied Message Log Status Description Information Paste Information Paste Block Counter Error There aren t enough Counter blocks Information Paste Block Counter Error There aren t enough Counter blocks Information Paste Block UsrVal Error There aren t enough UsrVal blocks Information Paste Block Usal Error There aren t enough UstYal blocks Information Finished C Auto close on successful completion Marks all selected items for deletion Such items are shown dashed until next download after which they are removed from the diagram Short cut lt Del gt Reverses Delete and Cut operations carried out on selected item s since the last download Brings selected items to the front of the diagram Sends the selected items to the back of the diagram Edit Parameter Value This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parameter Selecting this menu item causes a pop up window to appear which allows the user to edit the parameter value Parameter Properties Parameter Help This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an editable parame
134. the mains if all the units were independent The Predictive Load Management system is described in three sections viz Load sequencing section 9 2 Load sharing section 9 3 and Load shedding section 9 4 9 1 1 Load Management layout A Predictive Load Management system can consist of up to 63 Stations running a maximum of 64 channels distributed around the shop floor maximum cumulative cable length 100 metres Each Station manages either up to four single channels two 2 leg channels or one 3 phase channel One or more of these channels can participate in Load Management whilst other channels run independently Where more than 64 channels are required two or more independent networks each with its own master must be created The PLM connector is located behind the driver module door and Stations are linked together as shown in figures 2 2 1c and 2 2 1f location and pinout details respectively Station 1 Station i Station n LMChan 1 Addresses must lie between 1 and 63 inclusive LoadMng Fn block LoadMng Fn block LoadMng Fn block Load Manager Master Load Manager Master Load Manager Master Address 1 Address i Address n Fieldbus wiring Fieldbus wiring Figure 9 1 1 Predictive Load Management layout typical Notes 1 Each Station Address must be unique to the PLM communication link and must be set between 1 and 63 inclusive Address 0 disables Load Management communications 2
135. the up arrow key twice to enter the value 2 After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display To return to level 1 1 2 3 The From any display press and hold the page key until the Lev 2 display appears Operate the up or down arrow to display Lev 1 After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display scroll key is used to enter the parameter display from the home display Any display Press and hold for 2 or 3 LEu 1 GOTO LEu 2 GOTO After a few seconds CODE Q 02 2 CODE After a few seconds HOME Figure A5 3a Selecting level 2 Page 224 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 3 1 Level 2 parameters Home display 1480 ENRGY g No E RST gt gt gt m o um m nj un mj m o o mj m Energy counter Energy counter reset Peak Reset Peak High Peak Low Alarm 1 setpoint Address Home display Customer ID Current recipe number Recipe to save Display units Figure A5 3 1 Level 2 parameter menu ENRGY Energy counter Shows the global energy counter in the EPower instrument This is only available if the Energy Counter feature is enabled in the connected EPower instrument E RST Energy Reset Allows the energy counter to be reset Only available only if the
136. three phase loads the impedance reference can be set only if the load is balanced The impedance comparison takes place over a mains cycle in phase angle firing or over the burst period for burst and logic firing For star with neutral 4S or open delta 6D networks the measured load voltage and current correspond directly to the load parameters In these configurations the partial load failure sensitivity is limited only by measurement accuracy and element impedance inaccuracies For star without neutral 3S and closed delta 3D configurations equivalent impedances are calculated using line to line voltages and line currents this resulting in minor inaccuracies Special care must be taken for short burst firing modes e g IHC or single cycle firing if no phase rotation is applied for Burst start suppression of DC component in current transformers and for logic firing without DC component suppression feature for the same reason A minimum voltage of 30 of nominal adjusted value Vload nominal and a minimum of 30 of INominal must be applied to the load as below these thresholds no partial load failure detection or impedance reference setting takes place HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 91 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 3 Network alarms AlmDet 3 Miss Mai AlmDet Miss Mains Use up down arrows to select alarm e g Missing mains then Enter key to display its detected current status 1 detected O
137. user as PBurst in the Block Network Meas for each channel The resulting power is then Pr y Pr i l This parameter Pr is available to the user in the Block LoadMng Network Note if all Shedding Ability Factors see below are zero Pr must be close to Ps SHEDDING ABILITY FACTOR For some applications the power demand must be maintained for particular channels For this reason a parameter called Shedding Ability Factor can be configured for each channel to define the threshold at which any reducing factor is applied to the channel This parameter ShedFactor is available to the user in the Block LMChan The reduction coefficient r is recalculated for each channel in the following way where s is the ShedFactor If s gt r then r s If s lt r then r r For example if s 100 no reducing coefficient is applied to channel i if s 0 the reducing coefficient r is always applied as it is to channel i The resulting Power for a given channel is now Pr r x n x Pt with Ps lt Pr lt Pt Note If Pr is greater than Ps due to the shedding ability coefficient applied to some channels on the Network an indication alarm PrOverPs is issued see below HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 185 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 4 3 Load shedding comparisons In this imaginary example the Network consists of 32 Channels The Power PZMax and the Setpoint or Duty Cycle P
138. which allows the user to configure the major parameters without having to enter the full configuration menu structure of the unit Figure 4 shows an overview of a typical Quickstart menu The actual displayed menu items will vary according to the number of options fitted l Select Language Power Modules Nominal Current Nominal Voltage Network Type Load Coupling 3star Use u Load Type Use u Burst Firing Mode Use u Feedback r Mode Use u I w n an m Use u P 1 Func gt E o a WE P i gt gt 3 a a Q Q Use u Resisti Use up down scro Change confirmati Use up down scro Maximum value Use up down scro see text for more details Use up down scro ble va selected se up down scro 3Delta 4Star 6Delta p down scro p down scro p down scro Open loop v2 2 p down scro p down scro Use up down scro P 2 Func SP limit limit V limit P limit Transfer p down scro English French G ive or Txformer i e to select erman Italian to select 0 1 2 3 or 4 to select nominal current Current rating of power modules to select nominal voltage to select 1 2 3 or 4 phase Availa lues depend on the number of power modules to select to select Transformer to select None Logic Burst Var ix Half cycle Ph Angle to select P ower Vrms rms Appears only if Feedback is not
139. 0 CALCULATION AND COMMUNICATIONS 222000 190 9 5 2 Predictive Load Management function block details 193 EMI TN BE sees tiie TANG Taman GA tek eva AG pug aide toh Wie RASA danas NAGANA 193 PERIOD cc hah NAN taal are cs Bi PIGA TB ba pga mababaon 193 ADDRESS lati a ra ole lunan Da tnan Gta aa Rated Na Eba el 194 A A AN PAT aag Bi viens Dover ae Meas ot Bea cen as 194 SHEDFACTOR sioa eri iE dinette gies KANIN gee ads 194 Contents HA179769 Page vi Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page GROUP Tsaa nagapi A a WING GTA NGA ULANG ital eta AMES 195 PZMAX PAA AA a 195 STATUS A PAANAN Seles isi shall A AN 195 NUMCHAN Utopia ANNA NAG BKA GORA BG Dhan a a BY bt 196 TOTAESTATION paaa saba dee kaaa bng A ANAN 196 TOTAEGHANNELS curiosa dong NENG vate datas ane aoe NG PANGAN 196 PMAX na ahd A Yah E as 197 Pr A dodo 197 PR OR a A 197 EFFICIENCY iii e Dae 197 MASTER ADDRESS 60d BATANG SA aa 198 2 6 MASTER ELECTION 20 ts one NAA LIN cee oe aaa 198 9 6 1 Master Election triggers viii a ra 198 9 7 ALARM INDICATION anan rar maa nd NB select b e slate Whale Lap eect 199 PROVERPS ate ha PEEL GNG LNAG LUNA Pa PR oa 199 9 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 2d ati id dy 199 9 821 Wrong Station STATUS dio GINAPAN a grease WN BAAL 199 DUPLICATE LM ADDRESS a mana KANG BONG NG KNANG Ann Meee kat 199 STATION STATUS PERMANENTLY PENDING 220000 0200s 199 STATION TYPE MISMATCH
140. 0B1B 2843 Energy 2 TotEnergy The global energy float32 OB1C 2844 Energy 2 TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units as Energy 1 uint8 0B21 2849 Energy 2 Type Type of energy counter 0 Normal 1 Global bool 0B22 2850 Energy 2 UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B18 2840 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Energy 2 UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier as Energy 1 uint8 0B1F 2847 Energy 3 AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit ofthe energy 0 No 1 Yes bool 0B37 2871 Energy 3 Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B2D 2861 Energy 3 Input Input to totalize float32 OB2E 2862 Energy 3 prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B38 2872 Energy 3 prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B39 2873 Energy 3 Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B31 2865 Energy 3 PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uintl 0B32 2866 Energy 3 PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse as Energy 1 uint8 0B34 2868 Energy 3 Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B2F 2863 Energy 3 TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B30 2864 Energy 3 TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units as Energy 1 uint8 0B35 2869 Energy 3 Type Type of energy counter 0 Normal 1 Global bool 0B36 2870 Energy 3 UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 OB2C 2860 Energy 3 UsrEnergy
141. 10V Note 3 After warm up Ambient 25 C Table 11 c Analogue output specification table voltage outputs Page 206 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Cont Analogue output Current output performance Parameter Typical Max Min Total current working span within 0 3V to 1 Bey volago span gan ENCA Open circuit voltage lt 16V Resolution noise free note 1 12 5 bits Calibration error note 2 note 3 lt 0 25 lt 0 5 Linearity error note 2 lt 0 1 Ambient temperature error note 2 lt 0 01 C Maximum load resistance lt 550Q DC output conductance lt 1uA V Hardware response time 10 to 90 20ms lt 25ms Note 1 w r t total working span Note 3 After warm up Ambient 25 C Note 2 of effective range 0 to 20mA Table 11 d Analogue output specification table current outputs RELAY SPECIFICATION The relays associated with this product have gold plated contacts applicable to dry circuit low current use Contact life Resistive loads 100 000 operations de rate with inductive loads as per figure High power use Current lt 2A resistive loads Voltage lt 264V RMS UL voltage 250Vac Low power use Current gt 1mA Voltage gt 1V Contact configuration Single pole change over one set of Common Normally open and Normally Closed contacts Termination Relay 1 standard 3 way connector on undersid
142. 12 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 2 AlmSig NetworkDips System alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 020A 522 Network 2 AlmSig OpenThyr System alarm signalling status Open Thyristor uint8 0207 519 Network 2 AlmSig OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status Over Current uint8 0213 531 Network 2 AlmSig OverTemp System alarm signalling status Over Temperature uint8 0209 521 Network 2 AlmSig PB24VFail System alarm signalling status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 020 524 Network 2 AlmSig PLF Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Failure uint8 020F 527 Network 2 AlmSig PLU Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0210 528 Network 2 AlmSig PreTemp Process alarm signalling status Pre Temperature uint8 0212 530 Network 2 AlmSig ThyrsC System alarm signalling status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0206 518 Network 2 AlmSig TLF Process alarm signalling status Total Load Failure uint8 020D 525 Network 2 AlmStop ChopOff Process alarm stop Chop Off uint8 023B 571 Network 2 AlmStop FreqFault System alarm stop Frequency Fault uint8 0238 568 Network 2 AlmStop FuseBlown System alarm stop Fuse Blown uint8 0235 565 Network 2 AlmStop MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop Mains Voltage Fault uint8 023E 574 Network 2 AlmStop MissMains System alarm stop Missing Mains uint8 0232 562 Network 2 AlmStop NetworkDips System alarm stop Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0237 567 Network 2 AlmStop OpenThyr System alarm stop
143. 150 inclusive of the unit s nominal current INominal 2 The alarm is active if ChopOff2Threshold is exceeded more than a specified number of times Number Chop Off within a specified time period Window Chop Off ChopOff2Threshold is adjustable between 100 and 350 inclusive of Inominal Number Chop Off can be selected to any value between 1 and 16 inclusive Window Chop Off can be set to any value between 1 and 65535 seconds approximately 18 hours 12 mins Each time the threshold is exceeded the unit stops firing raises a chop off condition alarm then after 100ms restarts using an up going safety ramp The condition alarm is cleared if the unit successfully restarts If the alarm is raised more than the specified number of times within the specified window then the Chop Off alarm is set and the unit stops firing Firing is not resumed until the operator acknowledges the Chop Off alarm HA179769 Page 40 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 5 OPERATOR MENU At power up or after quitting the Quickstart menu the unit initialises itself figure 5 and then enters the first summary page of the Operator menu figure 5 2 EN NN software revision level Return key NS DT DT T OI DW 5 Enter key Figure 5 Initialisation screens Note If any faults are detected during initialisation e g supply voltage missing then error messages appear on the display screen The up and down arrow keys must
144. 1B 1563 0 0to 10V 1 1to5V 2 2 to 10V 3 0to 5V 4 0to20mA 5 4to20mA O AnalogOP 2 AlmAck OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0639 1593 O AnalogOP 2 AlmDet OutputFault Process alarm detection status Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0636 1590 10 AnalogOP 2 AlmDis OutputFault Process alarm Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0635 1589 10 AnalogOP 2 AlmLat OutputFault Process alarm latch request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0638 1592 IO AnalogOP 2 AImSig OutputFault Process alarm signalling status Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0637 1591 O AnalogOP 2 AlmStop OutputFault Process alarm stop request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 063A 1594 IO AnalogOP 2 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 0634 1588 IO AnalogOP 2 Main PV Process variable float32 0633 1587 IO AnalogOP 2 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 0631 1585 IO AnalogOP 2 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 0632 1586 10 AnalogOP 2 Main Type Specify the output type as OP 1 uint8 0630 1584 10 AnalogOP 3 AlmAck OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064E 1614 10 AnalogOP 3 AlmDet OutputFault Process alarm detection status Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064B 1611 10 AnalogOP 3 AlmDis OutputFault Process alarm Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064A 1610 10 AnalogOP 3 AlmLat OutputFault Process alarm latch request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064D 1613 IO AnalogOP 3 AImSig OutputFault Pro
145. 2 Ethernet Modbus TCP communications AA 113 LAS Direct COMMS CON 50nn ka ie et OS ea dE 115 WIRING ta kan Seine e thinly SAM Ann KNANG KAN 115 7 2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS 22220 116 7 3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR wrx cea sends yes iaa NG Heo EE 117 MIL MOOG A sass Nga desea Segal Aa hand ceils dl Ban Nal LA nla NG et leds 118 7 3 2 Wiring editor operating details 0 eee 118 COMPONENT SELECTION map DARA RANG AMA waa eee oe ae KGG 118 BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER lt 4 sccm ame dai daa dire seal Abay iasa 118 FUNCTION BLOCKS coca wp kaa DUNG NG MA Aaa SAN NAPAPA NAN 119 WIRES ate cet ete ees ails NAG Gn ABT sled ATA e Aa 121 THICK WIRES manang AnG KAN E ie 122 COMMENTS Guan NGA a Na an RG sae ale pan 122 MONITORS pi oba dna na AG alab nadn Ga act thom an Un LAG a 123 DOWNLOADING soriana iaa a yas Ad Paws g okey T 123 COLOURS Ut ss Bae A et be es Sew 124 DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU 2 ccc ences 124 COMPQUNDS Gaan BA GAAN a aus aa Soe ale NENA 125 TOOLTIPS 0 7n pa NG KABA pode see ee ee NAG PIG RAD bee es 126 7 4 PARAMETER EXPEQRER cuicos na NONG NG DN qa al gee NG whee LATAG LAG 127 7 4 1 Parameter explorer detail eee 128 A2 ExplorertodlS Vidas ade ea 129 TO PIELDBUS GATEWAY A Ue NG ee e a Sa aie kee re 130 EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR deireanas agote Wan ANA ee oe died ed ee eee 131 26 DEVICE PANEL mon siti ae tient see Kaman toed NG Aa a NG whe NATAN Ah 134 T3 WATCH REGIPE EDITOR wos aaa naka Sete ia eke LE Cotos 1
146. 20 1056 Control 3 AlmStop PVTransfer Indication alarm stop PV transfer uint8 041F 1055 Control 3 Diag Output Output of the controller float32 040D 1037 Control 3 Diag PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 040E 1038 Control 3 Diag Status Status of the controller uint8 040 1036 Control 3 Limit PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 0405 1029 Control 3 Limit PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 0406 1030 Control 3 Limit PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 0407 1031 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 145 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 146 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Control 3 Limit SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 0408 1032 Control 3 Limit SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 0409 1033 Control 3 Limit SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 040A 1034 Control 3 Limit Tl Integral time of the limit loop float32 040B 1035 Control 3 Main PV The main PV of the controller float32 0400 1024 Control 3 Main SP Main SP to control at float32 0401 1025 Control 3 Main TI Integral time of the main loop float32 0404 1028 Control 3 Main TransferPV The transfer proportional limit PV float32 0402 1026 Control 3 Main TransferSpan The transfer proportional limit span float32 0403 1027 Control 3 Setup EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit uint8 03FA 1018 Control 3 Setup FFGain Feedforward gain float32 03FD 1021 Control 3 Setup FFOffset Feedforward off
147. 20 2 Network Setup submenu Displays the Network type as Three phase Single phase or Two leg control Line voltage nominal value required to calibrate the stack This is the line to line voltage except for Single phase to Neutral and Three phase Star with Neutral networks when the measurement is line to neutral Nominal Load voltage required to calibrate the Power Module This is the same as the Vline Nominal except when external feedback is used e g from a transformer secondary In which case this value must be correctly set to scale the measurement Indicates the maximum current of the stack 50 100 160 250 400 500 630 For transformer driven loads select EXT100 etc and configure lextScale appropriately Nominal current supplied by the Power Module This value is used for calibrating the current measurement in the stack This is limited by IMaximum which imposes the limit of the physical channels unless external feedback is configured in which case the limit is 4000A External current scale adjustment for use when Maximum is set to external feedback If an external current transformer is fitted lextScale should be set to the normal primary current of the current transformer If an external current transformer is not being used lextScale should be set to 5A HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 89 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 2 NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU Cont VextScale HeatsinkTmax VdipsThreshold FreqDriftThold
148. 22200 0000000 tonii ma 203 12 MAINTENANCE ccoo ona ica aos a BRING KO Nowa een a 209 IZAI SAFE A ES ea 209 12 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 0 ccc 209 HA179769 Contents Issue 9 Aug 12 Page vii EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 242 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section Page 12 3 THYRISTOR PROTECTION FUSES 2 0 390823 R GA ia NG RAA ETAT 210 APPENDIX A REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT 0 200 211 AT INTRODUCTION tar pak ies ste Ea od a es ad DING BREN PALLAPA DEL YANA 211 A1 1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION NOTES 0 0 211 SYMBOLS sse kae Se ances a 212 A2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION os scenes eee ae NING HERE one NG oboe e dees 213 A3ELECTRIGAL INSTALLATION 23 kani ee eS has ea a a es 214 ASI PINOUT apak DAG di ATAT E E Pha a 214 A32 WIRING 0 IS Na HG A NG NAPUNDI 214 SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE soria BRP GN ANG NA ar 214 ANALOGUE MEASURING INPUTS 22220 215 OUTPUT WIRING iea na ea nad KAW nG LED aces YO REL Una ga aus 215 A3 3 OVER TEMPERATURE APPLICATION WIRING 216 AZ FIRSTSWITCH ON ssl Naal anG manna pama ma kamang tas cael needs 217 AS OPERATING MODE 4 0 iria li ahah dene to ao pan 218 Ad ERONT PANEL LAYOUT tv ed siete baa UG ra RAR NG 218 REM MAN BEACONS nand fete oia oe eee a aaa 220 A5 2 LEVEL FOPRERATION mam kn NG aid a oes 220 A53 LEVEL OPERATION sles cfs books ant nabanga baal kaan Sane aka ka me ees 224 A5 4 LEVEL 3 AND CONF LEVEL OPERATION uu eee eee 227 AUTO SCROLLING uga LA ak
149. 266 Network 1 Meas V2 Vrms2 ofthe load float32 010B 267 Network 1 Meas V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 010C 268 Network 1 Meas Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 010D 269 Network 1 Meas Vline Line voltage measurement float32 0100 256 Network 1 Meas Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 0101 257 Network 1 Meas Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 0102 258 Network 1 Meas VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network float32 0121 289 Network 1 Meas Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 010E 270 Network 1 Meas VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0119 281 Network 1 Meas VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network float32 010F 271 Network 1 Meas Z Load impedance float32 0115 277 Network 1 Meas Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0116 278 Network 1 Meas Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0117 279 Network 1 Setup ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 0126 294 Network 1 Setup ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 0124 292 Network 1 Setup ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 0125 293 Network 1 Setup ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0127 295 Network 1 Setup FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold float32 013F 319 Network 1 Setup HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 012F 303 Network 1 Setup HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 012A 298 Network 1 Setup HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 0122 290 Network 1 Setup lextScale External cu
150. 3 2 4 Digital communications wiring ATA HF HERO B A Com Definition Reserved Reserved N C N C N C Wire colours Isolated OV Com A B Internal connections Pin 1 to 5V via 100kQ Pin 2 to OV via 100kQ HD White green HE Orange 1 HF White orange ElA485 Modbus communications 32h8e connector EPower connector Figure A3 2 4 Digital communications pinouts A3 3 OVER TEMPERATURE APPLICATION WIRING Figure A3 3 shows a typical application where the Remote Display Unit is used to trip the main contactor to the EPower units if it detects an over temperature The figure is intended for guidance only and does not show detailed EPower wiring this being discussed in depth in section A2 ofthis manual Notes 1 When switching inductive loads the 22nF 100 Ohm snubber supplied with the instrument should be wired across the relay connections as shown 2 Snubbers pass 0 6mA at 110V and 1 2mA at 230Vac This is sometimes sufficient to hold high impedance loads on Snubbers should not be used in such cases EPower EPower EPower EPower driver Power Power Power Line Supply L e 100 to 240Vac A 32h80 fi d 50 60Hz N 8 e Neutral unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 N y Over temperature thermocouple Screen Panel comms RJ45 connector abuejo alyM Figur
151. 3 Rotating incremental control example HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 179 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 2 4 Distributed control With this kind of control each Load has its own setpoint In order to avoid simultaneous firing in more than one load the modulation periods are staggered by a time given by t T N where T is the modulation period configured by the user and N is the number of channels Note Load Sharing described in section 9 3 below is a more efficient solution to this problem Chant w ll LIT IT IT HIT IT LE LS 100 Chan4 o Baan l Tort WOOO OOO TOO A T T Chan3 ap a Lal LSJ LJ LJ LI OT LT LJ chan2 all tel IL Il Il Il IL IL 11 Chant alte Pref IT IT IT IT IT IT IT lt gt T Figure 9 2 4 Distributed control 4 channels example 9 2 5 Incremental Distributed control With this kind of control Loads are grouped together with each group having a single setpoint which applies to all the channels in that group Incremental control type 2 is applied within each group and distributed control is applied to the groups Note The assigning of channels to groups is carried out for each relevant Load Management channel via its parameter LMChan Group The example in figure 9 2 5a shows 11 channels distributed within two groups G11 Output 1 G12 Output 2 Setpoint gt G13 Output 5 Group 1 G14 Output 6 Channel 7
152. 3 nat bode A eth ae eae aie atone 121 UnitIDiEnable pe en ca PTR NG ANA GG AS 54 AN O 122 UNITS leas E 226 de ny ka atan 121 Units Totalisen kwan Bana malag eae ea a sata 110 AA AA AA 122 Unlink Wiring examples aaa 26 COMMEN Laan anna aanak 122 Working setpoint n uss a 222 Monitor 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee A 107 Up arrow Key seve cra ro a Nan UA ANS tal aala Dak on NABA INA KA ca was ved 222 Upacale cats odie 84 OET E ica Va o ETT 121 HA179769 Index Issue 9 Aug 12 Page ix EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE X AOR ahe ask PUB E N a hee Spt 80 82 Z ZZA ZI yee ld a E 88 LOOM ised aAa AA 118 Zref Zref2 Zref3 i on orai ea a ea aa aR AE ee eee 91 Index HA179769 Page x Issue 9 Aug 12 E U roth er im International sales and service AUSTRALIA Melbourne Invensys Process Systems Australia Pty Ltd Telephone 61 0 8562 9800 Fax 61 0 8562 9801 E mail info eurotherm au invensys com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone 43 1 7987601 Fax 43 1 7987605 E mail info eurotherm at invensys com BELGIUM amp LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm S A N V Telephone 32 85 274080 Fax 32 85 274081 E mail info eurotherm be invensys com BRAZIL Campinas SP Eurotherm Ltda Telephone 5519 3707 5333 Fax 5519 3707 5345 E mail info eurotherm br invensys com CHINA Eurotherm China Shanghai Office Telephone 86 21 61451188 Fax 86 21 61452602 E mail info eurotherm cn inven
153. 349 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet MissMains System alarm detection status Missing Mains uint8 0151 337 O Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet NetworkDips System alarm detection status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0156 342 O Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet OpenThyr System alarm detection status Open Thyristor uint8 0153 339 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status Over Current uint8 015F 351 0 Inactive 1 Active HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 159 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 160 Issue 9 Aug 12 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 1 AlmDet OverTemp System alarm detection status Over Temperature uint8 0155 341 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet PB24VFail System alarm detection status Power Board 24V Failure 0 Inactive 1 Active uint8 0158 344 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet PLF Process alarm detection status Partial Load Failure uint8 015B 347 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet PLU Process alarm detection status Partial Load Unbalance 0 Inactive 1 Active uint8 015C 348 Network 1 AlmDet PreTemp Process alarm detection Status Pre Temperature uint8 015E 350 0 Inactive 1 Active Network 1 AlmDet ThyrSC System alarm detection status Thyristor Short Circuit O Inactive 1 Active uint8 0152 338 Network 1 AlmDet TLF Process alarm
154. 35 7 71 Ereating a Watch List cc Dana AKA dhe ae ey 135 ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST aaa 135 DATA SET CREATION soon Naan AKNG ee a E RE NA ANG 135 7 7 2 Watch Recipe toolbar icons o 136 7 7 3 Watch Recipe Context Menu eee eee 136 7 8 USER PAGES vir ID a it eel eA aves 137 HA179769 Contents Issue 9 Aug 12 Page v EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS CONT Section 7 8 1 User Page creation 7 8 2 Style examples 0000 0 a 7 8 3 User Pages Tools a 8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES MODBUS 8 1 INTRODUCTION aaa 8 2 PARAMETER TYPES aaa aaa 8 3 PARAMETER SCALING aan 8 3 1 Conditional scaling 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE aaa aaa 9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION 9 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 000 9 1 1 Load Management layout 9 1 2 Power modulation and accuracy 9 2 LOAD SEQUENCING a aaa aaa 9 2 1 Incremental control type 1 9 2 2 Incremental control type 2 9 2 3 Rotating Incremental control 9 2 4 Distributed control 0 0 a 9 2 5 Incremental Distributed control 9 2 6 Rotating Incremental Distributed control 9 3 LOAD SHARING pinang slate see aie Pha ee tk 9 3 1 Total power demand 0 9 3 2 Sharing Efficiency Factor F 9 3 3 Sharing algorithm
155. 6 way RJ11 Male to m 7 OV Processor module 25 way D type socket To PC ElA232 port REAR VIEW he 0000000066 0 Figure 2 2 1f Configuration port wiring details HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 15 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont COMMUNICATIONS PINOUTS Serial communications is discussed in the Communications Manual HA179770 Pinouts for the relevant protocols are given here for convenience Y Signal ElA485 Reserved Reserved N C N C N C Isolated OV A B N 0 fa 010 007 MODBUS RTU Internal connections Pin 1 to 5V via 100kQ Pin 2 to OV via 100kQ LEDs Con Yellow Green Tx activity nectors Yellow Rx activity in parallel Figure 2 2 1g Modbus RTU pinout Network status LED Indication Function N C N C Rx N C N C Rx Tx Txt MODBUS TCP LEDs Green Tx activity Yellow Network activity Figure 2 2 1h Modbus TCP Ethernet 10baseT pinout LED state Interpretation Off Steady green Flashing green Steady red Flashing red Off line or no power On line to 1 or more units On line no connections Critical link failure 1 or more connections timed out Modu le status LED Indication LED state Interpretation Off Steady green Flashing green Steady red Flashing red No power Op
156. 7 5 Control Alarm disable menu Closed Loop The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display indicates the current enable status of the closed loop alarm The up and down arrows are used to enable disable the alarm An empty key indicates that the alarm is enabled a solid yellow key means that the alarm is disabled PV Transfer As for Closed Loop but for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 61 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 6 Control Alarm detection parameters Indicates whether each alarm has been detected and whether or not it is currently active CONF 3 Control Sy Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use lt Stand by return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page ED gt Control gt AlmDet AlmDet 3 ClosedLo YW D AlmDet gt PVTransf Use up down arrows to select AlmDet then Enter Ha Solid yellow Closed loop alarm is active Ha Solid yellow Transfer is currently active AlmDet 3 Limitati Ha Solid yellow Limitation control loop is active gt Back to ClosedLoop Figure 6 7 6 Control Alarm detection menu Closed Loop The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether or not the closed loop alarm is currently active An em
157. 769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 2 NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU Cont Zref Reference load impedance for phase 1 as measured when PLF adjust is requested Zref2 Zref3 As for Zref but for phases 2 and 3 respectively PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold Defines the threshold for detecting a partial load unbalance condition This is only applicable to a three phase system This occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum current of the three phase system exceeds the threshold as a percentage of Inominal The alarm can be detected between 5 and 50 OverlThreshold The threshold for detecting an over current condition as a percentage of INominal If lis above the threshold a Mains Current Alarm occurs DetoverCurrent HeaterType Shows the type of heater used in the load as Resistive SWIR Short wave infra red CSi Silicon Carbide MoSi2 Molybdenum Disilicide Maxlnom Fix limit to Nominal PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS The PLF alarm detects a static increase in load impedance low temperature coefficient loads and Short wave Infra Red heaters can be controlled by this feature The alarm works by comparing the reference load impedance with the actual measured load impedance The user must set the reference impedance by requesting PLFAdjust and the partial load failure sensitivity Notes 1 All elements are assumed to be identical and connected in parallel 2 For
158. 89 100 E JEX Untitled 2 gt Device Panel 01 X Com EventLog Figure 7 6 Device panel display on line left and clone right HA179769 Page 134 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 7 WATCH RECIPE EDITOR e watch Recipe The watch recipe editor is opened by clicking on the Watch Recipe tool icon by selecting Watch Recipe in the Views menu or by using the short cut lt ctrl gt lt A gt The window is in two parts the left part containing the watch list the right hand part containing one or more data sets initially empty and unnamed The Watch Recipe window is used 1 To monitor a list of parameters This list can contain parameters from many different and otherwise unrelated parameter lists within the same device It cannot contain parameters from different devices 2 To create data sets of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded to the device in the sequence defined in the recipe The same parameter may be used more than once in a recipe DOSHYV1 x Goes A List Parameter Description Value FiringOP 1 Mode Firing Mode indicatic Mode Burst 1 Ctrl R FiringOP 1 In Input of the firing oul 0 00 New Data Set Ctrl FiingOP 1 LoadCoupling Load coupling config 4S 2 Uf Nen Data se If Delete Data Set Ctrl Del 8 Snapshot Yalues Ctrl A Clear Data Set Shift Del Y Download Values Ctrl D FiringOP 2 Mode Firing Mode indicati
159. Above Threshold time32 0A71 2673 IPMonitor 3 AlarmDays Alarm time in days above threshold uint8 0A8B 2699 IPMonitor 3 AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A89 2697 IPMonitor 3 DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 OA8A 2698 IPMonitor 3 In Input float32 0A83 2691 IPMonitor 3 InStatus Input Status O Good 1 Bad bool OA8C 2700 IPMonitor 3 Max Maximum value float32 0A85 2693 IPMonitor 3 Min Minimum value float32 0A86 2694 IPMonitor 3 Out Timer Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0A88 2696 IPMonitor 3 Reset Reset All Monitor Functions 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A84 2692 IPMonitor 3 Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A82 2690 IPMonitor 3 TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 0A87 2695 IPMonitor 4 AlarmDays Alarm time in days above threshold uint8 OAA1 2721 IPMonitor 4 AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 OA9F 2719 IPMonitor 4 DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 OAAO 2720 IPMonitor 4 In Input float32 0A99 2713 IPMonitor 4 InStatus Input Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool DAA2 2722 IPMonitor 4 Max Maximum value float32 OA9B 2715 IPMonitor 4 Min Minimum value float32 QAIC 2716 IPMonitor 4 Out Timer Alarm Output 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A9E 2718 IPMonitor 4 Reset Reset All Monitor Functions O No 1 Yes bool OA9A 2714 IPMonitor 4 Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A98 2712 IPMonitor 4 TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 OA9D 2717 Lgc2 1 FallbackType Fallback Condition uint8 OAB7 2743 False go
160. Adam oe ee 33 External feedback connectors 19 PwrModRev veia torbe e 33 VO Modules a AD oe ei 12 PZ La ici A hawk AAA E 184 Neutral phase connector a 21 RZ Waist Arak AAP NA 99 184 195 Relay Us wie ee eS Pee 13 Q Watchdog relay aa 13 O PAA e Mae Mh E eee a ANS Bee REG 88 POWER an KG neem ange e idee bw Widnes 84 222 OS Entry EXE aaa nawa sia ae cate aa eas 32 Power board 24V fail 0 0 00 cece cee eee 200 Quickstart Powerdown no rag a Acts aako tam deta lad La dha 32 A A 34 Power modulation 0 00 cc ccc cee eee eae 176 Modbus parameter addresses 171 Power Module a BA Sas 35 77 R Ea DOs ix 56 0 AAP tdo 10 Pier Geta OAV Ed tl iodo 13 Paa Nae A ETES arses Ad eons Doane re NG 184 Pr A a a a 77 FOC 2S seh NAN HA NA BAG NG ASA SA E 230 AA A A tee 3 97 197 RAMPRate oro rra a deh ene vant 107 A AA 98 185 199 RangeHigh PreValTfr AN A 32 Analogue input L A naa naaasar nana 50 PRE TEMP maps a AA PUNTO O io br eo kde ba ma 231 Analogue output anan gt Preterred Master e aa aa a ge aia 54 RangeLow PRETOMP24 G 830 i 92 Analogue input ao nananana 50 PreTempHeatsink o meane KAW NA KAN ee kaaa 90 Analogue OutpUt Kayan narra sa Kna rr 51 Preventive Maintenance 0a 209 RateDone 0 ecient eee 107 Bahan Ca A GL AURA NANA BN Te aanak 55 AAA cM MB Fina E og Maia an Bia 101 Recipes ener Bag a ae eR AG Mie eRe hoe Cae 232 Process Alar Msi Das dat cam teta
161. Alarm Setpoint float32 0984 2436 Total 3 Hold Hold 0 No 1 Yes bool 098B 2443 Total 3 In Input Value float32 0989 2441 Total 3 Reset Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 098 2444 Total 3 Resolution Resolution as Total 1 uint8 0988 2440 Total 3 Run Run 0 No 1 Yes bool 098A 2442 Total 3 TotalOut Totalised Output float32 0985 2437 Total 3 Units Units as Total 1 uint8 0987 2439 Total 4 AlarmOut Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool 099B 2459 Total 4 AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 0999 2457 Total 4 Hold Hold 0 No 1 Yes bool 09A0 2464 Total 4 In Input Value float32 099E 2462 Total 4 Reset Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 09A1 2465 Total 4 Resolution Resolution as Total 1 uint8 099D 2461 Total 4 Run Run 0 No 1 Yes bool 099F 2463 Total 4 TotalOut Totalised Output float32 099A 2458 Total 4 Units Units as Total 1 uint8 099C 2460 UsrVal 1 HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07A4 1956 UsrVal 1 LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07A5 1957 UsrVal 1 Resolution User Value Display Resolution uint8 07A3 1955 0 X 1 X X 2 X XX 3 X XX 4 X XXX HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 173 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec UsrVal 1 Status User Value Status O Good 1 Bad bool 07A7 1959 UsrVal 1 Units Units of the value uint8 07A2 1954 0 None 1 Temp 2 V 3 mV 4 A 5 mA 6 pH 7 mmHg UsrVal 1 V
162. Alarm Status 1 2 Bit Value Description 0 1 Network 1 not firing 1 2 Network 1 not synchro nized 2 4 Network 2 not firing 3 8 Network 2 not synchro nized 4 16 Network 3 not firing 5 32 Network 3 not synchro nized 6 64 Network 4 not firing 7 128 Network 4 not synchro nized 8 256 Strategy in standby mode 9 512 Strategy in Telemetry mode 10 1024 Reserved 11 2048 Reserved Fuse Alarm f 12 4096 Reserved Inactive sd 13 8192 Reserved T 14 16384 Reserved 3 5 Bit Value Description Bit Value Description 4 0 1 Missing Mains 0 1 Power Module Comms g 1 2 Thyristor short circuit error g 2 4 Open Thyristor 1 2 Pwr Module Comms time ta 3 8 Fuse blown Sut 4 16 Over temp 2 4 Closed Loop 5 32 Network Dips 3 8 Transfer active 6 64 Frequency fault 4 16 ii active Watchdog 7 128 PB24V fault 5 32 LM Pr over Ps fault Active 8 256 Total Load Failure 6 64 Output fault 9 512 Chop Off 7 128 LTC Fuse 10 1024 Partial Load Failure Sa esa ERS Weal Alarm Status 1 11 2048 Partial Load Unbalance 512 Reserved 8209 12 4096 Volt fault LOS TE esas 13 8192 Pre Temp 11 2048 Reserved 14 16384 Over current ig are Reserved Alarm Status 2 15 32768 Power Module wdog fault 13 8192 Reserved 256 14 16384 Reserved Table 6 12b 15 32768 Reserved Back to Alarm Status 1 word Table 6 12c Global Ack Alarm Status 2 word Performs a global acknowledgement
163. Aug 12 Page ili EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Go Up Down a Level aa 129 IMPUN am maa ak aha nC ae ts Nh tea 81 GOTO ss 0x w da ales Nga PAP Aha kaan abaka 48 Sl AA AP 84 Graphical Wiring Editor a 117 INpUtBrk ca ai PNTA TAO 32 Greyed out wiring editor items 126 Insert item ahead of selected item GI GSON Off sito kana ana MAK 118 USER pages vts Mah tal hao eR Baa MA 139 ELO nutter NANG eee eee ee ea ea 195 Watch Recipe veces naa Saket es dana 136 H Installation Half cycle mode 38 Electrical Heaterly pes eean AA EEE ant ER eiii 91 Driver module LL aaa aaa 10 HeatsinkPre Temp id ey ee 201 Remote panel anan teense es 214 HeatsinkT Max aaa sa na ice dae eb es ea eed eee 90 Thyristor power unit 0 0 0 anna 19 HHOME ay aie AA AA 228 Mechanical oon a anas anan 4 E E Lay LA EO AT 230 160 AMP URIS oo estrene rerus inene errn 6 Hidden parameters 0 aaa 128 250 Amp units daanan anna teens 7 Hide 400 AMP Units cb Na tee eee ea eee a 8 Homepage dat datada os 228 50 100 Amp units anna maana 5 Unwired Connections aaa 120 500 Amp units LL aaa a aanak manna Pe wate E E 222 226 Remote panel aan 213 Hole a dali 84 ASAN AG a e ed 54 Est tate A eee ee ey ree CEE ESE CE 107 Instrument A PG BU PA chinese T 31 AA al ale cats unten 76 Holdi sanirana O 110 Modbus parameter addresses 152 HOME AA EEEN 226 Mems na mapa kan ds pels 69 81 82 Home Page Timeo
164. CADA package PLC or DCS system The 32h8e is intended as an independent policeman and its process PV may also be communicated to the Fieldbus network master To this end the 32h8e PV is written every 1 2 second to the EPower s Instrument Config RemotePV parameter which can then be transmitted to the master device PV retransmission is also provided as an analogue V or mA signal at the analogue output OP3 This may be used as a back up to the digitally communicated parameter in the event of a failure of the communications link HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 233 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A6 5 DIGITAL ALARM OPTIONS The following source parameters can be logically OR ed together to give a digital output state 1 SRC A 1 SRC B 1 SRC C 1 SRC D EP AL 1 SRC A to 1 SRC D are described in the Engineering Handbook HA029006 EP AL is defined as All EPower alarms Note the ALL A All Alarms parameter includes the above EP AL as well as the indicator alarms A6 6 HOME PAGE TIMEOUT The 32h8e normally forces the display to return to the Home page after a period of keyboard inactivity If however the current focus is on an EPower parameter then the HOME Page timeout is not imposed thus allowing the user to display a specific Network parameter indefinitely providing that auto scrolling is disabled HA179769 Page 234 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE invensys 4 Eurotherm Restriction of
165. Cumulative band CP Cumulative power j CP1 CP5 0 CP2 P1 CP3 P1 P2 y CP4 P2 gt a MG gt a CB3 CB4 Pa CB1 CB2 CB5 Figure 9 3 1 Total power demand example 9 3 2 Sharing Efficiency Factor F The Sharing Efficiency Factor F is defined as follows Pmax CPmax CPmin F gt Pmax Where CP max is the maximum of all the Cumulative Powers and CP min the minimum Sharing Efficiency increases as F approaches 1 That is the closer CP na and CP min are to P the higher the sharing efficiency Pmax CPmax CP min Figure 9 3 2 Sharing efficiency definitions HA179769 Page 182 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 3 3 Sharing algorithm B1 to Bn CP1 to CPn power setpointsfor yy Sharing algorithm ye Cumulative power channels 1 to n demands on supply Figure 9 3 3a Sharing algorithm overview The goal of the Efficient Power algorithm is to keep the value of F as close as possible to 1 To achieve this the following parameters are manipulated 1 The Delay time D for each load modulation 2 The order in which loads are modulated The algorithm itself is made of several steps which are computed before each modulation period 1 The master determines the total number of channels n 2 The master determines the setpoint Power Demand for each channel This gives the Duty Cycle and the Max Power of the Load PZmax 3 Burst Image Initialisation
166. D MANAGEMENT CONTROL LOADMNG The LoadMng Block is added Each LMChan Lmin parameter is wired to a LoadMng LMout parameter Figure 9 5 1c shows the complete configuration Notes 1 Ifa channel is not wired to a slot of the LoadMng block it doesn t participate to the Load Management process 2 Ona Given Station it is allowed to mix channels which participate to the PLM process and channels which do not CALCULATION AND COMMUNICATIONS The Unit performs all the operations needed by the Predictive Load Management process transparently to the user HA179769 Page 190 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 1 TOOLS GRAPHICAL WIRING Cont Network 1 Diag Status Diag Output htain TransterP Diag PADP Limit PA Limit 5P1 10 AnalogIP 1 YoltsOto10D 0 E a it Network 2 tutain PX Diag Status tin SP Diag Output htain TransterP w Diag PADP Limit Ps 10 AnalogIP 2 In Wblts1to5 1 amp Main P a i hutain Pw Diag Status vain SP Diag Output Diag PAOP Figure 9 5 1b LMChan blocks Burst Fix 2 A n SY y Modultr3 FiringOP 1 Resistive 0 Gi Bl Safety Ramp Status i FiringOP 2 Resistive 0 5 H Enable Safety Ramp Status FiringOP 3 Resistive 0 Gi Enable Safety Ramp Status HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 191 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 1 TOOLS GRAPHICAL WIRING Cont gt
167. Definition Name Wired From nput03 Control 3 Main PV nput04 Control 4 Main PY nput05 not wired nput06 not wired nput07 not wired nput08 not wired nput03 not wired nput10 not wired nput11 not wired nput12 not wired nput13 not wired nput14 not wired nput15 not wired nput16 not wired Na Rg BVRVVVVRVVVVVY Figure 7 5a Typical Fieldbus Gateway Parameter list A Profibus master may be required to work with slaves from different manufacturers and with different functions Also there are many parameters which are not required by the network master Fieldbus Gateway allows the user to define which Input and output parameters are to be available over the Profibus link The master may then map the selected device parameters into for example PLC input output registers or in the case of a supervisory SCADA package to a personal computer Values from each slave the Input Data are read by the master which then runs a control program such as a ladder logic program The program generates a set of values the Output Data and loads them into a pre defined set of registers for transmission to the slaves This process is called an I O data exchange and is repeated continuously to give a cyclical I O data exchange As shown in figure 7 5a above there are two tabs within the editor called Input definition and Output definition Inputs are values sent from the
168. Displays the input power demand value that the power module is to deliver PA Limit Phase angle limit This is a phase angle reduction factor used in Burst Firing If lower than 100 the power module will deliver a burst of phase angle firing Used typically to perform threshold current limiting in Burst Firing Ramp Status Displays the safety ramp status as Ramping or Finished Safety Magnetisation Ramp Safety Ramp 10 cycles 4 cycles lt Ta NG o E Output A l k ka voltage UA ES E O IA Y vi Output 1 nG voltage MA Da Line sy Line 7 i i i supply Delayed trigger angle supply Resistive load Inductive load Figure 6 13b Safety ramp burst firing examples Soft start 2 gt Output vious voltage Line yy supply Figure 6 13c Soft start example 4 High current transient 4 Load voltage Load voltage 4 Load current Load current wt al wt A Switch at zero volts Switch at zero current Q Delayed Trigger angle Figure 6 13d Delayed trigger definition Note Waveforms have been idealised for clarity HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 75 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 14 INSTRUMENT MENU Allows the user to select the display language and to view the unit s Serial number and the current Network configuration CONF gt Instr See figure 6 14 1 See figure 6 14 2 Instr 3 Config Figure 6 14 Instrument menu 6 14 1 Instru
169. E wire click on the required destination parameter Ka a 4 Wires remain dashed until they are downloaded Figure 7 3 2c Output selection dialogue box Routing wires When a wire is placed it is auto routed The auto routing algorithm searches for a clear path between the two blocks A wire can be auto routed again using the context menus or by double clicking the wire A wire segment can be edited manually by click dragging If the block to which it is connected is moved the end of the wire moves with it retaining as much of the path as possible If a wire is selected by clicking on it it is drawn with small boxes on its corners Wire Context Menu Right click on a wire to display the wire block context menu Force Exec Break When wires form a loop a break point must be introduced where the value written to the block comes from a source EN Force Exec Break which was last executed during the previous cycle A break is Task Break automatically placed by iTools and appears in red Force Reames Hike Exec Break allows the user to define where a break must be Use Tags placed Surplus breaks appear in black 4H alg Task Break Each Network block and associated I O blocks wiring etc represents a task which is normally associated with a particular power phase Network Block one is associated with phase one Network Block two with phase two and so on Different tasks are thus often synchronised with different X Delete Del ph
170. E G 111 222 333 444 User gt Network Figure 6 6 Communications User menu Enter fourth Byte of Subnet Mask address Enter first Byte of Gateway address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter second Byte of Gateway address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter third Byte of Gateway address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter fourth Byte of Gateway address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter first Byte of Preferred Master address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter second Byte of Preferred Master address Enter third Byte of Preferred Master address E G 111 222 333 444 Enter fourth Byte of Preferred Master address Select Yes to view MAC address or No to hide MAC First Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Second Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Third Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Fourth Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Fifth Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Sixth Byte of MAC address E G 11 22 33 44 55 66 Appears only if Show MAC Yes Shows status of Ethernet network HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 53 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 6 COMMS MENU Cont This menu allows the user to
171. ER USER GUIDE A1 1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION Cont 8 12 13 Installation Category and Pollution Degree This unit has been designed to conform to BSEN61010 installation category Il and pollution degree 2 defined as follows Installation Category Il CAT Il The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V supply is 2500V Pollution Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs However a temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected Installation may be carried out only by suitably qualified personnel To prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live the Remote Panel must be installed in an enclosure Wiring must comply with all local wiring regulations i e UK the latest IEE wiring regulations BS7671 and USA NEC Class 1 wiring methods Do not connect AC supply to low voltage sensor input or low level inputs and outputs Voltage rating The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not exceed 240Vac relay output to logic dc or sensor connections any connection to ground Conductive pollution Electrically conductive pollution i e carbon dust MUST be excluded from the enclosure in which the Remote Panel is installed To secure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution fit an air filter to the air intake of the enclosure Where condensation is likely include a thermostatically contr
172. Energy Counter is enabled in EPower Set to yes to reset Automatically returns to no HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 225 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE PRST HIGH LOW A1 Type An Type ADDR HOME ID RECNO STORE Peak Reset Allows the high and low peak values to be reset to the current value Set to On to reset Automatically returns to Off Peak High Shows the highest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on or since reset Level 2 Peak Low Shows the lowest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on or since reset Level 2 Alarm 1 type and setpoint Indicates the threshold value for alarm 1 Type Hi Lo or ROC according to configuration Set 2 This parameter does not appear if it is Unconfigured in Set 2 n 2 3 or 4 Further alarm types and threshold values as configured in level 3 configuration Address Modbus address 1 to 254 for the instrument Home display PU process variable Alm Alarm threshold PU AL Process variable Alarm SP P A ro PV Alarm SP read only EP EPower Current EP U EPower Voltage EP P EPower Power Customer ID Customised instrument identification number 0 to 9999 Current Recipe Number The current recipe number 1 to 5 or nonE if no recipe running or FAiL if there are no recipes available See section A6 2 for further details Recipe to save Takes a snapsho
173. Fatal Config or Standby error has been detected The error condition s must be cleared before the 32h8e will respond to operator keystrokes A6 1 5 EPower Event and Alarm Messages The messages shown below are generated by the EPower module and are displayed as scrolling text strings in the Message centre area of the display Issue 9 Aug 12 MISS MAINS Supply power to one or more power modules is not connected or is isolated THYR SC A thyristor short circuit has been detected In such a case current flows even when the thyristor is not firing OPEN THYR A thyristor open circuit has been detected In such a case no current flows even when the thyristor is firing FUSE BLOWN One or more of the thyristor protection fuses has ruptured OVER TEMP The thyristor heat sink temperature has exceeded the specified limit and the thyristor has been shut down The temperature must fall to below the specified limit including the hysteresis value before firing can re commence VOLT DIPS This detects a reduction in supply voltage Detection threshold is set up in EPower configuration Network Setup FREQ FAULT Supply frequency is below 47Hz or above 63Hz Firing stops until the supply frequency has returned to a value between 47Hz and 63Hz PB 24V The 24V power rail in a power module has failed Firing stops and restarts only when the problem has been resolved TLF Total load failure The load co
174. G DETAILS Cont COMPOUNDS Compounds are used to simplify the top level wiring diagram by allowing the placing of any number of function blocks within one box the inputs and outputs of which operate in the same way as those of a normal function block Each time a compound is created a new tab appears at the top of the wiring diagram Initially compounds and their tabs are named Compound 1 Compound 2 etc but they can be renamed by right clicking either on the compound in the top level diagram or anywhere within an open Compound selecting Rename and typing in the required text string 16 characters max Compounds cannot contain other compounds i e they can be created only in the top level diagram Compound creation 1 2 Empty compounds are created within the top level diagram by clicking on the Create Compound toolbar icon Compounds can also be created by highlighting one or more function blocks in the top level diagram and then clicking on the Create Compound toolbar icon The highlighted items are moved from the top level diagram into a new compound Create Flatten compound compound Compounds are uncreated flattened by highlighting the relevant item in the top level menu and then clicking on the Flatten Compound toolbar icon All the items previously contained within the compound appear on the top level diagram Wiring between top level and compound parameters is carri
175. G15 Output 7 Channel 11 G16 Output 11 Output 3 Setpoint CAPUA Group 2 Output 8 Output 9 10 G25 Output 10 Figure 9 2 5a Channel distribution within groups example For the six channels in group 1 assuming a set point of 6096 i e input of the first channel of group 1 0 6 Channel G 1 modulates at 60 channels G 2 to G 4 are continuously on 10096 and channels G 5 and G46 are continuously off That is channel 1 modulates at 6096 channels 2 5 and 6 are on and channels 7 and 11 are off HA179769 Page 180 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 2 5 INCREMENTAL DISTRIBUTED CONTROL Cont Similarly for the five channels in group 2 assuming a setpoint of 35 i e unput of the first channel of group 2 0 35 Channel G 1 modulates at 75 G32 is continuously on and G23 G 4 and G 5 are continuously off That is channel 3 is modulating at 75 off Channel 4 is continuously on and channels 8 9 and 10 are continuously off The modulation period of group 2 is delayed with respect to that of group 1 bt t T g where g 2 i e T T 2 Note the modulation period T is a constant for all groups Chan G25 10 1 0 100 Chan G24 9 y 100 Chan G23 8 y 100 Chan G22 4 onl 12 100 Chan G21 3 Pa 100 Group 2 Chan G16 11 de 100 Chan G15 7 a 100 Chan G14 6 aag 100 Chan G13 5 ca Group 1 100 Chan G12 2 0 100 Chan
176. HCP Ethernet server The first byte of the IP address If the IP address were to be 111 222 333 444 then the first byte would be 111 the second byte 222 and so on IP2 to IP4 Address As IP address 1 but for the remaining three Bytes Subnet1 to Subnet4 Mask As P Address 1 to 4 but for the Subnet Mask Gateway1 to 4 As IP Address 1 to 4 but for the Default Gateway IP1 Pref Master to IP4 Pref Master As for IP Address 1 to 4 but for the Preferred Master Parity Delay Unit ident Loose Instr DHCP Enable IP1 Address Local network information IP address subnet mask address etc is normally sup plied by the user s IT depart ment HA179769 Page 54 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 6 1 COMMUNICATIONS USER MENU PARAMETERS Cont Show MAC Allows the user to choose whether the unit s MAC address may be shown Yes or not No MAC1 Appears only if Show MAC above is set to Yes This is the first byte of the non editable MAC address If the MAC address were to be 11 22 33 44 55 66 then the first byte would be 11 the second byte 22 and so on MAC2 to MAC6 As for MAC1 but for bytes two to six respectively Network Read Only Also known as Ethernet Status Shows the status of the communictions link as follows Running Link connected and running Init Communications initialising Ready Network ready to accept connection Offline Network offline Bad Network Status Bad GSD
177. IG level Access menu 5 Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key to display the first page of the top level Configuration menu Operate Return gt repeatedly until no further changes occur then hold continuously operated until the access page appears Any Menu li Hold 4 to 5 secs Access Goto Use up arrow key twice to select Confi 3 Operator p y 3 AA Access Goto 4 Engineer Access Goto Once selected wait a few seconds or operate CU Config Enter key for Pass code page Wait or Access Pass code Use up arrow key to enter the Config Pass p y 9 code CA gt Code 1 CA Code 2 Default code 3 but this may be edited as described in section 6 3 2 Code 3 Wait or ED Top level Config menu Figure 6 1 2 Access to the Configuration level menu HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 45 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 2 TOP LEVEL MENU Figure 6 2 shows the top level menu for Configuration level Engineer top level menu similar Default code 2 Submenus are discussed in the following sections Note Section 6 contains descriptions of all the menus which can appear If an option or a feature is not fitted and or enabled then it does not appear in the top level menu ACCESS peticion aa a Section 6 3 Lgc2 logic operator Section 6 16 Analogue I P Section 6 4 Lgc8 logic operator Section 6 17 Analogue O P Section 6 5 Math2 23 ee aer
178. Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 207 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Cont MAINS NETWORK MEASUREMENTS All network measurements are calculated over a full mains cycle but internally updated every half cycle For this reason power control current limits and alarms all run at the mains half cycle rate The calculations are based on waveform samples taken at a rate of 20kHz Measurements on each phase are synchronised to its own phase and if the line voltage cannot be detected the measurements stop for that phase It should be noted that depending on the configuration the phase voltage referred to is one of a the line voltage referenced to neutral in four star b the line voltage referenced to neutral or another phase for single phase or c the line voltage referenced to the phase applied to the next adjacent power module for three phase star or delta configurations The parameters below are directly derived from measurements for each phase Accuracy 20 to 25 C Line frequency F 0 02Hz Line RMS voltage Vline 0 5 of Nominal Vline 9 H H 9 f ifj 9 Load RMS voltage V 20 596 of Nominal V for voltage readings gt 1 of Nominal V Unspecified for readings lower than 196Vnom Thyristor RMS current Iems 205 of Nominal Igys for current readings gt 3 3 of Nominal Irys Unspecified for readings 3 3 Nominal lpms see note 1 of Nominal V 1 of Nominal 1 1 of Nominal V x Nominal 1
179. LLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE The following table is arranged in alphabetical function block order Access Firing O P 4 IP Monitor 2 Predictive Load Manager Comms Instrument IP Monitor 3 PLM Chan 1 Control 1 Analogue I P 1 IP Monitor 4 PLM Chan 2 Control 2 Analogue P 2 LGC 1 PLM Chan 3 Control 3 Analogue P 3 LGC2 2 PLM Chan 4 Control 4 Analogue P 4 LGOC2 3 QuickStart Counter 1 Analogue P 5 LGC24 Set Prov 1 Counter 2 Analogue O P 1 Lgc8 1 Set Prov 2 Counter 3 Analogue O P 2 Lgc8 2 Set Prov 3 Counter 4 Analogue O P 3 Lgc8 3 Set Prov 4 Customer Page 1 Analogue O P 4 Lgc8 4 Timer 1 Customer Page 2 I O Digital 1 LTC Timer 2 Customer Page 3 I O Digital 2 Maths2 1 Timer 3 Customer Page 4 I O Digital 3 Maths2 2 Timer 4 Energy 1 I O Digital 4 Maths2 3 Totaliser 1 Energy 2 I O Digital 5 Maths2 4 Totaliser 2 Energy 3 I O Digital 6 Modulator 1 Totaliser 3 Energy 4 I O Digital 7 Modulator 2 Totaliser 4 Energy 5 I O Digital 8 Modulator 3 User Value 1 Event Log I O Relay 1 Modulator 4 User Value 2 Fault detection I O Relay 2 Network 1 User Value 3 Firing O P 1 I O Relay 3 Network 2 User Value 4 Firing O P 2 I O Relay 4 Network 3 Firing O P 3 IP Monitor 1 Network 4 HA179769 Page 142 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Access ClearMemory Cold Start the Instrument uint8 07EA 2026 Ac
180. Lat FuseBlown System alarm latch Fuse Blown uint8 0361 865 Network 4 AlmLat MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch Mains Voltage Fault uint8 036A 874 Network 4 AlmLat MissMains System alarm latch Missing Mains uint8 035E 862 Network 4 AlmLat NetworkDips System alarm latch Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0363 867 Network 4 AlmLat OpenThyr System alarm latch Open Thyristor uint8 0360 864 Network 4 AlmLat OverCurrent Indication alarm latch Over Current uint8 036C 876 Network 4 AlmLat OverTemp System alarm latch Over Temperature uint8 0362 866 Network 4 AlmLat PB24VFail System alarm latch Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0365 869 Network 4 AlmLat PLF Process alarm latch Partial Load Failure uint8 0368 872 Network 4 AlmLat PLU Process alarm latch Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0369 873 Network 4 AlmLat PreTemp Process alarm latch Pre Temperature uint8 036B 875 Network 4 AlmLat ThyrsC System alarm latch Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 035F 863 Network 4 AlmLat TLF Process alarm latch Total Load Failure uint8 0366 870 Network 4 AlmSig ChopOff Process alarm signalling status Chop Off uint8 0358 856 Network 4 AlmSig FreqFault System alarm signalling status Frequency Fault uint8 0355 853 Network 4 AlmSig FuseBlown System alarm signalling status Fuse Blown uint8 0352 850 Network 4 AlmSig MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 035B 859 Network 4 AlmSig MissMains System alarm signalling status Missing Mains uint8 034F 847 Network 4 AlmSi
181. MU iam N IncrDistr 6 Station Out 1 Station LOut2 Station LhOut3 Network 1 10 AnalogIP 1 voltsOto10 0 E Main P g it Network 2 Volts Ito5 1 Main P 10 2nalogIP 3 Volts0to10 0 amp hiin P i Main PY Diag Status lain SP Diag Output bin TransterP w Diag PADP Limit PsA Limit SP1 y Un LMOut 3 it hiin PY Diag Status tain SP Diag Output Mein TransferP Diag PADP Limit PVA Limit 5P1 E it bd hin Out 7 ul Min Pw Diag Status MBin SP Diag Output Diag PADP y Livin LMOut E G Figure 9 5 1c LoadMng blocks Burst Fix 2 In ut o Lvin 3 it Modultr 3 FiringOP 1 Resistive 0 E Safety Ramp Status ti FiringOP 2 Resistive 0 G EM Enable 8 SafetyRamp Status In PaLimitin FiringOP 3 Resistive 0 Gi bi Enable Safety Ramp Status In PaLimitin Page 192 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 Predictive Load Management function block details Full details of Load Management parameters are to be found in sections 6 21 and 6 19 above LM TYPE Configures the type of Load Management as load sharing or load sequencing or off Function block location LoadMng Main Parameter name Type Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Config Type Enumeration Values 0 LMNo Load Management disabled 1 Sharing Load
182. Modulator block Modulation mode firing A1Fuseln External Fuse Fail Alarm input Wired to the output of a digital input the input of which is wired to an external Fuse Blown transducer A1Templn External over Temperature Alarm input Wired to the output of a digital input the input of which is wired to an external Over Temperature transducer PAOP Phase Angle Reduction This display appears only for Burst Firing applications If the value of this parameter is less than 100 a burst of phase angle is delivered Used for example to perform threshold current limiting 6 23 2 LTC Alarm Displays the alarm configuration for the Load Tap Changer external Fuse Blown and over Temperature alarms Figure 6 23 2 shows the menu The parameters listed below apply to both alarms individually PARAMETERS AlmDis Allows the user to disable the alarm AlmDet Indicates to the user whether or not the alarm is active AlmSig Indicates to the user whether or not the alarm is active If action is to be taken as a result of this alarm s going active then it is AlmSig that should be wired AlmLat Allows the user to set the alarm to be a latching type AlmAck Allows the user to acknowledge the alarm AlmStop Not configurable see note Note These two alarms are considered to be system alarms and automatically inhibit thyristor operation firing whilst active AlmStop cannot be set to No HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 101 EPOWER
183. Modultr Mode Modultr SwitchPA Network PLM Ps PLMChan PLMChan Group PLMChan ShedFactor RmtPanel Comms Address RmtPanel Comms Baud SetProv DisRamp SetProv HiRange SetProv Limit SetProv LocalSP SetProv RampRate SetProv RemSelect SetProv SPSelect SetProv SPTrack SetProv SPUnits Setup Control BleedScale Setup Control EnLimit Setup Control FFGain Setup Control FFOffset Setup Control FFType Setup Control NominalPV Setup Control TransferEn Setup Network ChopOffNb Setup Network ChopOffThreshold1 Setup Network ChopOffThreshold2 Setup Network ChopOffwindow Setup Network FreqDriftThreshold Setup Network HeaterType Setup Network HeatsinkPreTemp Setup Network lextScale Setup Network IMaximum Setup Network INominal Setup Network OverlThreshold Setup Network OverVoltThreshold Setup Network PLFSensitivity Setup Network PLUthreshold Setup Network UnderVoltThreshold Setup Network VdipsThreshold Setup Network VextScale Setup Network VlineNominal Setup NetworkVloadNominal Setup Network VMaximum Station PLM Address Timer In Timer Time Timer Type Total AlarmSP Total Hold Total In Total Reset Total Resolution Total Run Total Units User Comms Address User Comms Baud User Comms DCHP_enable User Comms Default_Gateway_1 User Comms Default_Gateway_2 User Comms Default_Gateway_3 User Comms Default_Gateway_4 User Comms Delay User Comms Extension_Cycles User Comms IP_address_1 User Comms IP address 2 User Comms IP address 3
184. NENE PG Gp 6 Mos ean 8 67 Alarm Acknowledge 00 eee eee 65 Modbus parameter addresses 146 147 Alarnvdetections 2 iica radar CANG dos 62 Create a new empty data set 136 Alarm disable aan a ea sat 61 Create a new watch recipe list 136 Alarmvlatehi Lal LAAL ak eto a NANG Bag 64 Create Compound eee e eee 118 124 125 Alarm Signalling eee eee 63 CTO Pisa te Ayan ap Cae Ka ANGLE Ga 228 NEA AA 66 Current feedbacks cenizas ia GG 19 CLOSED ER ES nG HA nana LGA AG NUNAL GA 231 Currrent transformer external ee eee 19 Closed DS saps et oe ee PENA ND NA ANN ENG ee 32 Connect ls hs Sand 238 Cold Maior a 32 Custom Pages Colours Modbus parameter addresses 147 148 Function blocks etc a 124 Cut SoftWare WING a dh yakap kaa deme LLANA 122 COMMENT z na as 122 Column enable disable o o o o o 128 129 Function block context menu 120 COM Eric ein sits ie 231 Graphical Wiring Editor occccccccc c c 118 COMME iras id road 122 Mo NIO nG NG aia a 123 Context MENU Halad Kid kana See Shue bees 122 Wire context menu a 121 Comms Wiring editor items a 124 Gateway tool ac api yds eee ca pada 130 Cycle TIME eects PUNAN GNG NG SR Nees anand gne ening 85 MENU erstes stig ie ls 53 D Modbus parameter addresses o 143 AA ae adie es 183 PINOUtS eee eee 16 Dash d lines
185. Nm Load termination Figure 2 2 2c Line and load termination 50A 100A and 160A units 250A units similar HA179769 Page 22 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont Supply voltage termination Recommended torque 28 8 Nm A Bolt M12 x 25 Serrated washer gt Flat washer Ring terminal Copper bia Termination detail Load termination i Figure 2 2 2d Line and Load termination 400A units HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 23 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont Recommended torque 30 Nm HOA Spring washer Flat washer Ring terminal Copper busbar Termination detail Ribbon cable in Load bo termination Figure 2 2 2e Line and Load termination 500A units 630A units similar HA179769 Page 24 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont Recommended torque 30 Nm ki Spring washer Flat washer Ring terminal Copper busbar Termination detail Ribbon cable in Figure 2 2 2f Line and Load termination 630A units HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 25 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont The illustrations which make up figure 2 2 2g below show
186. Open Thyristor uint8 0234 564 Network 2 AlmStop OverCurrent Indication alarm stop Over Current uint8 0240 576 Network 2 AlmStop OverTemp System alarm stop Over Temperature uint8 0236 566 Network 2 AlmStop PB24VFail System alarm stop Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0239 569 Network 2 AlmStop PLF Process alarm stop Partial Load Failure uint8 023 572 Network 2 AlmStop PLU Process alarm stop Partial Load Unbalance uint8 023D 573 Network 2 AlmStop PreTemp Process alarm stop Pre Temperature uint8 023F 575 Network 2 AlmStop ThyrsC System alarm stop Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0233 563 Network 2 AlmStop TLF Process alarm stop Total Load Failure uint8 023A 570 Network 2 Meas Frequency Frequency of the line float32 01BD 445 Network 2 Meas HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 01BF 447 Network 2 Meas HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 01CO 448 Network 2 Meas HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 01C1 449 Network 2 Meas Irms of the load float32 01A8 424 Network 2 Meas 12 Irms2 of the load float32 01A9 425 Network 2 Meas 13 Irms3 of the load float32 O1AA 426 Network 2 Meas lavg Average value of Irms float32 OTAB 427 Network 2 Meas IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network float32 01C5 453 Network 2 Meas Isq Square value of the load current float32 01AD 429 Network 2 Meas IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 01AC 428 Network 2 Meas IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network
187. P 2 wvoltsOto10 0 E lutain P V Win Meas val O Analog OP 2 WbBin P w HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 119 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont FUNCTION BLOCK CONTEXT MENU Cont Hide Unwired Connections Cut Copy Paste Delete Undelete Bring To Front Push To back Displays only those parameters which are wired Allows one or more selected items to be moved to the Clipboard ready for pasting into another diagram or compound or for use in a Watch window or OPC scope The original items are greyed out and function blocks and wires are shown dashed until next download after which they are removed from the diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt X gt Cut operations carried out since the last download can be undone by using the Undo toolbar icon by selecting Undelete or by using the short cut lt ctrl gt lt Z gt Allows one or more selected items to be copied to the Clipboard ready for pasting into another diagram or compound or for use in a Watch window or OPC scope The original items remain in the current wiring diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt C gt If items are pasted to the same diagram from which they were copied the items will be replicated with different block instances Should this result in more instances of a block than are available an error display appears showing details of which items couldn t be copied Copies items from the Clipboard to
188. PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 150 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec EventLog Event08Type Event 8 type uint8 071C 1820 EventLog Event09ID Event 9 Identification uint8 071F 1823 EventLog Event09Type Event 9 type uint8 071E 1822 EventLog Event10ID Event 10 Identification uint8 0721 1825 EventLog Event10Type Event 10 type Event ID uint8 0720 1824 EventLog Event11ID Event 11 Identification o No entry 161 InvPwrModRev uint8 0723 1827 EventLog Event1 1Type Event 11 type eae Ea 1e EN ba uint8 0722 1826 EventLog Event12ID Event 12 Identification 3 power down 64 Pana Ribbon uint8 0725 1829 EventLog Event12Type Event 12 type 4 Coldstart 165 Pwr3 Ribbon uint8 0724 1828 EventLog Event13ID Event 13 Identification 3 Ka aa ier R eae uint8 0727 1831 EventLog Event13Type Event 13 type ala aasa NG ee uint8 0726 1830 EventLog Event14ID Event 14 Identification 22 Thy Short cct 170 Pwr4EEprom uint8 0729 1833 EventLog Event14Type Event 14 type A Z UN be aes wo Ga uint8 0728 1832 EventLog Event15ID Event 15 Identification 25 Over Temp 73 PWR2cal uint8 072B 1835 EventLog Event15Type Event 15 type E Ha a SEE uint8 072A 1834 EventLog Event16ID Event 16 Identification 28 PMod 24 76 Watchdog uint8 072D 1837 EventLog Event16Type Event 16 type e His oft e E noes uint8 072C 1836 EventLog Event17ID Event 17 Identification a if y
189. POWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 21 1 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT MAIN MENU Cont Type Configures the type of Predictive Load Management as follows No Sharing IncrT 1 IncrT2 Rotincr Distrib DistIncr RotDisInc No Load Management Load Management is disabled Load Sharing Used to control the total power demand over time by distributing the conduction periods of the various units Incremental Type 1 Several loads receive a common setpoint Only one channel is modulated by the duty cycle the others being at 0 or 100 demand Total power distributed setpoint value Incremental Type 2 A number of loads receive a common setpoint Only the first channel is modulated by the duty cycle the others being at 0 or 100 demand Total power distributed setpoint value Rotating Incremental Provides incremental control of between two and 64 channels operating from a single input Each channel modulates with an identical mark space ratio determined by the power demand signal but each channel is separated from adjacent outputs by the selected time base Distributed Control This mode provides control of between two and 64 channels from an equal number of independent inputs Each channel modulates with a mark space ratio proportional to its input signal but with the switching of adjacent inputs distributed over the selected time cycle Distributed and Incremental control This provides control of between two and ei
190. R LTC OPTION This option offers automatic load tap selection for primary or secondary windings as configured Instruments with this option must also be fitted with the remote current voltage feedback option Figure 6 23 shows the overall menu structure Figure 6 23 2 shows the Alarm menu and figures 6 23 3a to 6 23 3f show some typical application wiring CONF 3 PLMChan wired input Input to the LTC block in Usually wired to the control block output Turns ratio of taps 1 to N where N is 1 to 4 as selected in TapNb value below See text for details Select if this is primary or sec ondary LTC gt a See figure 6 23 2 Output values 1 to N where N is 1 to 4 as selected in TapNb value above See text for details MainPrm gt AlFuseln External fuse fail alarm Normally wired from a digital input block the input to which is an external Fuse Blown signal MainPrm External over temperature alarm Normally wired from a digital input block the input of gt A1 Templn which is an external temperature sensor Appears for Burst Firing only Phase angle reduction factor in c P Back to IP Figure 6 23 Load Tap Changer LTC menu overview HA179769 Page 100 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 23 1 MainPrm parameters IP The 96 demand normally wired from a control block output S1 Turns ratio of transformer t
191. S Cont WITHOUT LOAD SHARING SYNCHRONISED REDUCTION FACTOR 50 Similar to the previous example but the authorised Power has been set to Ps 216kW Reduction factor r is 5096 0 5 kw 1 Pmax 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 00933 1000 Reduction factor r 50 216kW 900 800 700 600 500 400 Pt 300 200 Ps 100 Modulation period Figure 9 4 3b Synchronised without load sharing r 50 WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NOT SYNCHRONISED Because modulation periods start at different times the power profile may be good for some modulation periods but poor for others KVM Pmaxx 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 62334 1000 Reduction factor r 100 433kW 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 a gt Modulation period Figure 9 4 3c Non synchronised without load sharing r 100 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 187 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 4 3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISONS Cont WITHOUT LOAD SHARING NON SYNCHRONISED REDUCTION FACTOR 50 KW H
192. Select Between Input 1 0 and Input 2 1 bool 08DB 2267 Math2 2 Status Status Good 0 Bad 1 bool 08D6 2262 Math2 2 Units Output Units as for Math2 1 uint8 08D9 2265 Math2 3 Fallback Fallback strategy as for Math2 1 uint8 08F2 2290 Math2 3 FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08EB 2283 Math2 3 HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08EC 2284 Math2 3 In1 Input 1 Value float32 08E7 2279 Math2 3 In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08E6 2278 Math2 3 In2 Input 2 Value float32 08E9 2281 Math2 3 In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 08E8 2280 Math2 3 LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08ED 2285 Math2 3 Oper Operator as for Math2 1 uint8 08EA 2282 Math2 3 Out Output Value float32 08EF 2287 Math2 3 Resolution Output Resolution as for Math2 1 uint8 08F0 2288 Math2 3 Select Select Between Input 1 0 and Input 2 1 bool 08F3 2291 Math2 3 Status Status Good 0 Bad 1 bool 08EE 2286 Math2 3 Units Output Units as for Math2 1 uint8 08F1 2289 Math2 4 Fallback Fallback strategy as for Math2 1 uint8 090A 2314 Math2 4 FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 0903 2307 Math2 4 HighLimit Output High Limit float32 0904 2308 Math2 4 In1 Input 1 Value float32 08FF 2303 Math2 4 In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 O8FE 2302 Math2 4 In2 Input 2 Value float32 0901 2305 Math2 4 In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 0900 2304 Math2 4 LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 0905 2309 Math2 4 Oper Operation as for Math2 1 uint8 0902 2306 Math2 4 Out Output Value float32 0907 2311 Math2
193. The scan can be Scan stopped at any time by clicking on the Scan toolbar icon a second time Note Section 7 2 contains more details of the scan process HA179769 Page 112 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 1 2 Ethernet Modbus TCP communications Note the following description is based on windows XP Windows Vista is similar It is first necessary to determine the IP address of the unit as described under Comms menu in section 6 6 This can be done from either the Engineer menu or the Config menu Once the Ethernet link has been correctly installed carry out the following actions at the pc Click on Start Click on Control Panel If Control Panel opens in Category View select Classic View instead Double click on iTools Click on the TCP IP tab in the Registry settings configuration Click on Add The New TCP IP Port dialogue box opens Type in a name for the port then click Ada Type the IP address of the unit in the Edit Host box which appears Click OK Check the details in the New TCP IP Port box then click on OK Click on OK in the Registry settings box to confirm the new port Continued oO IPA Sh Os dt Ea IA Registry Settings iTools Configuration Product Key Serial Ports ie Authorization OPC Server Startup Configure TCP IP ports for MODBUS over Ethernet Settings may bell SEE Ta ATT MEPower Name V Enabled
194. Unit User energy units multiplier as Energy 1 uint8 0B33 2867 Energy 4 AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy O No 1 Yes bool 0B4B 2891 Energy 4 Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B41 2881 Energy 4 Input Input to totalize float32 0B42 2882 Energy 4 prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B4C 2892 Energy 4 prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B4D 2893 Energy 4 Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B45 2885 Energy 4 PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uint16 0B46 2886 Energy 4 PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse as Energy 1 uint8 0B48 2888 Energy 4 Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B43 2883 Energy 4 TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B44 2884 Energy 4 TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units as Energy 1 uint8 0B49 2889 Energy 4 Type Type of energy counter 0 Normal 1 Global bool OB4A 2890 Energy 4 UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B40 2880 Energy 4 UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier as Energy 1 uint8 0B47 2887 Energy 5 AutoScaleUnits Autoscale the unit of the energy O No 1 Yes bool OBSF 2911 Energy 5 Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B55 2901 Energy 5 Input Input to totalize float32 0B56 2902 Energy 5 prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B60 2912 Energy 5 prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B61 2913 Energy 5 Pulse Pulsed output bool 0B59 2905 Ene
195. Unit over temperature Network dips A reduction in supply voltage exceeding a configurable value VdipsThreshold causes firing to be inhibited until the supply voltage returns to a suitable value VdipsThreshold represents a percentage change in supply voltage between successive half cycles and can be defined by the user in the Network Setup menu as described in section 6 20 2 Supply frequency fault The supply frequency is checked every half cycle and if the percentage change between successive 1 2 cycles exceeds a threshold value max 596 a Mains Frequency System Alarm is generated The threshold value FreqDriftThold is defined in the Network Setup menu described in section 6 20 2 Power Module 24V Failure Note It is not possible to detect a thyristor short circuit when the unit is delivering 100 output power Similarly it is not possible to detect thyristor open circuit when the unit is delivering 0 output This relay supplied as standard is located adjacent to the watchdog relay figure 2 2 1d The energisation de energisation of the relay coil is under software control and is fully configurable by the user The terms Normally open NO and Normally closed NC refer to the relay in its de energised state Up to three further relays are available if optional I O Modules are fitted see figure 2 2 1c HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 13 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont PREDICTIVE
196. Variable PV from Process units to electrical units RangeLow Used to scale the PV from Process units to electrical units PV The value to be output by the analogue output MeasVal The electrical output value derived by mapping the input PV via input range to output range HA179769 Page 51 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 5 2 Analogue output Alm parameters CONF 3 AnalogOP Use up down arrows to select AnalogOP then Enter Use up down arrows to select the required Analogue output then Enter Use up down arrows to select parameter to edit Key i ll tli See figure 6 5 1 for Main menu O a Is yellow outline EF Key is solid yellow O Alarm enabled Alarm disabled arm not detected arm detected AlmDet gt Output F arm not detected arm detected arm not latched arm latched arm not acknowledged arm acknowledged O output enabled output stopped on alarm AlmStop gt Output F Figure 6 5 2 Analogue output alarm parameter access AlmDis Allows the user to view the current disable status of the output Fault alarm AlmDet Indicates whether the alarm has been detected and is active AlmSig Signals thatthe alarm has occurred and whether it is latched To assign the alarm to a relay for example it is the AlmSig parameter that should be wired AlmLat Allows the user to set the alarm as latching or non latching AlmAck Allows the user to view the current
197. Wg aes 76 Modbus parameter addresses 143 144 145 146 A PA 107 Control and Setpoint Display aaa O ae AT 95 180 193 Index HA179769 Page ii Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Distrib as Kabet NN lts 95 180 193 Ethernet I P Distributed control va ita dd sane daha es 180 PINE maana aaa etal moles eee ee acho ole 17 DIV PR Soe acy a NAAN AN ee 84 Specification ib Yaman 208 Downarrow keya nagan da Sere oe 31 219 Event LOG AA APA AAP AA AA 42 Download the selected data set to the device 136 Modbus parameter addresses 149 Download wiring to instrument 118 123 EX Pakay eee oy Sa IS a NN NG NUN eae eas 84 DownScale ss e ese yn eines ean eda KG bebe bee 84 External Driver Unit Current feedbacks es nana pees peas AP Ghana 19 Fan Sippli s 4 is Akma Vad ede LO aha 10 Phrasing examples 22004 237 E Lk bia palpak cove aes aha samay 11 Wiring specification 0 cece eee eee 204 DSP WaO Guin os tik Bt A ea N a 33 F DSPMORSP va ata dank aces oa AV ab Sa OE ANTS naa 33 Pata katie AG want Agat a ts kan iang ea 182 DuplAddr Unano nananana naan Tar EG ad wake aa cals cease Bee ta 230 Duplicate Address emos chive eee ERA NN 195 Fall Good Fall Bad es 84 Duty cycle aaa KA E O 81 BULL O BO A AAA O dene 84 E Fallback Valley st aire aabt 84 ERNST a tata eae ies 222 225 FalseGood FalseBad 0 0c ccc cece eee 81 Edit FansupplieSins
198. When shielded cable is used it should be grounded at one point only 3 Any external components such as Zener barriers connected between sensor and input terminals may cause errors in measurement due to excessive and or unbalanced lead resistance and leakage currents 4 Analogue inputs are not isolated from digital inputs or from logic outputs ANALOGUE MEASURING INPUTS ar Attenuator Resistance Thermometer Figure A3 2 3a Input wiring Notes 1 For thermocouple inputs compensation cable suitable for the thermocouple type must be used preferably shielded 2 For voltage inputs an attenuator board must be fitted as shown A suitable board is available from the manufacturer 3 For resistance temperature detectors the resistance element is wired across V and VI the lead compensation wire being terminated at V The resistance of all three wires must be equal Line resistances greater than 22 Ohms cause measurement errors OUTPUT WIRING Output 0 p 3 PV retransmission TS Output 0 p 1 Changeover relay AROS Nc Com No 2A 118 1A Mess rl RPA Outputs configurable as 0 to20mA 4 to 20mA Shown in non energised state Relay outputs 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V Analogue outputs Figure A3 2 3b Output wiring HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 215 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A
199. a ZOP Aa uint8 072F 1839 EventLog Event17Type Event 17 type 55 Main V Fault popa Wdog uint8 072E 1838 EventLog Event18ID Event 18 Identification 36 Temp Pre Alarm 192 Ph1ComEr uint8 0731 1841 EventLog Event18Type Event 18 type 58 Out Fault 194 Ph2Wdog uint8 0730 1840 EventLog Event19ID Event 19 Identification 2 10sedlp 13 RN eo mE 1 uint8 0733 1843 EventLog Event19Type Event 19 type 82 Limit Act 197 Ph3Wdog uint8 0732 1842 EventLog Event201D Event 20 Identification en 0305 acond uint8 0735 1845 EventLog Event20Type Event 20 type 111 High 211 Fuse Blown uint8 0734 1844 EventLog Event211D Event 21 Identification 1331W 2125 wdogFaulk uint8 0737 1847 EventLog Event21Type Event 21 type 114 Dev Low 214 CommsTout uint8 0736 1846 EventLog Event22ID Event 22 Identification 13 lt pee cena aan uint8 0739 1849 EventLog Event22Type Event 22 type T ka sal ara HEN uint8 0738 1848 EventLog Event23ID Event 23 Identification 132 inv wires Aa uint8 073B 1851 EventLog Event23Type Event 23 type uint8 073A 1850 EventLog Event24ID Event 24 Identification Events uint8 073D 1853 EventLog Event24Type Event 24 type int ven pes ERE uint8 073C 1852 EventLog Event25ID Event 25 Identification 2 sysaimNiact 34 indAlmN3Ackd juint8 073F 1855 EvertLog Event26I0 S Event 26 Kdentficatod oskama rma tein lug 0741 1857 5 Sys Alm N2 Act 37 Ind Alm N4 Ackd EventLog Event26Type Event 26type O PARNE o ogee Am aad uint8 0740 1856 Eve
200. a can Mm my PLM E AlmLat E Pr Over PS gt L Jaer to ause the Pr Ps alarm to become gt AlmLat ED 2 PENE iss ED al E Solid yellow Alarm latched ND AA y Allows the user to acknowledge the Pr Ps PLM ED AlmAck EP Pr Over PS alarm gt AlmAck KK ep gt Pr Over a dl tal E Solid yellow Alarm acknowledged A DO y PLM ED AlmStop E Pr Over PS Indicates that the Pr Ps alarm is set up to ee lo nen disable firing when in alarm T AlmStop A a EA Pr Over ED O E Solid yellow Firing disabled D gt e Figure 6 21 4 Load Management Alarm menus AlmDis Allows the user to disable the Pr Ps alarm AlmDet Indicates to the user that Actual power is greater than the requested maximum Caused by an incorrect calibration of one or more channels or possibly as a result of load shedding AlmSig Indicates whether or not Pr Ps alarm has been detected If action is to be taken as a result of this alarm s going active then it is AlmSig that should be wired AlmLat Allows the user to set Pr Ps alarm to be a latching type AlmAck Allows the user to acknowledge the Pr Ps alarm AlmStop Allows the Pr Ps alarm to be configured to disable firing whilst active HA179769 Page 98 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 22 PLMCHAN LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION INTERFACE MENU This menu appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted and enabled PLMChan provides an interface to the channel parameters needed for Load Management See
201. a sees ee Section 6 18 GOMMS sa eges bana Section 6 6 Modulator Section 6 19 Control os ee eee Section 6 7 Network a Section 6 20 AS Section 6 8 Predictive Load Management Section 6 21 Digital l O Section 6 9 PLM Channels Section 6 22 ESO asii qt Section 6 10 Load tap changer Section 6 23 Event Log Section 6 11 Relay suman chee eee cs Section 6 24 Fault Detection Section 6 12 Setpoint provider Section 6 25 Firing O P Section 6 13 TIME Bia iio Section 6 26 Instrument maawa e ces Section 6 14 TotallSE rise Section 6 27 IP Monitor Section 6 15 User value Section 6 28 Use the up down arrows to select the required configuration area then use the enter key to access Section 6 3 CONF Section 6 12 Section 6 21 gt Faultdet Section 6 4 Section 6 13 Section 6 22 Section 6 5 Section 6 14 Section 6 23 Section 6 6 Section 6 15 CONF Section 6 24 gt Relay CONF 3 i Section 6 16 S 6 25 ag HA Gi Section 6 8 Section 6 17 CON F Section 6 26 gt Timer Section 6 9 Section 6 18 CONF Section 6 27 gt Totaliser CONF i CONF Section 6 10 Section 6 19 Section 6 28 ed 3 Modultr ai gt UsrVal ee CONF tion 6 11 CONF Section 6 20 a iii Network cds lt b Figure 6 2 Top level menu Page 46 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE
202. ack Pre Temperature uint8 02D5 725 Network 3 AlmAck ThyrSC System alarm ack Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02C9 713 Network 3 AlmAck TLF Process alarm ack Total Load Failure uint8 02D0 720 Network 3 AlmDet ChopOff Process alarm detection status Chop Off uint8 02A4 676 Network 3 AlmDet FreqFault System alarm detection status Frequency Fault uint8 02A1 673 Network 3 AlmDet FuseBlown System alarm detection status Fuse Blown uint8 029E 670 Network 3 AlmDet MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02A7 679 Network 3 AlmDet MissMains System alarm detection status Missing Mains uint8 029B 667 Network 3 AlmDet NetworkDips System alarm detection status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02A0 672 Network 3 AlmDet OpenThyr System alarm detection status Open Thyristor uint8 029D 669 Network 3 AlmDet OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status Over Current uint8 02A9 681 Network 3 AlmDet OverTemp System alarm detection status Over Temperature uint8 029F 671 Network 3 AlmDet PB24VFail System alarm detection status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02A2 674 Network 3 AlmDet PLF Process alarm detection status Partial Load Failure uint8 02A5 677 Network 3 AlmDet PLU Process alarm detection status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02A6 678 Network 3 AlmDet PreTemp Process alarm detection Status Pre Temperature uint8 02A8 680 Network 3 AlmDet ThyrSC System alarm detection status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 029C 668 Network 3 AlmDet TLF Proces
203. ade NG KANI ogee argent 222 Remote panel aaa 214 Setpoint SEleCt So crate ai LK LG nl aaa Kain 222 Thyristor power units aaa 19 SetProv Switch PA rics aka autos aa nA date Pele hehe dt ad 85 MENU LX 106 Symbols Peak E Waa KGYA PUN PAD A ante E ADAN 212 Modbus parameter addresses 171 172 System alarms rio sosa Meie pa AAE eee 200 Remote panel configuration 232 T Setup Tdi di da 119 121 Comms NetStatus ooocccccoccococcccc aa 55 Tapias cu AA AA 101 NetWork cota dde 89 lA A A ER 68 Sharing sad rra a re daa A 95 Target setpoint scaling a 107 Algorithm ip 183 Task Breaka duaro ie tive hes ound AG 121 Efficiency nanan Geos ANG a Hees ee 182 Technical specification 00 a 203 Shedding Ability Factor 0 0 cee eee ee 185 Temperature limits erise 02208 204 Shed actor ince Menke hee eee be NA hee 99 185 194 Temperature pre Alarm 0 0 eee cece eee 201 Show A heed nae wea Aedes 138 MAGING Nka li RAANG ADAN 55 TRICK WIRES cta e e Pacis GHG Dhak HES 122 Index HA179769 Page viii Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE Three delta wiring 0 eee 27 28 USPS a ea dll ade 137 Three starWIriNg niere esa be gael rs edie ated 26 29 Creations NN 137 Three phase feedback 000s cece eee eee 237 User Value Threshold ens dete DAGA Pare ori ee 79 Mens panang dd BKET ARA diia 111 PIM SCI NAP ALA AA KIRA 231 Modbus parameter addresses
204. afety notes 0 6 eee eee eee 1 211 Optional aaa aaa aaa 207 Gatety Ramp is tidad wata kg saw Aa a Lang 75 Standard Laan anan nanana 205 Save GEA 124 Power requirements LL anan 203 Save the current watch recipe list 136 Relay anna 207 CB sity 2 hw nG AA nG NAN nag 230 SPSelect toi ok BS aa a PANA TR ha 107 AA AP ba te eh 116 A edra aaa A ALAN AN a NE 107 Sesnalldevica addresses a NN ABG Man 116 SPUITE seh Scares a ND LG le Ka Dan 107 Scroll key suna cias EENEN ANAKAN NANA REES 219 SPX Beacon eevee nanan 219 Serollikeysi erhan Soe Jee LAG O 31 SO A 84 E ENEE REA 101 Standby aanak 43 57 Select STATUS cil ae an AN le nab 81 96 RAP O PANU terns A reg 124 Control Diag aaa nna nanan 60 ENE Ta ka pha naban aah katao aaa 76 Matti inet abbas UK ANON TAG uote 84 Dro ao etica 84 Strategy Standby mode cee eee 43 KG a LG hee IAE AL AA AGA 139 SMC a PANG aA acento ack teh ce E 54 Selecting components LAG AG UN Wey end BAN NB 118 SUB nd a e o 84 Ma ost ree ns ngaa Dn g4 Subnet 1 Mask o nona anan nsaan nan 54 SelMim y add pa aa 84 Summary pages Eka A 2 EE 42 Sensor Break detection aaa 230 KO 41 S ria NU a atados 76 Supply frequency fault 2 0 2 6 eee eee eee eee 13 Serial Number a Eo AEEA EATA eee 76 Supply power wiring Cer ithaca iy ec NOB OS Kna Pam ee RP na na 217 Driver Usar aanak ae kaa kaha 10 EAE A ang Jia 218 Fuseing ri ta a tna milckas 10 Setpoint editing ais dated agen G
205. afetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp O Ramping 1 Finished uint8 04E7 1255 FiringOP 3 SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04E2 1250 FiringOP 3 SoftStop Soft stop duration O Off 1 On float32 04E3 1251 FiringOP 4 DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04F9 1273 FiringOP 4 Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04FD 1277 FiringOP 4 In Input of the firing output block float32 04FA 1274 FiringOP 4 LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04F3 1267 0 3S 1 3D 2 4S 3 6D FiringOP 4 LoadType Load type configuration 0 Resistive 1 XFMR uint8 04F4 1268 FiringOP 4 Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04F5 1269 0 IHC 1 Burst 2 PA 3 None FiringOP 4 PaLimitln Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04FB 1275 FiringOP 4 SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04F6 1270 FiringOP 4 SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp O Ramping 1 Finished uint8 04FC 1276 FiringOP 4 SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04F7 1271 FiringOP 4 SoftStop Soft stop duration O Off 1 On float32 04F8 1272 Instrument Configuration OModules Number of Option IO Modules fitted uint8 08A1 2209 Instrument Configuration PwrModType Type of module 0 None 1 External 2 Internal uint8 08B4 2228 3 MC Air cooled 4 MC Water cooled Instrument Configuration LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 089A 2202 0 3S 1 3D 2 4S 3 6D Instrument Configurati
206. al The User Value float32 07A6 1958 UsrVal 2 HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07B4 1972 UsrVal 2 LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07B5 1973 UsrVal 2 Resolution User Value Display Resolution as User Val 1 uint8 07B3 1971 UsrVal 2 Status User Value Status as User Val 1 bool 07B7 1975 UsrVal 2 Units Units of the value as User Val 1 uint8 07B2 1970 UsrVal 2 Val The User Value float32 07B6 1974 UsrVal 3 HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07C4 1988 UsrVal 3 LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07C5 1989 UsrVal 3 Resolution User Value Display Resolution as UserVal 1 uint8 07C3 1987 UsrVal 3 Status User Value Status as UserVal 1 bool 07C7 1991 UsrVal 3 Units Units of the value as UserVal 1 uint8 07C2 1986 UsrVal 3 Val The User Value float32 07C6 1990 UsrVal 4 HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 07D4 2004 UsrVal 4 LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 07D5 2005 UsrVal 4 Resolution User Value Display Resolution as UserVal 1 uint8 07D3 2003 UsrVal 4 Status User Value Status as UserVal 1 bool 07D7 2007 UsrVal 4 Units Units of the value as UserVal 1 uint8 07D2 2002 UsrVal 4 Val The User Value float32 07D6 2006 HA179769 Page 174 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT OPTION 9 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Predictive Load Management PLM system is an assembly of a number of units stations working together in order to minimize transient power demands which could appear on
207. ally caused by external constraints on the load OUT FAULT A short circuit has been detected in the output circuit Firing is inhibited HA179769 Page 231 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A6 2 RECIPES Note Level two access section A5 3 is required in order for the user to be able to save and or restore recipes as described below It is possible to store operating values by tacking a snapshot of the current settings and storing these snapshots in one of up to five recipes An example would be to store several sets of alarm setpoint values one of which can then be recalled for a particular process To store values in a recipe 1 Inthe level two list of parameters figure A5 3 1 press the scroll key repeatedly or hold continuously until STORE appears 2 Select a recipe number using the up down arrow keys After a few seconds the word donE appears to indicate that the current parameter values have been saved to the selected recipe number Previous values are over written without confirmation To retrieve a recipe 1 In the level two list of parameters figure A5 3 1 press the scroll key repeatedly or hold continuously until RECNO appears along with a number between 1 and 5 inclusive indicating which recipe was last selected 2 Select the required recipe number using the up down arrow keys After a few seconds the recipe number will blink to indicate that the load is complete If the selected recipe is
208. also section 6 21 and section 9 Use up down arrows to select PLMChan number then Enter Use return ED one or more times from within menu to return to this page Total Power installed on the channel Assigns this channelto a Load Manage ment group if a distributed incremental control option is enabled section 6 19 The threshold at which the reducing factor is applied to the modulator for load shedding Load Management channel inter face input PLMChan N gt PLMO ut Load Management channel interface output L Back to PZMax Figure 6 22 Predictive Load Management option interface menu PZMax Total power installed on the channel Calculated using the rating of the unit Group The group max 8 in which the channel operates This item appears only if one of the distributed incremental load management options has been selected section 6 21 ShedFactor The threshold at which the reducing factor is applied to the modulator for load shedding This item appears only if Load sharing is enabled section 6 21 LMIn The Load Management channel interface input Must be wired to one of the LMOut connections on the LoadMng function block in order to connect this channel to the network LMOut The Load Management channel interface output Typically wired to the LMin parameter on the modulator block HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 99 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 23 LOAD TAP CHANGE
209. an UA ok a 229 A6 OTHER FEATURES 27530300303 ob heey io 230 A6 ALARMS AND ERRORS ceuta AMA waa thie vied wana 230 A6 2 RECIPES ev naaamoy Wala tt 232 A6 3 EPOWER SETPROV CONFIGURATIONS 0 eee eee 232 MULTIPLE SINGLE PHASE CONFIGURATION 2 222000 233 A6 4 PV RETRANSMISSION 2222 e 233 A6 5 DIGITAL ALARM PTIONS 2nd 0G Ga baha AGANG NG dins ee 234 A6 6 HOME PAGETTIMEQUT 21 sina daga eee GALA LAP ARLAN NAL Nah eet 234 APPENDIX B THREE PHASE FEEDBACK 2222000000 0 237 B1 TRANSFORMER REPRESENTATION AND LABELLING 22222000 237 B2 EXTERNAL FEEDBACK PHASING 2222200 00000 eee eee eee 237 B2 1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER CONNECTION 222205000 00 ee eee eee 238 B2 2 FEEDBACK EXAMPLES FOR TYPICAL THREE PHASE NETWORKS 239 B2 2 1 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load 239 B2 2 2 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load 239 B2 2 3 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load 240 B2 2 4 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3D load 240 B2 2 5 Three phase control with Star Star transformer and 4S load 241 B2 2 6 Three phase control with Delta Delta transformer and 3S load 241 B2 2 7 Three phase control with 6D primary and 4S secondary with 4S load 242 B2 2 8 Three phase control with 6D primary secondary with three independent loads Contents Page viii HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12
210. an be started or shut down and re started and the Scan toolbar icon used to find the instrument The scan can be stopped at any time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time See section 7 2 for more details of the scan procedure Subnet Masks and IP addresses Subnet Masks are most readily understood when looked at in binary format For example a mask of 255 255 240 10 can be re written as 11111111 11111111 11110000 00001010 In such a case IP addresses VIDAD ATINA CA E xxxx xxxx1x1x would be recognised where x can be either a O or a 1 subnet mask AS 171 171 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 nao 8 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 1 x 1 Mu O 255 240 to 255 19 17 1 18 26 27 30 31 42 43 46 47 etc HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 115 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 2 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTS Clicking on the Scan toolbar icon causes a dialogue box shown below to appear This allows the user to define a search range of addresses Notes 1 The relevant instrument address is that entered in the Comms User menu Address item and it can take any value between 1 and 254 inclusive as long as it is unique to the comms link 2 The default selection Scan all device addresses will detect any instrument on the serial link which h
211. ap 1 in percent If Type Primary St NEN 100 where N72 is the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 2 and N is the total number of turns For the primary T1 is the highest tap If Type Secondary St pct x 100 where Ny is the number of turns in Tap 1 lowest tap and N e is the total number of turns S2 Turns ratio of transformer tap 2 in percent If Type Primary St ux 100 where N7473 is the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 3 and N is the total number of turns For the primary T1 is the highest tap If Type Secondary s1 2 x100 where Ny is the x Not number of turns in Tap 2 and Nze is the total number of turns lf the number of taps is 2 S2 100 S3 Turns ratio of transformer tap 3 in percent If Type Primary St zx 100 where Ny474 is the number of turns between Tap1 and Tap 4 and Nra is the total number of turns For the primary T1 is the highest tap If Type Secondary St pee x 100 where N is the number of turns in Tap 3 and N is the total number of turns If the number of taps is 3 S3 100 S4 Turns ratio of transformer tap 4 in percent Value always 10096 Type Select Load tap Changer type as Primary or Secondary TapNb The number of transformer taps from two to four OpN The value of outputs 1 to N of the block where N is the number of transformer taps as selected in TapNb above This output is normally wired to the input of a Firing output block for phase angle firing or to a
212. ary provides a convenient Earth or Neutral tap for connection near the transformer For closed systems windings corresponding to a particular phase are marked with a prefix number indicating that phase for example 1P and 3S represent phase one primary and phase three secondary respectively For open Delta systems each winding is identified by two labels for example 151 and 152 represent the two ends of phase one secondary whilst 2P1 and 2P2 would represent the phase two primary The voltages and currents in any one phase are tightly coupled and the primary and secondary voltages are more or less in phase with one another Each phase is 120 degrees out of phase with the other two Load 2 Phase 1 15 1P1 252 152 Secondary an 5 o o Pi Phase 2 a 151 om I Neutral or 1P2 m7777 ground tap 2P1 352 Phase 3 Load 3 Figure B1 Figure B1ypical transformer winding labelling B2 EXTERNAL FEEDBACK PHASING External feedback consists of both current measurement using a current transformer and voltage measurements across the load tap locations depend on the network layout The signals from these feedback elements are terminated at a connector located on the underside of the power units as shown in figure B2 E Load cable exit Vo a eedback connector V1 amp V2 Underneath vi ew WOYO HF Current feedback con
213. as a valid address As the search progresses any instruments detected by the scan appear as thumbnails faceplates in the Panel Views area normally located at the bottom of the iTools screen options Panel Views position allows this area to be moved to the top of the window or the Close icon can be used to close it Once closed it can be re opened by clicking on Panel Views in the View menu Enable Background Scan Scan all device addresses 255 first then 1 to 254 O Scan from device address 1 to permitted range 1 to 254 O Connect via Series 2000 Interface Adapter not CPI O Connect via CPI clip or IR cable Scan for Eurotherm devices only Figure 7 2a Scan range enable iTools File Device View Options Window Help 2 2 H sm X 2 New File Open File Load Save Print Add Remove Access Views Help E Graphical Wiring FER Parameter Explorer E Fieldbus 1 0 Gateway ES Device Panel ki watchiRecipe EM User Pages OPC Scope Y epower 123 456 789 100 502 IC a 0 a Instrument fH Access E Comms E Control E Counter om Ga 7 too E Level 2 Engineer EPower v E2 32 Figure 7 2b iTools initial window with one instrument detected HA179769 Page 116 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 GRAPHICAL WIRING EDITOR Clicking on the Graphical wiring Editor toolbar icon causes the
214. ases A task break ensures that for any wiring between tasks the timing is delayed as necessary to avoid phasing Undelete Bring To Front Re Route wire Use Tags Find Start Find End Cut Copy Paste problems Task breaks appear in blue 4H Replaces the current wire route with a new route generated from scratch Toggles between wire and tag mode between parameters Tag mode is useful for sources and destinations which are widely separated Goes to the source of the wire Goes to the destination of the wire Not used in this context Push To Back Figure 7 3 2d Wire Context Menu HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 121 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont WIRE CONTEXT MENU Cont Delete Marks the wire for deletion The wire is redrawn as a dashed line or dashed tags until next download Operation can be reversed until after next download Undelete Reverses the effect of the Delete operation up until the next download after which Undelete is disabled Bring to Front Brings the wire to the front of the diagram Push to Back Sends the wire to the back of the diagram Wire Colours Black Normal functioning wire Red The wire is connected to a non changeable parameter Values are rejected by the destination block Magenta A normal functioning wire is being hovered over by the mouse cursor Purple A red wire is being hovered over by the mouse cursor Green New Wire
215. at 500 x 20 100 100V RMS If Transfer or Limit is enabled these will override SP Transfer PV This is the PV measurement for transfer For example if a V to transfer is required the Vsq should be wired to MainPV and Isq to TransferPV Appears only if Trans Enable section 6 7 1 is set to Yes via Tools The span of operation for transfer Appears only if Trans Enable section 6 7 1 is set to Yes via iTools Allows the user to define an integral time for the main PI control loop Page 58 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 3 Control Limit parameters Parameters relating to the limit control loop CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use Eb return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Control Use up down arrows to select Limit then Enter 2 Limit Process Variable value which perform first threshold limit rol Process Variable value which perform second threshold control The Process Variable value which is to perform third threshold limit control The setpoint for PV1 Eb a The setpoint for PV2 v ED SP3 21 The setpoint for PV3 v lt D TI Use the up down arrows to define the inte ED 41 gral time for the limit control loop gt Back to PV1 Figure 6 7 3 Control Limit menu PV1 to PV3 Threshold value for limit loops 1 to 3
216. atch Chop Off uint8 0178 376 O NoLatch 1 Latch Network 1 AlmLat FreqFault System alarm latch Frequency Fault as for ChopOff uint8 0175 373 Network 1 AlmLat FuseBlown System alarm latch Fuse Blown as for ChopOff uint8 0172 370 Network 1 AlmLat MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch Mains Voltage Fault uint8 017B 379 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat MissMains System alarm latch Missing Mains as for ChopOff uint8 016F 367 Network 1 AlmLat NetworkDips System alarm latch Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0174 372 Network 1 AlmLat OpenThyr System alarm latch Open Thyristor as for ChopOff uint8 0171 369 Network 1 AlmLat OverCurrent Indication alarm latch Over Current uint8 017D 381 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat OverTemp System alarm latch Over Temperature uint8 0173 371 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat PB24VFail System alarm latch Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0176 374 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat PLF Process alarm latch Partial Load Failure uint8 0179 377 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat PLU Process alarm latch Partial Load Unbalance uint8 017A 378 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat PreTemp Process alarm latch Pre Temperature uint8 017 380 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat ThyrSC System alarm latch Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0170 368 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmLat TLF Process alarm latch Total Load Failure uint8 0177 375 as for ChopOff Network 1 AlmSig ChopOff Process alarm signalling status Chop Off uint8 0169 361
217. ation uint8 0753 1875 EventLog Event35Type Event 35 type uint8 0752 1874 EventLog Event36ID Event 36 Identification uint8 0755 1877 EventLog Event36Type Event 36 type uint8 0754 1876 EventLog Event37ID Event 37 Identification uint8 0757 1879 EventLog Event37Type Event 37 type uint8 0756 1878 EventLog Event38ID Event 38 Identification uint8 0759 1881 EventLog Event38Type Event 38 type uint8 0758 1880 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec EventLog Event39ID Event 39 Identification uint8 075B 1883 EventLog Event39Type Event 39 type uint8 075A 1882 EventLog Event40ID Event 40 Identification uint8 075D 1885 EventLog Event40Type Event 40 type uint8 075C 1884 EventLog Status Status word to indicate instrument errors via comms uint8 075F 1887 Faultdet AlarmStatus1 Alarm Status Word 1 uintl 06A8 1704 Faultdet AlarmStatus2 Alarm Status Word 2 uintl6 06A9 1705 Faultdet AnyFuseAl Any Fuse Blown alarm uint8 06A3 1699 Faultdet AnyNetwAl Any Network Process Alarm uint8 06A2 1698 Faultdet GeneralAck Global Acknowledge uint8 069F 1695 Faultdet GlobalDis Global Disable all alarms uint8 06A4 1700 Faultdet StratStatus Strategy Status Word uintl 06A6 1702 Bit O Network 1 not firing Bit 1 Network 1 not synchronised Bit 2 Network 2 not firing Bit 3 Network 2 not synchronised Bit 4 Network 3 not fi
218. available if the Energy Counter feature is enabled in the connected EPower instrument HIGH Peak High Shows the highest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on or since reset Level 2 LOW Peak Low Shows the lowest reading that the indicator has recorded since switch on or since reset Level 2 A1 Type Alarm 1 type and setpoint Indicates the threshold value for alarm 1 Type Hi Lo or ROC according to configuration Set 2 This parameter does not appear if it is Unconfigured in Set 2 An Type n 2 3 or 4 Further alarm types and threshold values as configured in level 3 configuration A5 2 2 EPower Network summary parameters IRMS The RMS value of load current Amps for this network VRMS The RMS value of load voltage Volts for this network POWER Either P or PBurst according to network type Watts or kilowatts ENRGY Energy Shows the energy for this network This is only available ifthe Energy Counter feature is enabled in the connected EPower instrument WSP Working setpoint WSP is the working setpoint currently being used by the EPower unit and is either the Local setpoint or the remote setpoint from an analogue input or via a communications link SP Target setpoint or Engineering units for the network in use It may be edited via the remote panel either directly setting the Control Setpoint if EPower s SetProv function block is not enabled or setting the local setpoi
219. be operated simultaneously to acknowledge each alarm in turn before any further operations can take place 5 1 SUMMARY PAGES Each summary page displays the voltage current and power status described below calculated over the mains period when in Phase Angle mode or over the Modulation Period when in Burst Mode The user may also edit the local setpoint from the summary pages Where more than one single phase unit is being driven the parameter names have a numeric suffix e g V2 to indicate which phase is being displayed The enter key can be used to scroll through the available phases The Return key can be operated briefly to access the top level operator menu which contains all summary pages and Alarm and Event Log entries Operation of the Return key for an extended interval calls the Access page see section 6 3 Notes 1 A suffix n below represents the number of the network currently being displayed 2 LSP is replaced in the display by RSP for remote working 5 1 1 Single phase summary page Vn The RMS load voltage measurement for network n In The RMS load current measurement for network n Pn The true power delivered to network n LSPn The local setpoint value for network n see also Note 2 above 5 1 2 Two or three phase summary page Vavg The average RMS load voltage over all three loads lavg The average RMS load current over all three loads P The true power delivered to the load n
220. beacon flashes any output associated with the alarm becomes active and the message area of the display shows a scrolling text message describing the alarm state If the display is configured to go red on alarm Set 2 the PV colour changes to flashing red A6 1 2 Alarm acknowledgement Alarms are acknowledged by operating the Page key and the Scroll key simultaneously Further to this a global acknowledge of EPower alarms occurs when 1 The indicator home page is selected or 2 When the EPower Home page is displayed and the Home page is hidden The results of alarm acknowledgement are as follows 1 For EPower alarms the alarm indication at the EPower operator interface is acknowledged removed The alarm indication remains at the 32h8e until the alarm is no longer active 2 For Temperature Process auto latching alarms the alarm beacon and Process value stop flashing Any output assigned to the alarm continues to operate until the alarm trigger is no longer active If configured to change colour Set 2 the process value returns to green only when the alarm trigger is no longer active 3 For Temperature Process manual latching alarms acknowledgement has no effect and the alarm indication continues until the alarm trigger is no longer active 4 When EPower and auto latching process alarms are both present acknowledgement causes the beacon and Process Value PV display to stop flashing Should the Process Value alarm subse
221. block so that the blocks use the most recent data Each block displays its place in its sequence in a coloured block in the bottom left hand corner figure 7 3 2a The colour of the block represents the Task within which the block is running red task one green task two black task 3 and blue task 4 HA179769 Page 118 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont FUNCTION BLOCKS Function Block context menu A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function blocks to make a control strategy Each function block has inputs and outputs Any parameter may be wired from but only parameters that are alterable in Operator Mode may we wired to A function block includes any parameters that are needed to configure or operate the algorithm The inputs and outputs which are considered to be of most use are always shown In most cases all of these need to be wired before the block can perform a useful task If a function block is not faded in the tree left hand pane it can be dragged onto the diagram The block can be dragged around the diagram using the mouse A Maths block is shown below as an example When block type information is alterable as in this case click on the box with the down arrow in it to display a dialogue box allowing the value to be edited If it is required to wire from a parameter which is not shown as a recommended output click on the
222. c Mode PA 2 FiringOP 2 In Input of the firing oul 0 00 FiringOP 2 LoadCoupling Load coupling config 45 2 Copy Data Set Ctrl C B Paste Data Set Ctrl Figure 7 7 Watch Recipe Editor window with context menu 7 71 Creating a Watch List After opening the window parameters can be added to it as described below The values of the parameters update in real time allowing the user to monitor a number of values simultaneously ADDING PARAMETERS TO THE WATCH LIST 1 Parameters can be click dragged into the watch list from another area of the iTools window for example the parameter explorer window the graphical wiring editor the browse tree The parameter is placed either in an empty row at the bottom of the list or if it is dragged on top of an already existing parameter it is inserted above this parameter with the remaining parameters being moved down one place 2 Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another In such a case a copy of the parameter is produced the source parameter remaining in its original position 3 Parameters can be copied lt ctrl gt lt C gt and pasted lt ctrl gt lt V gt either within the list or from a source external to it for example the parameter browse window or the graphical wiring editor 4 The Insert item tool button J the Insert Parameter item in the Recipe or context menu or the short cut lt Insert gt can be used to open a browse window
223. cations in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document HA179769 9 CN28866 Invensys Eurotherm
224. cess ConfigurationPasscode Configuration Code Default 3 int16 07E5 2021 Access EngineerPasscode Engineer Code Default 2 int16 07E4 2020 Access Goto Goto uint8 07E2 2018 Access IM Instrument Mode uint8 00C7 199 Oz Operating 1 Standby 2 Configuration Access Keylock Lock Instrument 0 none 1 All 2 Edit uint8 07E9 2025 Access Passcode Passcode Request int16 07E3 2019 Access QuickStartPasscode Quick Start Code Default 4 int16 07E6 2022 Comms RmtPanel Address Address 1 to 254 uint8 0796 1942 Comms RmtPanel Baud Baud Rate 0 9600 1 19 200 uint8 0797 1943 Comms User Address Comms Address Range depends on protocol uint8 076C 1900 Comms User Baud Baud Rate uint8 076D 1901 0 9600 1 19 200 2 4800 3 2400 4 1200 10 125kb 250kb 500kb 13 1Mb Comms User DCHP_enable DHCP Type 0 fixed 1 dynamic bool 0780 1920 Comms User Default Gateway 1 1st byte of Default Gateway uint8 0778 1912 Comms User Default Gateway 2 2nd byte of Default Gateway uint8 0779 1913 Comms User Default Gateway 3 3rd byte of Default Gateway uint8 077A 1914 Comms User Default Gateway 4 4th byte of Default Gateway uint8 077B 1915 Comms User Delay TX Delay time 0 off 1 on uint8 076F 1903 Comms User Extension_Cycles Number of CC Link Extension Cycles uint8 0799 1945 Comms User ld Comms Identity uint8 076A 1898 0 none 1 ElA485 5 Ethernet 10 Network Comms User IP address 1 1st byte of IP address uint8 0770 1904 Comms
225. cess alarm signalling status Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064C 1612 IO AnalogOP 3 AlmStop OutputFault Process alarm stop request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 064F 1615 IO AnalogOP 3 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 0649 1609 IO AnalogOP 3 Main PV Process variable float32 0648 1608 IO AnalogOP 3 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 0646 1606 IO AnalogOP 3 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 0647 1607 10 AnalogOP 3 Main Type Specify the output type as OP 1 uint8 0645 1605 IO AnalogOP 4 AImAck OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0663 1635 IO AnalogOP 4 AImDet OutputFault Process alarm detection status Output Fault as OP 1 luint8 0660 1632 IO AnalogOP 4 AImDis OutputFault Process alarm Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 065F 1631 10 AnalogOP 4 AlmLat OutputFault Process alarm latch request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0662 1634 IO AnalogOP 4 AImSig OutputFault Process alarm signalling status Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0661 1633 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 153 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 154 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec 1O AnalogOP 4 AlmStop OutputFault Process alarm stop request Output Fault as OP 1 uint8 0664 1636 IO AnalogOP 4 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 065E 1630 IO AnalogOP 4 Main PV Process var
226. chronous and may be triggered at any time 2 During the Election mechanism Duplicate Address detection is performed If an address is recognised as duplicate the Status of the Station changes to DupplAddr HA179769 Page 198 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 7 ALARM INDICATION PROVERPS Indication Alarm Pr over Ps This tells the user that the real Power Pr is greater than the requested shed power Ps This is the case where a shed factor has been applied to one or more channels Alternatively the alarm may be caused by the false calibration of one or more channels This parameter appears only at the Master Station 9 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 8 1 Wrong Station status DUPLICATE LM ADDRESS One or more Stations have the same PLM address These Stations are excluded from the PLM process Note Zero is not a valid PLM address When the PLM address is set to zero the Station is excluded from the PLM process STATION STATUS PERMANENTLY PENDING PLM Address is set to 0 Hardware wiring error Ensure that all High pins are correctly daisy chained and that all Low pins are correctly daisy chained If there is a break it is likely that two or more masters will be elected and be working in opposition with one another PLM option board not fitted correctly STATION TYPE MISMATCH There is nothing to prevent single phase and three phase units being mixed This should be avoided by grouping the single phase units on o
227. ck SPUnits HiRange EngWorkingSP 6 25 1 Setpoint provider parameters Allows the user to select between Remote or Local as the setpoint source If Local is selected the LOC LED illuminates Allows the user to select which oftwo Remote setpoints to use when SPSelect above is set to Remote Allows entry of a setpoint value to be used when SPSelect above is set to Local The alternative Remote setpoints which may be chosen in Remote Select above Allows the target setpoint to be scaled such that scaled target SP target SP x limit 100 Thus when limit 100 the setpoint is unscaled The active value being provided as a setpoint output This might be the current target setpoint or the rate limited target setpoint This applies a rate limit to the working setpoint until the target setpoint has been achieved The RateDone parameter below is set to No for the duration of the rate limiting then set to yes when rate limiting is complete This is an external control used to enable disable ramp rate limiting and to write the target setpoint directly to the working setpoint The RateDone parameter below is set to Yes when DisRamp is Yes Set to No if ramp rate limiting above is in operation Otherwise set to Yes If enabled Yes the local setpoint tracks the remote setpoints so that if the setpoint is subsequently set to Local the local setpoint w
228. ck Write requests both access the same memory location 0C06 which points to the relevant input definition table or output definition table according to whether the instruction is a read or a write If a value is written to a parameter at a particular location in the output definition table and the value of the parameter in the same location in the input definition table is then read the read value is normally different from the write value because the parameter at a location in the input table is not usually the same as the parameter at that location in the output table unless the same parameter is placed at the same location in both tables Once the changes have been made to the Input and Output definition lists they must be downloaded to the controller unit This is done for both tables simultaneously by clicking on the Update device W Flash Memory button on the top left of the Fieldbus Gateway Editor window The controller performs a restart after this operation Input Definition table Output Definition table Parameter E address Parameter A address BLK READ Parameter B address Parameter F address Parameter C address Parameter C address Parameter D address Parameter G address Further addresses Further addresses BLK WRITE 0C06 Parameter E address Parameter F address Parameter A address Parameter B address Parameter C address Parameter C address
229. controlled and this in turn defines how the network s electrical measurements are presented The configuration is related to a power channel not necessarily the Power Module number For a network of four single phase units four network blocks are required for two leg control of a three phase network two network blocks are used for three phase control of a single network one Network block is required CONF gt Network etwork 4 N Use up down arrows to select network number then Enter Y Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page ED Network N Figure 6 20 1 gt Figure 6 20 2 Figure 6 20 3 Figure 6 20 Network menu HA179769 Page 86 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 1 Meas submenu Use up down arrows to select network number then Enter 2nd and 3rd phase menu items appear only if network type is two or three phase respectively section 6 20 2 Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page ED Displays Mains frequency of the rele vant power channel Displays Line voltage measurement of primary unit see text Displays 2nd phase Line voltage Displays 3rd phase Line voltage Displays Load RMS curent in primary unit Displays 2nd phase Load curent RMS Displays 3rd phase Load curent RMS Displays the average of the RMS current for three phase and two eg systems
230. controller to the Profibus master Outputs are values received from the master and used by the controller e g set points written from the master Note Values from Profibus over write changes made at the operator interface The procedure for selecting variables is the same for both input and output definition tabs Inputs 1 Double click the next available position in the input or output 7 am data table and select the variable to assign to it A pop up figure j ean 7 5b provides a browser from which a list of parameters can be qE Main opened pe Ng GR 2 Double click the parameter to assign it to the input definition lt RangeLow 4 MeasVal T Py C Delete Wire Figure 7 56 Browser window Note Gaps my be left in the table if so desired HA179769 Page 130 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY Cont When all the required parameters have been added to the lists notes of how many wired entries are included in the input and output areas should be made as this information is needed when setting up the Profibus Master Notes 1 A maximum of 32 input and 16 output parameters may be set using the Gateway Editor 2 No checks are made that output variables are writeable and if a read only variable is included in the output list any values sent to it will be ignored with no error indication 3 For Modbus only As shown in figure 7 5b Block Read and Blo
231. controls power by varying the amount of each cycle which is applied to the load by switching the controlling thyristor on part way through the cycle Figure 4 2 1d shows an example for 50 power 50 shown Power is proportional to area under curve Figure 4 2 1d Phase angle mode HALF CYCLE MODE Burst mode firing with a single firing or non firing cycle is known as Single cycle mode In order to reduce power fluctuations during firing time Intelligent half cycle mode uses half cycles as firing non firing periods Positive and negative going cycles are evened out to ensure that no dc component arises The following examples describe half cycle mode for 50 33 and 66 duty cycles 50 DUTY CYCLE The firing and non firing time corresponds to a single supply cycle figure 4 2 1e y Ton Toff For 50 duty cycle Tn Toff 2 half cycles Figure 4 2 1e Half cycle mode 50 duty cycle HA179769 Page 38 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 2 1 FIRING MODES Cont 33 DUTY CYCLE For duty cycles less than 50 the firing time is one half cycle For a 33 duty cycle firing time is one half cycle the non firing time is two half cycles figure 4 2 1f jTon Toff Ton Toff For 33 duty cycle Ton 1 half cycle Toff 2 half cycles Figure 4 2 1f Half cycle mode 33 duty cycle 66 DUTY CYCLE For duty cycles of greater than 50 the non firing time is one half cycle For 66 duty cycle the
232. cted above the Enter key is used to select GoTo then the up down keys are used to select the required access level s Pass code for editing Once the required level is selected e g Engineer the Enter key is used once more to enter the edit page where the current Pass Code is displayed e g 2 The up down keys can now be used to enter a new value of between 0 and 9999 If O is selected then the relevant menu will no longer be pass code protected After a few seconds the new value blinks once to confirm that it has been written into the configuration KeyLock None No restriction All parameters at the current access level may be viewed and edited All All editing and navigation is prevented All keys are locked so it is not possible to undo this action from the Operator interface Once All is selected the keyboard can be released only via iTools Edit Parameter editing is possible only in Configuration level parameters are Read Only in other levels In the Operator or Engineer level menus the Back key is still active allowing access to the Goto menu so that the access level may be changed if the relevant Pass code is known Note Keylock is available only from the user interface i e it cannot be accessed from Tools or over a communications link HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 49 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 4 ANALOGIP MENU This menu item appears only if one or more analogue inputs
233. d Shedding strategy setting Ps gt Pmax disables Load Shedding Example If the total installed power is 2 5MW but the user wishes to restrict the delivered power to be within a tariff band of 2MW then Ps should be setto 2MW Load shedding will shed power across the network to keep the total demand to less than 2MW This shows the total amount of power that has been delivered through the network The value can be greater than Ps depending on the shedability factors of all channels Shows in percent how efficient the load management strategy is Calculated from Efficiency 96 Pmax Ptmax Ptmin Pmax where Ptmax and Ptmin are the peak maximum and minimum values for total power during the modulation period respectively Displays the address of the elected master on the Load Management network For the master unit this address is the same as the address set up in Station described above For a slave unit the two addresses are different HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 97 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 21 4 Predictive Load Management Alarm menus CONF gt PLM Figure 6 21 1 Figure 6 21 2 Pr Over PS Used to disable the Pr Ps alarm of Solid yellow Alarm disabled N ED Indicates that the Pr Ps alarm is active Ep E Solid yellow Alarm active PL lt C gt gt AlmSig ED Pr Over PS Indicates that the Pr Ps alarm is active gt Almsi Kas Bisayan A
234. d Unbalance As ChopOff uint8 016B 363 Network 1 AlmSig PreTemp Process alarm signalling status Pre Temperature uint8 016D 365 As FreqFault Network 1 AlmSig ThyrsC System alarm signalling status Thyristor Short Circuit As FreqFault uint8 0161 353 Network 1 AlmSig TLF Process alarm signalling status Total Load Failure uint8 0168 360 As FreqFault For all Stop Network 1 AlmStop ChopOff Process alarm stop Chop Off parameters uint8 0196 406 Network 1 AlmStop FreqFault System alarm stop Frequency Fault 0 No stop uint8 0193 403 Network 1 AlmStop FuseBlown System alarm stop Fuse Blown 1 Stop uint8 0190 400 Network 1 AlmStop MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0199 409 Network 1 AlmStop MissMains System alarm stop Missing Mains uint8 018D 397 Network 1 AlmStop NetworkDips System alarm stop Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0192 402 Network 1 AlmStop OpenThyr System alarm stop Open Thyristor uint8 018F 399 Network 1 AlmStop OverCurrent Indication alarm stop Over Current uint8 019B 411 Network 1 AlmStop OverTemp System alarm stop Over Temperature uint8 0191 401 Network 1 AlmStop PB24VFail System alarm stop Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0194 404 Network 1 AlmStop PLF Process alarm stop Partial Load Failure uint8 0197 407 Network 1 AlmStop PLU Process alarm stop Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0198 408 Network 1 AlmStop PreTemp Process alarm stop Pre Temperature uint8 019A 410 Network 1 AlmStop ThyrsC System alarm stop Thyristo
235. dden parameters can be shown in the table using the Parameter availability settings item of the options menu figure 7 4b Such items are displayed with a shaded background The full pathname for the displayed parameter list is shown at the bottom left hand corner of the window Page 128 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 4 1 PARAMETER EXPLORER DETAIL Cont A ES Window Help a Scaling CB Loac Show Device Names v Show Labels on Toolbars Jara Panel views Position Cloning Update Rates Decimal Places Parameter Availability Settings Parameter Availability Settings Hide Parameters and Lists when Not Relevant Note it may be necessary to manually refresh iTools to reflect current settings This can be done by pressing Shift F5 Parameter List Cursor Options C Parameter Value Selections Restricted by Current Limits chew Parameters in ReowicelFind Figure 7 4 1b Show Hide parameters da Back to and Forward to The parameter explorer contains a history buffer of up to 10 lists that have been browsed in the current instance of the window The Back to list name and Forward to list mp y name icons allow easy retracing or repeating of the parameter list view sequence If the mouse cursor is hovered over the tool icon the name of the parameter list which will appear if the icon is clicked on appears Clicking on the arrow head d
236. demanded on channel i depends on the duty cycle as follows Pt E Ni x Aree Pt is available to the user as parameter PBurst in the Block Network Meas if no shedding is applied Note Not to be confused with LoadMng Network The total power demanded on the Network is Pt Y Pt i l This parameter Pt is available to the user in the Block LoadMng Network and represents the Mean Power which would be dissipated in the Load during one Modulation Period if Load Shedding were not applied 9 4 2 Reduction of power demand A further parameter Ps is available to the user in the Block LoadMng Network Ps is used to restrict the power demanded from the network to an absolute maximum value For example the total installed power could be 2 5MW but the user wishes to restrict the delivered power to below a tariff band of 2MW In such a case Ps would be set to 2MW and power would be shed throughout the network in order to keep the total demand below 2MW If Ps gt Pmax load shedding is disabled If Ps2Pt no reduction is applied If Ps lt Pt each duty cycle n is reduced by multiplying it by a reduction factor r given by the equation below The reduction factor is applied to each channel Ps r Pt HA179769 Page 184 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 4 2 REDUCTION OF POWER DEMAND Cont The resulting Power for a given channel i is Pri rx0n x Pt The parameter Pr is available to the
237. ds a further threshold CONF gt PMon EP ES Use up down arrows to select input monitor number then Enter Use return ED key one or more times from within menu to return to this page The parameter being monitored Normally wired to a parameter using iTools The maximum value reached bythe parameter since last reset The minimum value reached bythe parameter since last reset Mon N The trigger value for accumulating Time Threshold Above values The total time since last reset that the parameter value has spent above the threshold value in whole days plus hours and minutes The total time that the parameter value may spend above the threshold value before triggering Alarm out onN Alarm Out Time Above exceeds Alarm days Alarm Time Alarm out goes True on if the Days above Sets Max and Min values to zero Sets Days Above and Time Above values to zero IPMon N Status The status of the parameter input 2 Status Good Good or Bad Jp Back to In Figure 6 15 IP Monitor menu HA179769 Page 78 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 15 IP MONITOR MENU Cont In Max Min Threshold Days above Time Above Alarm Days Alarm Time The parameter to be monitored Normally wired using iTools to a parameter but a numeric entry can be made for testing purposes The maximum value reached by the parameter since last reset The mi
238. e See table below for details Overall Widths inches Upper bracket Lower bracket No of phases 1 2 3 4 2 phase Use AandB Use E and F Door closed 5 89 9 23 12 58 15 93 3 phase Use A B and C Use E F and G Door open 8 31 11 65 15 00 18 35 4 phase Use A B C and D Use E F G and H Figure 2 1 1d Fixing details 250 Amp unit HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 7 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 1 1 DIMENSIONAL DETAILS Cont Recommended fixing bolt size M8 127 5mm 5 02in gt 125mm 4 921 in PA Line entry 25 0 98 gt 125mm 4 921in 62 2 44 gt lt gt 125mm 4 921 in PA e o le Safety earth M10 Recommended tightening torque 15 Nm 11 1 ft lb ue co T N Front So E Door Dimensions in millimetres inches lin g x open t S as RE Naa RE SD Eea SS e E F G H Load entry 10mm 0 39in gt D ES AA A RERE HT a a a A i E F f a iq x 5S View on underside El ge Es SAR CI SI a E AR AR AIR il off MEN EN ASEO sx Dl Slo OR OB OR al Hd SB NIE SB ME SZ7 TIN INSZ HE wes SS me m my mw my
239. e as IP1 above uint8 05FD 1533 IO AnalogIP 5 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 060F 1551 IO AnaloglP 5 Main PV Process variable float32 0610 1552 10 AnalogIP 5 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 060D 1549 IO AnalogIP 5 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 060E 1550 O AnalogIP 5 Main Type Specify the input type as IP1 above uint8 060C 1548 10 AnalogOP 1 AlmAck OutputFault Process alarm acknowledge Output Fault uint8 0624 1572 0 NoAck 1 Ack 10 AnalogOP 1 AlmDet OutputFault Process alarm detection status Output Fault uint8 0621 1569 O Inactive 1 Active O AnalogOP 1 AImDis OutputFault Process alarm Output Fault uint8 0620 1568 O Enable 1 Disable 1O AnalogOP 1 AlmLat OutputFault Process alarm latch request Output Fault uint8 0623 1571 0 NoLatch 1 Latch IO AnalogOP 1 AImSig OutputFault Process alarm signalling status Output Fault uint8 0622 1570 0 Not Latched 1 Latched IO AnalogOP 1 AlmStop OutputFault Process alarm stop request Output Fault uint8 0625 1573 0 No stop 1 Stop 10 AnalogOP 1 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 061F 1567 1O AnalogOP 1 Main PV Process variable float32 061E 1566 1O AnalogOP 1 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 061C 1564 1O AnalogOP 1 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 061D 1565 10 AnalogOP 1 Main Type Specify the output type uint8 06
240. e in figure 7 4a below File Device Explorer View Options Window Help a ao FB a dp X a New File Open File Load Save Print Scan Add Remove Views X E Graphical Wiring EB Parameter Explorer B Fieldbus I O Gateway Device Panel EP watch Recipe E User Pages E Y epower 123 456 789 100 50 e gt Fi Meas Satup AlmDis AlmDet AlmSig AlmLat Alm ck AlmStop lt Name Description NetType The type of network Set in li O Browse Yu Find VlineNominal 7 Line nominal value E na F VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage FiringOP aE Firing gt Maximum Maximum Current of the stacl Stack2504 3 J Modultr sE 4 Nominal Nominal current of the stack 250 00 EU Network sat HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperatue of the F 85 a an WdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold 5 LL Meas FreqDriftThreshp Frequency Drift Threshold 1 00 CJ setup ChopOffThreshe Chop Off Threshold 120 CJ AlmDis 4 ChopDffThreshc Chop Off Threshold2 200 a AlmDet ChopOffNb Chop Off Number 5 CJ Almsig 4 ChopDffwindov Chop Off Window 60 E AlmLat OverVoltThresh Over voltage threshold 5 a Alm ck lndertaltThresl Inder valtane threshald in CJ Almstop i DOO E Level 2 Engineer EPower v E2 32 epower 123 456 789 100 502 ID001 EPower Parameter Explorer Netw Figure 7 4a Parameter table example The figure above shows the default table layout Colum
241. e A3 3 Typical wiring HA179769 Page 216 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A4 FIRST SWITCH ON At first switch on after the start up sequence the initial configuration page is displayed Note the following quickstart description apples only to new not previously configured instruments If the instrument has previously been configured either at the factory or subsequently the instruments starts up showing the relevant process value The initial display shows Set1 on the top line with a coded display below figure A4 with its first item flashing The lower line is decoded as shown in table Ada The mode up down arrows are used to scroll through the available choices for each item Once the required value is displayed the scroll key is used to select the next character for editing Once all five characters have been edited further operations of the scroll key call the range high display allowing the high range value to be edited using the mode keys then the range low display allowing the low range value to be edited A further operation calls the Set2 display which is decoded in table A4b After Set2 parameters have been edited a further operation of the scroll key invites the user to Exit Operating the scroll key returnsto the Set1 display operating a mode key to display yes quits the quickstart menu and causes the unit to enter operating mode CCL ITAA ui UDP
242. e Type of Timer As Timer 1 Type uint8 093 2364 Timer 4 ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time32 0949 2377 Timer 4 In Trigger Gate input 0 Off 1 On bool 094E 2382 Timer 4 Out Output 0 Off 1 On bool 094A 2378 Timer 4 Time Time time32 094B 2379 Timer 4 Triggered Triggered Flag 0 Off 1 On bool 094C 2380 Timer 4 Type Type of Timer As Timer 1 Type uint8 094D 2381 Total 1 AlarmOut Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool 095C 2396 Total 1 AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 095A 2394 Total 1 Hold Hold 0 No 1 Yes bool 0961 2401 Total 1 In Input Value float32 095F 2399 Total 1 Reset Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 0962 2402 Total 1 Resolution Resolution 0 X 1 X X 2 X XX 3 X XXX 4 X XXX uint8 095E 2398 Total 1 Run Run O No 1 Yes bool 0960 2400 Total 1 TotalOut Totalised Output float32 095B 2395 Total 1 Units Units uint8 095D 2397 0 None 1 Temp 2 V 3 mV 4 A 5 mMA 6 pH 7 mmHg Total 2 AlarmOut Alarm Output O Off 1 On bool 0971 2417 Total 2 AlarmSP Alarm Setpoint float32 096F 2415 Total 2 Hold Hold O No 1 Yes bool 0976 2422 Total 2 In Input Value float32 0974 2420 Total 2 Reset Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 0977 2423 Total 2 Resolution Resolution as Total 1 uint8 0973 2419 Total 2 Run Run 0 No 1 Yes bool 0975 2421 Total 2 TotalOut Totalised Output float32 0970 2416 Total 2 Units Units as Total 1 uint8 0972 2418 Total 3 AlarmOut Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0986 2438 Total 3 AlarmSP
243. e edited A D A B C D Time Minimum on timer Input off before Elapsed Delay time expires Trigger l l Input l l l af Time i Output l Elapsed a Trigger Figure 6 26 2 Timer examples HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 109 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 27 TOTALISER MENU The totaliser is an instrument function used to calculate a total quantity by integrating a flow rate input over time The maximum value of the totaliser is 99999 The outputs from a totaliser are its integrated value and an alarm state Total N Total Out Total N 3 Total Out Total N gt Resoluti Use up down arrows to select required totaliser then Enter Use return kE one or more times from within menu to return to this page Total Out Resolution Shows current value of selected totaliser The source to be totalised Select required units for totaliser Use up down arrows to set number of decimal places 5 XXXXX DD DA YD Total N ED Alarm SP Use up down arrows to enter alarm gt Alarm SP ED 0 threshold value YO DA YD Total N lt D Alarm Out On Off status of the totaliser alarm gt Alarm Out ED Off YO D YD Total N ED Run Yes initiates integration 3 Run ED No No inhibits integration YD DA YD Total N ED Hold Yes suspends integration 3 Hold ED No No restarts integration YD DA YD ED
244. e for isolation applications within the meaning of EN60947 1 4 Under some circumstances the power module heatsink temperature may rise above 50 degrees Celsius If operators are likely to come into contact with such heatsinks adequate warnings and barriers must be put in place in order to prevent injury 5 EPower alarms protect thyristors and loads against abnormal operation and provide the user with valuable information regarding the type of fault Under no circumstances should these alarms be regarded as a replacement for proper personnel protection It is strongly recom mended that the installing authority include independent system safety mechanisms to protect both personnel and equipment against injury or damage and that such safety mechanisms be regularly inspected and maintained Consult the EPower supplier for advice CH Note The instrument shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device fitted within easy reach of the operator and labelled as the disconnecting device a A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947 1 and 1EC947 3 b A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool 1 Before any other connection is made the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective conductor 2 The mains supply fuse within the Driver Module is not replaceable If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty the manufacturer s local service centre should be
245. e ida 71 Create a new empty data set yu nanan 136 Trans Enaple asta LA ka A canst teat 57 Create a new watch recipe list 136 ANO ON 58 O AA O T gt Transfer function active a 60 Download the selected data set to the device 136 Transfer Mode tra NG 35 40 Insert item ahead of selected item 136 Transfer Spana a e n A A a a yee 58 Move selected item cera sa na aa nna re 136 A ooa ARE 109 Open an existing watch recipe file 136 TrueGood TrueBad e oiie iia 81 Open OPC SLOPE nanana a vee edie KW 136 TY pen At ae ka ang GANA ma ka NU 101 Remove recipe PatamMeter s ss iers isi co 136 Analogue IHU ki nb NAGANO O 50 Save the current watch recipe list 136 Analogue output aooaa aerer 51 Snapshots uss a a a GN PA MUNA dass ING 136 DIGONG yds iA e nalang ng Rias 69 Watchdogs frites tates ieee EN leds ele aa 33 43 Tee ce eg oben is a E nak baa 108 l RELAY name thle a eaa a 4 en aa aaah th ale 13 U WindowChopOff aaa 90 Wiring Undelete PA AP RA E 19 COMMER ai eh eee teas eae Hee 122 Mains Function block context menu 120 DIYAN rasa a 10 Monitor AA 123 Remote panel 214 Wire ASSESS 122 Thyristor power unit 19 Wiring ditor items jo ipa neve 124 Remote panel 214 UnderVoltThreshold ooccccccccccccccccco 90 201 A A AA 11 Undo RATA UE E O NONA PG 118 Remote panel pb O bby a A O O 215 Unit over temperature 0 eee eee o 1
246. e of Driver Module figure 2 2 1d Watchdog relay standard Relays two to four option Installation Category Absolute maximum switching capability 3 way connector on underside of Driver Module figure 2 2 1d 12 way option module connector figure 2 2 1c Installation category III assuming that nominal phase to earth voltage is lt 300V RMS Isolation between different relays contacts is double isolation in accordance with the installation category and phase to earth voltage specified above lt 2A at 240V RMS resistive loads Note Normally Closed and Normally open refer to the relay when the coil is not energised re o o o 8 c 9 5 3 o 0 8 0 6 0 4 Power factor cos 6 Inductive life resistive life x reduction factor OPTIONAL INPUT OUTPUT MODULES SK3 SK4 SK5 Up to three input output modules can be fitted each containing the inputs and outputs detailed below Unless otherwise stated below the specification for the optional I O including relays is as given above for the standard I O Termination Number of modules Number of inputs Number of outputs Number of relays 10V potentiometer supply o p voltage Removable 12 way 5 08mm pitch connector per module Up to three One analogue input and two digital inputs per module One analogue output per module 1 set of common normally open and normally closed contacts per module 10 0V 0 3V at 5 5 mA HA179769
247. ecomes unnecessary Section 6 7 3 describes the configuration parameters which allow the user to enter a Process Variable PV and a setpoint SP for each phase where the PV is the value to be limited e g 1 and the SP is the value that the PV must not exceed FIRING ANGLE LIMITING Target phase angle For phase angle control limiting is achieved by reducing the firing graduali aaa PERA gradually reducing Y angle on each half mains cycle such that the limit value of the relevant parameter is not exceeded As limiting is reduced so the phase angle tends to its target value DUTY CYCLE LIMITING For Burst Firing only limiting reduces the On state of the burst firing driving the load Load current voltage and active power are calculated over the period of each Ton Toff period CAUTION When applied to load current duty cycle limiting does not limit the peak current value and under some circumstances this may allow an overheating hazard in the load and or Power Module to develop CHOP OFF This is a limiting technique which detects an over current alarm state and stops further thyristor firing for the duration of that alarm state All the relevant parameters are to be found in the Network Setup menu section 6 20 2 There are two alarms which may trigger Chop Off as follows 1 The alarm is active when ChopOff1Threshold is exceeded for more than five seconds This threshold can be set to any value between 10096 and
248. econ Minimum ms Maximum ims Average C Documents and Settings richardne gt Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2666 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp TTL 64 TTL 64 TTL 64 TTL 64 lt loss C Documents and Settings richardne gt Ping 123 456 789 6 Ping request could not find host 123 456 789 6 Please check the name and try ag ain C Documents and Settings richardne gt _ Figure 7 1 2a Command prompt Ping screens typical Once the Ethernet link to the instrument has been verified iTools can be started or shut down and S time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time mg See for more details of the scan procedure HA179769 Page 114 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 1 3 Direct Connection This section describes how to connect a pc directly to a Driver Module which for this purpose must be fitted with the Ethernet communications option WIRING Connection is made from the Ethernet connector on the front of the Driver Module to an Ethernet RJ45 connector usually located at the rear of the pc The cable should be a cross over cable type O O PCEthernet connector Once wired correctly and powered up it is necessary to enter a suitable IP address and subnet mask into the Comms configuration of the Driver Module This information can be found as follows 1 Atthe pc click Start All Programs Accessories
249. ed for 2 secs min Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to iiit the summary pages Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the Please wait Access Goto page Use the Enter or up down keys to scroll through the Event Log event log Event 1 Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to the summary pages ErrStandby Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the HwDiffers Access Goto page Figure 5 2 User menu overview Note The summary page is displayed at switch on only if the unit has been configured either via the Quickstart menu or at the factory Otherwise at first switch on the Quickstart menu is entered Summary pages are discussed in section 5 1 above 5 2 1 Alarm Summary pages This page contains a list of currently active alarms together with a group of four flashing bell symbols if the alarm is unacknowledged The Enter key is used to scroll through the list and the up down arrow keys are operated simultaneously to acknowledge each alarm as required 5 2 2 Event Log This is a list of up to 40 event items where Event 1 is the latest As shown in the figure below Event number Event Type and Actual Event known as Event ID appear on the screen Event Types and Event IDs are given in table 5 2 2 EventLog EventLog EventNN Event30 Event Type Instrument Event ID Conf Exit General Typical example HA179769 Page 42 Issue 9 Au
250. ed as Resistive or Transformer For Load type Resistive the load must be connected directly to the power module and only resistive loads may be so connected For Load Type Transformer the load is connected to the power module via a transformer and may be resistive or reactive HA179769 Page 74 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 13 FIRING OUTPUT Cont Safety Ramp Displays the safety ramp duration in supply voltage cycles 0 to 255 to be applied at startup The ramp is either a phase angle ramp from zero to the requested target phase angle or for Burst Firing from O to 1009k See figure 6 13b Safety Ramp is not applicable to Half cycle Mode Soft Start For Burst Firing only this is the soft start duration in supply voltage 1 2 cycles applying a phase angle ramp at the beginning of each on period Figure 6 13c Soft Stop In Burst Firing the soft stop duration in supply voltage 1 2 cycles applying a phase angle ramp at the end of each on period Delayed Trigger Appears only if Mode Burst Soft Start Off and Load Type TxFormer Delayed Trigger specifies the triggering delay in phase angle when delivering power into a transformer load Used to ensure that the thyristor is fired when the current is zero Configurable between 0 and 90 degrees inclusive See figure 6 13d Enable Enables disables firing Must be wired to a non zero value to enable firing typically a digital input In
251. ed out by clicking on the source parameter then clicking on the compound or the compound tab and then clicking on the destination parameter Wiring from a compound parameter to a top level parameter or from compound to compound is carried out in similar manner Unused function blocks can be moved into compounds by dragging from the tree view Existing blocks can be dragged from the top level diagram or from another compound onto the tab associated with the destination compound Blocks are moved out of compounds to the top level diagram or to another compound in a similar way Function blocks can also be cut and pasted Default compound names e g Compound 2 are used only once so that if for example Compounds 1 and 2 have been created and Compound 2 is subsequently deleted then the next compound to be created will be named Compound 3 Top level elements can be click dragged into compounds HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 125 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont TOOL TIPS Hovering the cursor over the block displays tooltips describing that part of the block beneath the cursor For function block parameters the tooltip shows the parameter description its OPC name and if downloaded its value Similar tooltips are shown when hovering over inputs outputs and over many other items on the iTools screen A Function Block is enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram wi
252. emperature alarm is set and firing is inhibited Hysteresis is built in to the measurement system to ensure that the heat sink is allowed to cool properly before firing can re commence 10 1 6 Network dips This detects a reduction is supply voltage and if this reduction exceeds a configurable measured value VdipsThreshold firing will be inhibited until the supply voltage returns to a suitable value VdipsThreshold represents a percentage change in supply voltage between successive half cycles and can be defined by the user in the Network Setup menu as described in section 6 20 2 10 1 7 Mains frequency fault Triggered if the supply voltage frequency strays out of the range 47 to 63 Hz or if the mains frequency changes for one cycle to the next by more than 0 1896 of base frequency or by more than 0 9 of the frequency measured last cycle Firing stops until the supply frequency returns to a satisfactory state 10 1 8 Power board 24V fail The 24 Volt supply rail in the power module has failed The power module stops firing immediately and does not restart until the fault is rectified HA179769 Page 200 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 10 2 PROCESS ALARMS Process Alarms are related to the application and can be configured either to stop the power module firing Standby Mode or to allow operation to continue Process alarms can also be configured to be latched and if so they have to be acknowledged before the alar
253. ems to the average of the individual RMS load currents Open loop No measurement feedback The thyristor firing angle in Phase angle mode or the duty cycle in burst firing mode are proportional to the setpoint HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 39 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 2 3 Transfer Mode The control system can use automatic transfer of certain feedback parameters For example with loads with very low cold resistance feedback should be used to limit inrush current but once the load has started to warm up Power feedback should be used the control program can be configured to change feedback mode automatically The Transfer mode can be selected as I to P or lms to P as appropriate to the type of load being controlled None No feedback parameter transfer to the control program 2 Selects transfer mode to the selected Feedback Mode above lang Selects transfer mode lays to the selected Feedback Mode above 4 2 4 Limitation features In order for example to prevent potentially damaging inrush currents it is possible to set a value for power or Current squared which is not to be exceeded This limiting is implemented using phase angle reduction duty cycle reduction or chop off depending on the type of control e g phase angle burst firing For loads exhibiting a low impedance at low temperatures but a higher impedance at working temperature the current drawn reduces as the load warms and limiting gradually b
254. ency Fault uint8 02BF 703 Network 3 AlmLat FuseBlown System alarm latch Fuse Blown uint8 02BC 700 Network 3 AlmLat MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02C5 709 Network 3 AlmLat MissMains System alarm latch Missing Mains uint8 02B9 697 Network 3 AlmLat NetworkDips System alarm latch Mains Voltage Dips uint8 02BE 702 Network 3 AlmLat OpenThyr System alarm latch Open Thyristor uint8 02BB 699 Network 3 AlmLat OverCurrent Indication alarm latch Over Current uint8 02C7 711 Network 3 AlmLat OverTemp System alarm latch Over Temperature uint8 02BD 701 Network 3 AlmLat PB24VFail System alarm latch Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02C0 704 Network 3 AlmLat PLF Process alarm latch Partial Load Failure uint8 02C3 707 Network 3 AlmLat PLU Process alarm latch Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02C4 708 Network 3 AlmLat PreTemp Process alarm latch Pre Temperature uint8 02C6 710 Network 3 AlmLat ThyrSC System alarm latch Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02BA 698 Network 3 AlmLat TLF Process alarm latch Total Load Failure uint8 02C1 705 Network 3 AlmSig ChopOff Process alarm signalling status Chop Off uint8 02B3 691 Network 3 AlmSig FreqFault System alarm signalling status Frequency Fault uint8 02B0 688 Network 3 AlmSig FuseBlown System alarm signalling status Fuse Blown uint8 02AD 685 Network 3 AlmSig MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 02B6 694 Network 3 AlmSig MissMains System alarm signalling status
255. enu Mode Select the required firing mode from Logic PA Phase angle Half cycle BurstVar Burst firing minimum on time or BurstFix Burst firing cycle time Input This is the value that the modulator is required to deliver Output The output logic signal controlling the power module on and off times normally wired to the input of the firing block For Mode Phase angle this is a phase angle demand Min on Time For Variable Period Modulation this sets the minimum on time in supply voltage periods At 5096 demand from the modulator Ton Toff Minimum on time and Cycle time is 2 x Minimum on time Modulation period The minimum off time is equal to Min on time Cycle Time For Fixed Period Modulation this is the cycle time in supply voltage periods Logic Mode For Logic Firing Modulation Half cycle sets firing stop to the next zero crossing Full cycle sets firing stop atthe zero crossing of the next full cycle LMIn Load Management Interface input Defines a connection from the modulator to a load management channel if fitted InFiltTime Modulator input filter time as a number of modulation periods When set to zero filter is disabled Switch PA Allows the user to impose Phase Angle firing overriding the configured Burst Mode as displayed in Mode above HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 85 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 NETWORK MENU This identifies the type of electrical network to be
256. er applied lt p Logic output from controller Figure 4 2 1a Logic firing mode BURST FIXED FIRING This means that there is a fixed cycle time equal to an integer number of supply voltage cycles as set up in the Modulator menu Power is controlled by varying the ratio between the on period and the off period within this cycle time figure 4 2 1b Tcyc lt gt Power applied Power applied i ae tan gt S Tof gt S ion gt Tcyc Ton Toff Figure 4 2 1b Burst Fixed mode HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 37 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 2 1 FIRING MODES Cont BURST VARIABLE FIRING Burst Firing Variable is the preferred mode for temperature control Between O and 50 of setpoint the on time is the Min on time set in the modulator menu and the off time is varied to achieve control Between 50 and 100 the off time is the value set for Min on and power is controlled by varying the number of on cycles Power Power Cadet rr applied applied i Power applied Min off Power applied Min on Min off Min on a Ton Toff Ton g Ton Toff Ton Toff 1 2 Min on 66 7 duty cycle Toff Min on 50 duty cycle Min On Min Of Power applied Power applied Min on 2 forthese examples lag a ag Ton Toff Ton Toff 2 x Min on 33 3 duty cycle Figure 4 2 1c Burst variable firing PHASE ANGLE CONTROL This mode of firing
257. er the text to appear on the selected line of the display The display can accommodate 10 characters any further characters are hidden This style is shown as line one in figure 7 8 2a Value only Displays the value of the selected parameter right justified No User text may be entered for this style This style is shown as line two in figure 7 8 2a Single Row Displays the parameter mnemonic left justified and the parameter value right Left origin Bar Bar Graph Title 1 Bar Graph Title 2 justified User text may be entered but this will over write the parameter mnemonic This style is shown as line three in figure 7 8 2a Displays the parameter value as a left hand zero bargraph This style is shown as line four in figure 7 8 2a and line two in figure 7 8 2b Supplies low limit left justified parameter mnemonic centred and high limit right justified displays normally associated with a Left origin Bar on the line below or above User text may be entered As the number of entered characters increases this overwrites firstly the mnemonic then the range values This style is shown as line one in figure 7 8 2b Similar to Bar Graph Title 1 but includes a numeric value for the parameter as well as its mnemonic User text may be entered As the number of entered characters increases this over writes firstly the mnemonic then the range values If the number of entered characters plus the number of value characters exceeds 10 t
258. erating normally Missing or incomplete configuration Unrecoverable fault s Recoverable fault s Network Status Module Status Function an Wh B 5 V negative bus supply voltage CAN_L Cable shield CAN_H V positive bus supply voltage Notes 1 See DeviceNet specification for power sup ply specification 2 During startup an LED test is performed satisfying the DeviceNet standard Figure 2 2 1i DeviceNet connector pinout OPERATION MODE LED INDICATION LED state Interpretation Off Off line or no power Steady green On line data exchange Flashing green Red single flash Red double flash On line clear Parametrisation error PROFIBUS configuration error STATUS LED INDICATION LED state Interpretation Off No power or not initialised Steady green Initialised Flashing green Diagnostic event present Steady red Exception error PROFIBUS DP Pin Function Pin Function o INC a ground BARD TxD 3 B RxD TxD 7 N C 2 ING 6 5V See note 1 1 N C Notes 1 Isolated 5 Volts for termination purposes Any current drawn from this terminal affects the total power consumtion 2 The cable screen should be terminated to the connector housing Figure 2 2 1 Profibus connector pinout Page 16 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE
259. ernal Over Temp uint8 OAEF 2799 LTC AlmStop Fuse System alarm stop Fuse Blown uint8 OAF4 2804 LTC AlmStop Temp System alarm stop Over Temp uint8 OAF5 2805 LTC MainPrm AlFuseln External Fuse Fail Alarm Input 1 Active uint8 OAE8 2792 LTC MainPrm AlTempln External Temperature Failure Alarm Input 1 active uint8 OAE9 2793 LTC MainPrm IP Input of LTC block float32 OADE 2782 LTC MainPrm OP1 Output1 of the block float32 OAE4 2788 LTC MainPrm OP2 Output2 of the block float32 OAE5 2789 LTC MainPrm OP3 Output3 of the block float32 OAE6 2790 LTC MainPrm OP4 Output4 of the block float32 OAE7 2791 LTC MainPrm PAOP Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 OADF 2783 LTC MainPrm S1 Turn ratio of tap1 float32 OAEO 2784 LTC MainPrm S2 Turn ratio oftap2 float32 0AE1 2785 LTC MainPrm S3 Turn ratio oftap3 float32 OAE2 2786 LTC MainPrm S4 Turn ratio oftap4 float32 OAE3Z 2787 LTC MainPrm TapNb Transformer tap number 2 2 3 3 4 4 uint8 OADD 2781 LTC MainPrm Type LTC Type 0 Primary 1 Secondary uint8 OADC 2780 Math2 1 Fallback Fallback strategy uint8 08C2 2242 0 ClipBad 1 ClipGood 2 FallBad 3 FallGood 4 UpscaleBad 6 DownscaleBad Math2 1 FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08BB 2235 Math2 1 HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08BC 2236 Math2 1 In1 Input 1 Value float32 08B7 2231 Math2 1 In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08B6 2230 Math2 1 In2 Input 2 Value float32 08B9 2233 Math2 1 In2Mul Input 2 Scale
260. etwork LSP The local setpoint value see also Note 2 above 5 1 3 Two by two phase summary page This is a mode of operation whereby a single four power module unit can control two independent three phase networks Vavn The RMS load voltage averaged over all three loads for network n lavn The RMS load current averaged over all three loads for network n Pn The true power delivered to load network n LSPn The local setpoint value for network n see also Note 2 above HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 41 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 5 2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR USER MENU 1st Summary page appears 1 After quitting the Quickstart menu 2 On power up if the unit was left in Access level 1 operator or 2 Engineer at power down If pow ered off in Config mode it restarts in Config mode Use the Enter key to scroll through summary pages The number of summary pages depends on the Vn 248 9V number n of separate power networks in the system In 120 3A n 1 2 3 or 4 according to which Summary page is being displayed Pn 29943W nis not present if there is only one summary page LSPn 5596 Summary Page 1 Hold the Enter key continuously operated to return to the summary pages Hold the Return key continuously operated to call the Access Goto page E Enter Return Alm SUMMTIY Use the Enter key to scroll through alarms acknowl Hold operated Miss Mains edging them as requir
261. etwork 2 AlmLat MissMains System alarm latch Missing Mains uint8 0214 532 Network 2 AlmLat NetworkDips System alarm latch Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0219 537 Network 2 AlmLat OpenThyr System alarm latch Open Thyristor uint8 0216 534 Network 2 AlmLat OverCurrent Indication alarm latch Over Current uint8 0222 546 Network 2 AlmLat OverTemp System alarm latch Over Temperature uint8 0218 536 Network 2 AlmLat PB24VFail System alarm latch Power Board 24V Failure uint8 021B 539 Network 2 AlmLat PLF Process alarm latch Partial Load Failure uint8 021E 542 Network 2 AlmLat PLU Process alarm latch Partial Load Unbalance uint8 021F 543 Network 2 AlmLat PreTemp Process alarm latch Pre Temperature uint8 0221 545 Network 2 AlmLat ThyrSC System alarm latch Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0215 533 Network 2 AlmLat TLF Process alarm latch Total Load Failure uint8 021 540 Network 2 AlmSig ChopOff Process alarm signalling status Chop Off uint8 020E 526 Network 2 AlmSig FreqFault System alarm signalling status Frequency Fault uint8 020B 523 Network 2 AlmSig FuseBlown System alarm signalling status Fuse Blown uint8 0208 520 Network 2 AlmSig MainsVoltFault Process alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0211 529 Network 2 AlmSig MissMains System alarm signalling status Missing Mains uint8 0205 517 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 163 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 164 Issue 9 Aug
262. etwork MasterAddr Address of elected master on the LM network uint8 06C1 1729 PLM Network Pmax Max power installed on the PLM network float32 06BC 1724 PLM Network Pr Total power on the network after load shedding float32 06BF 1727 PLM Network Ps Total amount of power allowed from the network float32 O6BE 1726 PLM Network Pt Total demanded power on the network float32 06BD 1725 PLM Network TotalChannels Total number of channels on the network uint8 06BB 1723 PLM Network TotalStation Total number of stations on the LM link uint8 06BA 1722 PLM Station Address Load management address uint8 06B3 1715 PLM Station NumChan Number of channels for this station uint8 06B5 1717 PLM Station PLMOut1 PLM Slot1 Interface output uintl6 06B 6 1718 PLM Station PLMOut2 PLM Slot2 Interface output uint16 06B7 1719 PLM Station PLMOut3 PLM Slot3 Interface output uint16 06B8 1720 PLM Station PLMOut4 PLM Slot4 Interface output uint16 06B9 1721 PLM Station Status Master or slave station status O Pending uint8 06B4 1716 1 IsMaster 2 IsSlave 3 DupplAddr PLMChan 1 Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06D3 1747 PLMChan 1 PLMIn PLM Channel Interface Input uintl 06D5 1749 PLMChan 1 PLMO ut PLM Channel Interface Output uintl 06D6 1750 PLMChan 1 PZMax Total Power installed on the channel float32 06D2 1746 PLMChan 1 ShedFactor Shed Factor of the Channel uint8 06D4 1748 PLMChan 2 Group Group in which the channel operates uint8 06E2 1762 HA179769
263. flash Internal error The module has encountered a major internal fault Steady Green Steady Green PROFIN ET IO Figure 2 2 1m Profinet lO connector pinout HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 17 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont REMOTE PANEL CONNECTOR Located on the underside of the driver module figure 2 2 1b this RJ45 connector supplies isolated 3 wire ElA485 outputs for an optional remote panel display unit Figure 2 2 1n gives the pinout See section 6 6 2 for configuration details Parity is set to None See also Appendix A for details of a suitable remote panel unit y 5 Definition Reserved Reserved N C N C N C Isolated OV A B Internal connections Pin 1 to 5V via 100kQ Pin 2 to OV via 100kQ PAL N GU Ja UA O Y Figure 2 2 1n Remote panel connector HA179769 Page 18 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 Power modules LINE LOAD CABLES Line power is routed through the top of the unit and load power emerges from the bottom of the unit Details of recommended cable sizes etc are given in table 2 2 2 below Safety earth wiring is discussed in section 2 2 1 above Figures 2 2 2c to 2 2 2f show typical connection details Max load Terminal Minimum cable Recommended current size cross section torque setting 50 100A M8 35 mm 12 5 Nm 9 2 ft Ib 160A M8 70 mm 12 5 Nm 9 2 ft Ib
264. float32 0513 1299 SetProv 1 Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0511 1297 SetProv 1 LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0508 1288 SetProv 1 RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint float32 050B 1291 SetProv 1 Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 O50E 1294 SetProv 1 Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 050F 1295 SetProv 1 RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0510 1296 SetProv 1 SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 050A 1290 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 171 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 172 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec SetProv 1 SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 0512 1298 SetProv 1 SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0514 1300 SetProv 1 WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0509 1289 SetProv 2 DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0520 1312 0 No 1 Yes SetProv 2 EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0529 1321 SetProv 2 HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 0527 1319 SetProv 2 Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0525 1317 SetProv 2 LocalSP Local setpoint float32 051C 1308 SetProv 2 RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint float32 051F 1311 SetProv 2 Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 0522 1314 SetProv 2 Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 0523 1315 SetProv 2 RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0524 1316 SetProv 2 SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 051E 1310 SetProv 2 SPTrack Enable Setpoint
265. float32 08B8 2232 Math2 1 LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08BD 2237 Math2 1 Oper Operator uint8 08BA 2234 0 None 6 SelMax 12 Log 1 Add 7 SelMin 13 Ln 2 Sub 8 HotSwap 14 Exp 3 Mul 9 SmpHld 15 10x 4 Div 10 Power 51 Sel 1 5 AbsDif 11 Sqrt Math2 1 Out Output Value float32 08BF 2239 Math2 1 Resolution Output Resolution uint8 08C0 2240 0 X 1 X X 2 X XX 3 X XXX 4 X XXXX HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 157 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 158 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Math2 1 Select Select Between Input 1 0 and Input 2 1 bool 08C3 2243 Math2 1 Status Status Good 0 Bad 1 bool 08BE 2238 Math2 1 Units Output Units O None 1 Temp 2 V 3 mV uint8 08C1 2241 4 A 5 mA 6 pH 7 mmHg Math2 2 Fallback Fallback strategy as for Math2 1 uint8 08DA 2266 Math2 2 FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 08D3 2259 Math2 2 HighLimit Output High Limit float32 08D4 2260 Math2 2 In1 Input 1 Value float32 08CF 2255 Math2 2 In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 08CE 2254 Math2 2 In2 Input 2 Value float32 08D1 2257 Math2 2 In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 08DO 2256 Math2 2 LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 08D5 2261 Math2 2 Oper Operator as for Math2 1 uint8 08D2 2258 Math2 2 Out Output Value float32 08D7 2263 Math2 2 Resolution Output Resolution as for Math2 1 uint8 08D8 2264 Math2 2 Select
266. from which a parameter is selected for insertion above the currently selected parameter DATA SET CREATION Once all the required parameters have been added to the list select the empty data set by clicking on the column header Fill the data set with current values using one of the following methods 1 Clicking on the Capture current values into a data set tool icon also known as the Snapshot Values tool 2 Selecting Snapshot Values from the Recipe or Context right click menu 3 Using the short cut lt ctrl gt lt A gt HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 135 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 7 1 CREATING A WATCH LIST Cont DATA SET CREATION Cont Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells Data values can be left blank or cleared in which case no values will be written for those parameters at download Data values are cleared by deleting all the characters in the cell then either moving to a different cell or typing lt Enter gt The set is called Set 1 by default but it can be renamed by either by using the Rename data set item in the Recipe or context menus or by using the short cut lt ctrl gt lt R gt New empty data sets can be added using one of the following 1 Clicking on the Create a new empty data set toolbar icon ff 2 Selecting New Data Set in the Recipe or context menus 3 Using the short cut lt ctrl gt lt W gt Once
267. g 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 5 2 2 EVENT LOG Cont Event Type Event ID Config error DSP Error Fatal error General error ndication Alarm Network n Active ndication Alarm Network n Inactive ndication Alarm Network n Acknowledged nstrument event Network n error Power Module n error Process Alarm External n Active Process Alarm External n Inactive Process Alarm External n Acknowledged Process Alarm Network n Active Process Alarm Network n Inactive Process Alarm Network n Acknowledged Restart Error Standby Error System Alarm Network n Active System Alarm Network n Inactive System Alarm Network n Acknowledged N 12 30r4 EXTERNAL PROCESS ALARMS Deviation Band Deviation High Deviation Low High Low FATAL ERRORS Internal Fuse configuration Restart Failure CONFIG ERRORS Invalid parameter database Invalid wiring table INDICATION ALARMS Limit active Load over current Load Management over schedule Process Value transfer GENERAL ERRORS Processor watchdog Event Log fault Power Module n Calibration INSTRUMENT EVENTS Cold start Config entry Config exit Global Acknowledge Power down Quickstart entry Quickstart exit NETWORK ERRORS Phase n power module Comms err Phase n power module Timeout Phase n power module watchdog POWER MODULE POST ERRORS Comms error Comms timeout Fuse blown Power rail fail Watchdog PROCESS ALARMS Chop Off Closed
268. g NetworkDips System alarm signalling status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0354 852 Network 4 AlmSig OpenThyr System alarm signalling status Open Thyristor uint8 0351 849 Network 4 AlmSig OverCurrent Indication alarm signalling status Over Current uint8 035D 861 HA179769 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 4 AlmSig OverTemp System alarm signalling status Over Temperature uint8 0353 851 Network 4 AlmSig PB24VFail System alarm signalling status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0356 854 Network 4 AlmSig PLF Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Failure uint8 0359 857 Network 4 AlmSig PLU Process alarm signalling status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 035A 858 Network 4 AlmSig PreTemp Process alarm signalling status Pre Temperature uint8 035C 860 Network 4 AlmSig ThyrSC System alarm signalling status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0350 848 Network 4 AlmSig TLF Process alarm signalling status Total Load Failure uint8 0357 855 Network 4 AlmStop ChopOff Process alarm stop Chop Off uint8 0385 901 Network 4 AlmStop FreqFault System alarm stop Frequency Fault uint8 0382 898 Network 4 AlmStop FuseBlown System alarm stop Fuse Blown uint8 037F 895 Network 4 AlmStop MainsVoltFault Process alarm stop Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0388 904 Network 4 AlmStop MissMains System alarm stop Missing Mains uint8 037C 892 Network 4 AlmStop NetworkDips Sys
269. g fans attached The Driver Module includes the following analogue and digital inputs and outputs fitted as standard 10V supply Two analogue inputs One analogue output Two digital Inputs Outputs One change over relay under software control configurable by the user Also fitted are a Watchdog relay a configuration port and an isolated ElA485 port for attaching an optional Remote Display Three further optional I O modules may be fitted similar to the standard module but with the addition of an output change over relay Other options provide for external voltage and current feedback and for predictive load management Section two of this manual gives connector locations and pinouts The operator interface consists of a display comprising four lines of 10 characters where each character is formed using a 5 x 7 LCD dot matrix and four push buttons for navigation and data selection 1 1 UNPACKING THE UNITS The units are despatched in a special pack designed to give adequate protection during transit If any of the outer boxes show signs of damage they should be opened immediately and the instrument examined If there is evidence of damage the instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for instructions After the instrument has been removed from its packing the packing should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed The packing should then be stored against future
270. ght groups of loads A total of 64 channels is available and these may be freely distributed among the groups as long as each group has at least one channel Each group has a single power demand input and operates as in Incremental Type 2 mode with the first channel modulating to maintain the selected power level Switching time within groups is distributed over the selected time cycle Rotating Distributed and Incremental control This provides control of between two and eight groups of loads A total of 64 channels is available and these may be freely distributed among the groups as long as each group has at least one channel Each group has a single power demand input and operates in Rotating Incremental mode with all channels modulating at an identical rate The distributed nature of this mode ensures that the instant of switch on in each group is distributed over the cycle time Period This configures the modulation period for the station in mains periods between 50 and 1000 The accuracy of control is related to the modulation period to increase accuracy the period must be increased The master unit imposes its modulation period on all slaves It is recommended that all slave units are configured to use the same period as the master so that should the master lose control then the slave that replaces it as master will use the same value and thus achieve the same accuracy of control The new master imposes its own value at the next powe
271. hen the user text is hidden leaving just the parameter value This style is shown as line three in figure 7 8 2b Page 138 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 8 3 User Pages Tools Page 1 IE Select Page Use the up down arrows to select page 1 to page 4 for configuration 1 Insert item ahead of selected item Opens a browser to allow the user to select a parameter for insertion in the table The insertion point is above the currently selected item If the Parameter list is full the toolbar icon is disabled greyed out Short cut lt Insert gt x Remove selected item Removes the selected item on the list without confirmation Short cut lt ctrl gt lt Delete gt Move selected item Click on the arrows to change the parameter order and thus the order in which the parameters appear at the operator interface lt gt a Edit parameter for selected item Opens a browser to allow the user to select a parameter to replace the highlighted parameter in the table Short cut lt ctrl gt lt E gt A Edit user text for selected item Allows the user to edit the user text which appears at the operator interface Only the first 10 characters are displayed For parameters that do not support user text no user text appears in the User Text column Short cut lt ctrl gt lt T gt pa Edit style for selected item Clicking on this toolbar icon calls the Style Selection page allowing the user to edi
272. his means that it sums the values of all the other Energy counters The block input is disabled The IsGlobal parameter becomes non editable set to No for all other Energy counter blocks If the Global energy Counter is held or reset all other counters are held and reset as well No This counter is not the Global counter Global this counter is the Global counter No Use UsrUnit and TotUnit settings Yes Autoscale power value display Table 6 10 1 shows the breakpoints Note due to the computing time required the pulse length may vary according to circumstance For example if a 20ms pulse is selected the actual pulse length may be a mixture of 20ms and 30 ms pulses HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 71 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 10 2 Resolution 6 10 1 ENERGY COUNTER PARAMETERS Cont Power Range Watt hours Scaler value 0 to 65 535 65 535 to 65 535 000 65 535 000 to 655 350 000 655 350 000 to 6 553 500 000 to 65 535 000 000 65 535 000 000 to 655 350 000 000 655 350 000 000 to 6 553 500 000 000 6 553 500 000 000 upwards 6 553 500 000 1 1k 10k 100k 1M 10M 100M 1G Table 6 10 1 Autoscale breakpoints The resolution of the stored energy value varies according to the totalised value as shown in table 6 10 2 below For example for stored values between 33 554 432 watt hours and 67 108 863 watt hours the value increases in 4 watt ho
273. iable float32 065D 1629 IO AnalogOP 4 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling from process units float32 065B 1627 IO AnalogOP 4 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling from process units float32 065C 1628 IO AnalogOP 4 Main Type Specify the output type as OP 1 uint8 065A 1626 1O Digital 1 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 0559 1369 1O Digital 1 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 055A 1370 1O Digital 1 PV Process variable bool 055B 1371 1O Digital 1 Type Specify the digital lO type uint8 0558 1368 0 Logic input 1 Contact input 2 Logic output 1O Digital 2 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 0568 1384 1O Digital 2 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 0569 1385 1O Digital 2 PV Process variable bool 056A 1386 1O Digital 2 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 0567 1383 1O Digital 3 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 0577 1399 1O Digital 3 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 0578 1400 1O Digital 3 PV Process variable bool 0579 1401 1O Digital 3 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 0576 1398 1O Digital 4 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 0586 1414 1O Digital 4 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 0587 1415 1O Digital 4 PV Process variable bool 0588 1416 1O Digital 4 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 0585 1413 1O Digital 5 Invert Inve
274. igita Sense of the output 0 or 1 orthe N E electrical input at the terminals see gt Meas Val ED O text for further details Use up down arrows to select Digital l O number then Enter Use return ED key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use up down arrows to select IP Contact IPVolts Input volts or OP Digital Use up down arrows to select Yes or No to invert the signal or not respectively Desired output value or the state of the input see text for further details gt Back to Type Figure 6 9 Digital I O menu Selects I O type Logic Input IPContact or digital output For pinout details see figure 2 2 1c Sets the inversion status to No or Yes For inputs Yes inverts the input for outputs Yes inverts the output measured value with respect to the input PV For inputs this shows the value measured at the instrument terminals in electrical units For outputs this shows 1 or O according as the output is high or low For inputs this is the current state of the input after any inversion has been applied For outputs this is the desired output value before any inversion is applied HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 69 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 10 ENERGY Provides a number of energy counters to totalise consumed energy The value s can be displayed at the driver module front panel using Tools User Pages and at the remote pa
275. ill be the same as the last known value of the remote setpoint thus ensuring a bumpless transfer Allows the user to select or Eng Engineering units as Setpoint units If Eng is selected HiRange and Eng workingSP appear at the user interface Appears only if SP units set to Eng This value is the high range of the setpoint used to scale the setpoint into of High Range Appears only if SP units set to Eng This value is an indication of the working setpoint in Engineering units The parameter must not be used for control because control loops accept setpoints only as values HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 107 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 26 TIMER MENU 6 26 1 Timer configuration TA Use Up Down arrows to select Timer number then Enter Use return key ED one or more times from within menu to return to this page ED Use Up Down arrows to select On Pulse On ED Delay One shot Min On or Off Timer N E Time UR Sii AM uration of timer period max 500 hours lt p 1000 0 ED Elapsed lime 03 2 The elapsed time for this timer cycle Timer N ES In A The trigger input for the timer 3in ED On 0 Off 1 On Timer N ED Out Shows the output status of the timer 3 Out ED n Timer N On Off status depends on the timer type gt Trigaered see text for more details r p En Back to Type Figure 6 26 1 Timer Menu Type Allows the user to se
276. inal scroll key operation this selection being indicated by a single off on flash of the desired value HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 31 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 3 3 BEACONS There are three LED illuminated beacons between the display area and the pushbuttons For clarity figure 3 above shows the locations of these beacons in an enhanced way on the real instrument they are invisible unless illuminated PWR LOC ALM PWR Power Illuminated green whilst power is applied to the unit The Beacon flashes if any of the associated power modules is not firing or if the unit is in Standby for any reason other than that the unit is in config mode LOC Local Illuminated orange when setpoints are to be read from the operator interface or from PC iTools ALM Alarm Illuminated red when one or more enabled alarms is active 3 4 FRONT PANEL MESSAGES A number of messages can appear atthe display panel These messages and their interpretations are listed below See section 10 for a more detailed description of some of these alarms Cold Start Conf Entry Conf Exit GlobalAck Power down OS Entry OS Exit 3 4 2 Indication alarms LimitAct LoadOverl LMoverSch PreValTfr 3 4 3 System alarms FuseBlown MainsFreq Missmains NetwDip OverTemp PMod24V 3 4 4 Process alarms 3 4 1 Instrument events The instrument has been cold started
277. ing pins to be fitted by the user according to power module number None mo jrn 112 i A ha Neutral phase oa voltage reference Either pin Current feedback connector I Load External feedback Figure 2 2 2a External feedback and neutral phase reference connectors HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 19 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont REMOTE VOLTAGE INPUT WARNING It must be ensured that the remote voltage sensing inputs if fitted are correctly fused Otherwise under certain fault conditions the cables could attempt to carry the full load current leading to overheating and potentially to a fire hazard Ifthe option is fitted the two end pins of a four pin connector figure 2 2 2a are used for terminating remote voltage sensing cable It is recommended that each input be fitted with slow blow fuse figure 2 2 2b of a lower current rating than that of the sensing cable harness If the option is fitted the Current Transformer input described above is also fitted Single phase shown multiple phases similar 12 Current 11 Supply 6 Supply 5 transformer Isolating device Isolating device i Power Phase neuiral Power Detail Phase neutra Module reference Module YIN reference N N Primary N 4 EN Use either Use either terminal terminal Fuses
278. int8 int16 uint16 int32 uint32 time32 float32 string Boolean Unsigned 8 bit integer Signed 16 bit integer Unsigned 16 bit integer Signed 32 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer time in milliseconds IEEE 32 bit floating point String an array of unsigned 8 bit integers Page 140 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 3 PARAMETER SCALING Some parameters might have values which exceed the maximum value 32767 that can be read written via 16 bit scaled integer comms For this reason the following parameters are read written with a scaling factor applied to them when using scaled integer comms Parameter Name Scaling Factor Network 1 4 Meas PBurst Kilo with 1 decimal place Network 1 4 Meas P Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas S Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas Q Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas IsqBurst Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas lsq Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas lsqMax Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas VsqBurst Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 Meas Vsq Kilo with 1decimal place Network 1 4 MeasVsqMax Kilo with 1decimal place PLM Network Pmax Mega with 2 decimal places PLM Network Pt Mega with 2 decimal places PLM Network Ps Mega with 2 decimal places PLM Network Pr Mega with 2 decimal places PLMChan 1 4 PZmax Kilo with 1 decimal place 8 3 1 Conditional scaling The parameters listed below are conditio
279. int8 042C 1068 Control 4 Setup FFGain Feedforward gain float32 042F 1071 Control 4 Setup FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 0430 1072 Control 4 Setup FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 042E 1070 Control 4 Setup NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 042B 1067 Control 4 Setup Standby Put controller into standby uint8 042A 1066 Control 4 Setup TransferEn Enable Transfer Proportional limit uint8 042D 1069 Counter 1 ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag O No 1 Yes bool 0A12 2578 Counter 1 Clock Clock Input bool OAOE 2574 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Counter 1 Count Count Value int32 0A10 2576 Counter 1 Direction Direction of Count 0 Up 1 Down bool OAOB 2571 Counter 1 Enable Enable the Counter O NO 1 Yes bool DADA 2570 Counter 1 OverFlow Overflow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool OAO0OD 2573 Counter 1 Reset Counter Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A11 2577 Counter 1 RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output 0 Off 1 On bool OAOC 2572 Counter 1 Target Counter Target int32 OAOF 2575 Counter 2 ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A25 2597 Counter 2 Clock Clock Input bool 0A21 2593 Counter 2 Count Count Value int32 0A23 2595 Counter 2 Direction Direction of Count 0 Up 1 Down bool OA1E 2590 Counter 2 Enable Enable the Coun
280. ion and for the fallback value High Limit The high limit for all inputs to the function and for the fallback value Fallback The fallback strategy comes into play if the status of the input value is Bad or if its value lies outside the range High limit Low limit Fall Good The output is set to the fallback value below output status is set to Good Fall Bad The output is set to the fallback value below output status is set to Bad Clip Good The output is set to the high or low limit as appropriate output status is set to Good Clip bad The output is set to the high or low limit as appropriate output status is set to Bad DownScale The output is set to the low limit and Status is set to Bad Upscale The output is set to the high limit and Status is set to Bad Fallback Allows the user to enter the value to which the output is set for Fallback Fall Good or Fall value Bad Select Appears only if Operation Select Allows input one or input two to be selected for output In1 Input one value normally wired to an input source In2 Input two value normally wired to an input source Out The output value resulting from the configured mathematical operation If either input is Bad or if the result is out of range the fallback strategy is adopted Status Indicates the status of the operation as Good or Bad Used to flag error conditions and can be used as an interlock for other operations
281. ions Short cuts are lt Ctrl gt lt X gt for cut lt Ctrl gt lt C gt for copy and lt Ctrl gt lt V gt for Paste Copy diagram fragment Paste diagram fragment Allows a part ofthe wiring diagram to be W Ft selected named and saved to file The fragment may then be pasted into any wiring diagram including the source diagram Create compound Flatten compound These two icons allow compounds to be created and uncreated respectively NG Gir la 7 3 2 Wiring editor operating details COMPONENT SELECTION Single wires are shown with boxes at corners when selected When more than one wire is selected as part of a group the wire colour changes to magenta All other items have a dashed line drawn round them when selected Clicking on a single item selects it An Item can be added to the selection by holding down the control key ctrl whilst clicking on the item A selected item can be deselected in the same way If a block is selected then all its associated wires are also selected Alternatively the mouse can be click dragged on the background to create a rubber band round the relevant area anything within this area being selected when the mouse is released lt Ctrl gt lt A gt selects all items on the active diagram BLOCK EXECUTION ORDER The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in which they are wired The order is automatically worked out for each Task or network
282. isplays a pick list of up to 10 previously visited lists which the user can select Short cut lt ctrl gt lt B gt for Back to or lt ctrl gt lt F gt for Forward to dl Ga Go Up a Level Go Down a Level For nested parameters these buttons allow the user to navigate vertically between levels Short cut lt ctrl gt lt U gt for Go Up a Level or lt ctrl gt lt D gt for Go Down a Level a Push pin to give the window global scope Clicking on this icon causes the current parameter list to be 9 permanently displayed even if another instrument becomes the current device 7 4 2 Explorer tools A number of tool icons appear above the parameter list Context Menu Copy Parameter Ctrl C Parameter Properties EY Parameter Help Shift F1 Edit Wire Paste Wire Delete Wire Follow Wire Columns gt Copy Parameter Parameter properties Parameter Help Edit Paste Delete Follow Wire Columns Copies the clicked on parameter to the clipboard Displays parameter properties for the clicked on parameter Displays help information for the clicked on parameter Not used in this application Allows the user to enable disable a number of parameter table columns figure 7 4b HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 129 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY B Fieldbus 1 0 Gateway epower 123 456 789 100 502 1D001 EPower Fieldbus 1 0 Gateway Editor EBR Input Definition Dutput
283. it Enable Enables threshold limit feature 2 Limit En ED Setup ED Trans Enable Enable Transfer Propor 3 Trans En EP a tional limit Setup ED FF Type Select the type of Feed gt FF Type P aTri Forward to be used WD D DY Setup ED 3 FF Gain Enter Feed Forward gain value to be applied Setup Enter Feed Forward off gt FF Offset set value to be applied Jp Back to Standby Figure 6 7 1 Control setup menu Standby If Yes the controller enters Standby mode and zero power is demanded When removed from Standby the unit returns to operating mode in a controlled manner Nominal PV Normally the nominal value for each control type For example for feedback mode V2 Vsq should be wired to the Main PV and Nominal PV set to the nominal value expected for V usually VLoadNominal Limit Enable Used to enable disable threshold limit Trans Enable Select Transfer Enable Proportional limit as Yes enabled or No not enabled FFType Feedforward Type Off Feedforward is disabled Trim Feedforward value is the dominant element of the output Trimmed by the control loop based on the Main PV and setpoint The feedforward value is the output from the controller Open loop FFonly control may be configured by this means Feedforward is for use only with the main control elements and the limit loop will override feedforward FFGain The entered gain value is applied to the Feedforward input
284. it is possible to wire counters in cascade mode Details for an up counter are shown in figure 6 8 2 below Down counter configuration is similar Clock Counts clock rising edges Counts the number of times Counter 1 tar get is exceeded Clock Enable Count 1 Clock high enabled Direction Ripple carry 1 Enable Count2 Target Counter 1 Overflow 1 Direction Ripple carry To further r Counter 2 counters Reset Target Overflow high reset values Reset Clear overflow Clear overflow Clear overflow High Clear overflow flag Clear overflow Count 2 Count 1 0 0 m N Ww D ul Oo N co O Hs o Re m N o Count 1 Target 4 1 0 0 0 Ripple Carry 1 Overflow 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NNNFPRPRPRPRP OOOO N HORBWNH OR WN H Figure 6 8 2 Cascading up counters Note Counter 2 above counts the number of times that Counter 1 target is exceeded By permanently enabling counter 2 and wiring counter 1 Ripple Carry output to counter 2 Clock input replacing the connection to the clock pulse stream counter 2 will indicate the number of times counter 1 target is reached rather than exceeded HA179769 Page 68 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 9 DIGITAL I O MENU Digital I O configuration Type Invert MeasVal PV CONF 3 Control D
285. ither may be used This supplies a reference for voltage measurements within the unit It is recommended that such inputs be fitted with a suitable slow blow fuse as shown in figure 2 2 2b above and figure 2 2 2g below The reference inputs for other configurations are not connected directly to the supply and fusing is therefore not required The unit has been designed to detect the loss of any of the reference signals and to suspend firing should any of them fail Firing may not be correct during the detection period As shown in the various figures the reference connection is taken down line of any isolating device so that should this device e g contactor trip out then the controller will be able to detect the loss of reference signal and shut down appropriately HA179769 Page 20 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont NEUTRAL PHASE REFERENCE INPUT Cont Polarising pins are fitted to the connectors as shown in the figure below Load cable exit Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Underneath view BO Neutral phase reference connector Neutral phase reference connector polarising pins ACCESS TO LINE AND LOAD TERMINATIONS WARNING LETHAL VOLTAGES of up to 690V ac appear at large areas of exposed metal when the doors to the power modules are open It must be ensured by the user that the units are isolated from
286. k either internal standard or external option for use with transformer secondaries for example HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 203 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Cont PHYSICAL Dimensions and fixing centres Weight See figures 2 1 1b to 2 1 1e for details See accompanying table Weight including 2 kg 4 4 Ib for driver module Ib oz Current 1 phase 2 phases 3phases 4 phases 0 1 1 6 kg b kg b kg b kg Ib 02 32 50100A 65 1143 11 0 243 15 5 342 120 0 AT ah 0 3 4 8 160A 69 152 11 8 260 16 7 36 8 21 6 47 6 ISIS os 80 250A 7 8 17 2 13 6 30 0 19 4 42 8 25 2 55 6 3 06 96 400A 11 8 26 0 21 6 47 6 31 4 69 2 141 2 90 8 07 112 500A 14 0 30 9 26 0 57 3 38 0 83 8 50 0 110 2 0 8 12 8 630A 14 5 32 0 27 0 59 5 39 5 87 1 52 0 114 6 0 9 14 4 ENVIRONMENT Temperature limits Operating 0 C to 50 C derate above 40 C as per accompanying curves 630 Amp unit Storage 25 C to 70 C 600 Humidity limits 5 to 95 RH non condensing Altitude maximum 1000 metres pm 500 Amp unit Protection IP10 EN60529 a a me 400 Amp unit Atmosphere Non explosive non corrosive and non conductive lt 400 External wiring Must comply with IEC 364 5 UL Wiring must comply with NEC and all applicable local 5 300 250 Amp unit regulations E
287. k errata pina 202 MIN Oi a KANG Gray os See YANG GA 109 Load Tap CHANGES vo ca ias 100 TPG NG Aa Relate tate Had Masha BA GANUN 85 Modbus parameter addresses 157 MinimuUntiofftimne A eiae a Wak et SAM Pehia una os 85 LoadMng Missing MAINS cies Gaan NAA thine ee SER NG 13 BIOCKS for ci sA ered ere eet 192 Alanny wok tae di nein geen ad ts clones 200 Modbus parameter addresses 170 MissMains 0 0 ccc cece eee eee eee 92 200 231 Gad OVER sce esto a Die ee ae 32 MissMainSics sie ea la hn eee 32 LOC IMAICATOR ana wie anne Rein solar deh Bp ba eee iets 32 Modbus RTU Local Remote switching 0 0c eee eee 32 PINOUB Ana NAA BA dy ke ARLAN EA GN E RG 16 A KABABA Ban Na O 107 Specifications in Nga ha BAGONG Maha Ma Ib nna 208 LOG nasan A aa see anes deal a Caba 84 Mode Logra li are Aas 33 Firing OPS aaa IA bain ues DAA 74 Logic firing Modes a aa Naa vaca eee NAA ee eee 37 Modulator ir ii a NINANG AN AS 85 LOGIE Mode liar lr ER Ea 85 Modulation period T a 176 LOS co Sake Sere Ai de DEA 54 Module apan adds 85 BO Mc 20s SA a pasion GN ol 222 226 Modbus parameter addresses 158 159 LOW LEI ited ists AIKO Dba E heat YA NG bie na 84 MONTO a NG NG MANG PA GG NIN KE Apa 123 LTC Mouse Alda PA 101 PAM naabala Bin Ga kha G Mama bal 118 A GG UG man os PNG vs 101 SA e er Cp 118 AMM adan die 101 Move selected item Application Wiring a 102 User Pages al TGA is ATA 139
288. l displaying the unit s parameters ina number of sub menus As the Engineer level menu is accessible whilst the Driver Module is on line to the power module s the majority of the displayed items are Read Only i e they can be viewed but not edited although some non critical items can be changed Full configuration may be carried out from the Configuration level menus which apart from the access menu contain the same parameters as the equivalent Engineering level menus It is normally recommended however that configuration be carried out from a pc running iTools configuration software In either case the unit goes off line as soon as Configuration mode is entered 6 1 ACCESS TO THE ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION MENUS 6 1 1 Engineer level menu The Engineer level menu is entered as follows figure 6 1 1 ED ED 1 Operate the return key repeatedly until no further changes occur Enter key Return key then hold the Return key continuously operated until the Access Goto display appears 2 Use the up or down arrow key until Engineer appears w Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key 4 Use the up or down arrow key to change the code to the Engineer level code factory default 2 but reconfigurable in the CONFIG level menu 5 Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key to display the first Summary Page Press and hold the Enter key until the first page of the top level Engineer menu appear
289. lana 31 Phin Wdog aaa 33 Menta A Naan 41 Phase angle Operator interface Control Pia e 38 Specification andan e 204 Reduction burst firing anan aaa 59 IN mam gaa Oa NA a ANAND NG 80 82 Phase reference ironia ala KANAN AA NAG 20 Out INPUT aa JA MG ANA Laban ek NG 26 AN 231 Polarising pins aao eees 21 Ayen A NENA NN dee 82 Pinout E NAA PAL LNG alae 84 CC Link ua onn nananana nna satan 14 RESOIULION e a tk C AR Genre AR A 84 Communications 1 aaa nnman nanan 16 AA NA a BAGA Ng wae e 109 DeviceNe bta a 16 AA AA O BO KA 84 Ethernet Pinions e bad TANA load 17 GA AO O ARA 32 Input Output n knna ANNA eii 11 AA 60 81 Load management aano nn 13 Definito Aeee mn An A LA ANG 130 Modbus RTU 2 aanak akan 16 Modulators AR 85 Modbus TCP 2222 esse aanak 16 SST TIE ETT Pere ee Pee 201 Profibuseo cutis ne pah Pe doe Ba va ag the eas Soe os 16 Oe ein na an RAANG NGA wasn 92 Profinet lO 0 1 naaa anan naaa 17 Over Load Shedding aaa 202 Relay Tu anan nananana aanak kkk 13 Over Temperature aa 92 200 231 Remote panel ua anna 214 AS LENG KAC DA AKA KAU 67 Connector 18 OverlThreshold A aiba dpa tasang 91 202 Watchdog relay aa nananana 13 OverTempa ai a ee alang 32 PLF ee 32 92 231 OverVoltThreshold aa 90 201 Adjusted Lulan naan anna 70 P Adjustment requ sto irai a 31 p 88 AdjustReq INEPT TEETE LIRE E a Pesta 90 A A ABG AS Calculator aa PANO nan A ES E EEI ETT 226 leido nn U
290. lar 1 Analogue input type selected during configuration as one of O to 5V O to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V O to 20mA 4 to 20 mA 2 Analogue output type selected during configuration as one of 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Resolution 12 bits accuracy 1 scale 3 Each analogue input ve terminal is individually connected to OV via a 150 Ohm resistor Figure 2 2 1c Drive unit connect or pinouts Page 12 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont WATCHDOG RELAY The watchdog relay is wired to a connector on the underside of the Driver Module figure 2 2 1d Front El Polarising pin Watchdog relay Relay 1 Relay not energised Relay energised Com shorted to NC Com shorted to NO RELAY CONTACT DEFINITIONS Watchdog relay Figure 2 2 1d Relay connector location and pinout Under normal operating conditions the watchdog relay is energised that is the common and normally open contacts are shorted Should a system error listed below become active or power to the Driver Module fail the relay is de energised common and normally closed contacts shorted T ONG ey RELAY 1 Missing mains One or more Power Module supply voltage lines is missing Thyristor short circuit Thyristor open circuit Fuse Blown Thyristor protection fuse ruptured in one or more Power Modules
291. le casing HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 209 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 12 3 THYRISTOR PROTECTION FUSES The thyristors in the Power modules are protected against excess currents by high speed fuses within the power modules See table 12 3 for details WARNING The internal fuses provide protection for the Power modules against load short circuits and may not be considered as providing any kind of branch circuit protection It is the user s responsibility to provide upstream branch circuit protection non high speed fuses circuit breakers etc to protect the installation UL The abovementioned branch circuit protection is necessary for compliance with National Electric Code NEC requirements reno cu Partnumber Fuse number Ing Tightening torque rating size 50 100A C5179139 315 R330042C M8 12 Nm 8 9 ft Ib 160A CS179139U315 R330042C M8 12 Nm 8 9 ft Ib 250A CS179139U350 170M1373 M8 12 Nm 8 9 ft Ib 400A CS179439U550 170M3422 M8 15 Nm 11 1 ft lb 500A CS029859 630 170M5412 M10 15 Nm 11 1 ft lb 630A CS029960U900 170M6413 M12 25Nm 18 5 ft Ib Table 12 3 Protection fuse details HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 210 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE APPENDIX A REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT A1 INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the recommended 32h8e remote display unit for the EPower unit This instrument is a horizontal 1 8 DIN indicator and alarm unit that performs the
292. lect the required timer type as follows Off Timer is off On Pulse The timer output switches on when In changes from Off to On and it remains on until the time period Time see below has elapsed If the input is re triggered before Time has elapsed the timer re starts Triggered below follows the state of the output On delay After the input changes from Off to On the timer output remains off until the time period defined in Time below has elapsed Once this period has elapsed if the input is still on the output switches on and remains on until the input goes Off Elapsed time is set to zero when the input goes off Triggered follows the state of the input HA179769 Page 108 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 26 1 TIMER CONFIGURATION Cont Type Cont If the input is On then as soon as a value is entered into the Time parameter below the output goes on and remains on until the Time If the input is off the output is set off and the time count down is inhibited Triggered goes On as soon as the time value is edited and remains on The Time value may be edited whilst active Once the time period has elapsed the Time value must be re edited in One Shot period has elapsed or the input goes off until input goes on again until the output goes Off order to re start the timer Min On The output remains On as long as the Input is on plus the Time
293. lecting Function Block View 4 The user to select parameter lists and to switch between parameter and wiring editors 5 Completed wiring to be downloaded to the instrument function blocks and wiring items with dashed outlines are new or have been edited since the last download HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 117 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 1 Toolbar IN Yoon v p HAY GC Xx A 34 14 wires used 66 free Jal Download wiring to Instrument Mouse Select Select nor mal mouse operation Mutually exclusive with Pan below Mouse Pan When active this causes the mouse cursor to become a hand shaped icon Allows the graphical wiring diagram to be click dragged within the GWE window aperture 100 w Zoom Allows the magnification of the wiring diagram to be edited Pan tool Whilst left clicked the cursor appears as a rectangle representing the position of GWE window aperture over the whole wiring diagram Click dragging allows this aperture to be moved freely about the diagram Rectangle size depends on Zoom magnification factor Show Hide grid This icon toggles a background alignment grid on and off Undo Redo Allows the user to undo the last action or once an undo action has taken place to undo the undo Short cuts are lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt for undo lt Ctrl gt lt R gt for re do M Cut Copy Paste Normal Cut copy and delete Copy copy without delete and Paste insert into a A funct
294. lectrical units HA179769 Page 50 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 5 ANALOGOP MENU This menu item appears only if one or more analogue outputs have been configured as anything but Off in Quickstart or if one or more analogue outputs has been enabled using iTools This provides a current or voltage output scaled from a Process Variable PV using Range High and Range Low Figure 6 5 1 shows the Main configuration submenu figure 6 5 2 shows the alarm parameters 6 5 1 Analogue output Main submenu parameters CONF Use up down arrows to select AnalogOP then Enter AnalogOP Use up down arrows to select the required Analogue output then Enter 9 Use up down arrows to select parameter to edit See figure 6 5 2 for Alarm parameters Use the up down arrows to select KEN vans Eo lype 0 10V 0 t0 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V 0 to 5V yp I ED 7 Oto 20mA or 4 to 20mA Main i ED RangeHigh Use the up down arrows to set gt RangeHigh GD 100 0 Range High Main EP RangeLow Use the up down arrows to set gt RangeLow ED 0 0 Range Low Main ED PV Input value for retransmission gt PV ED p Output value PV scaled to Range low and Range high values Jp Back to Type Figure 6 5 1 Analogue output Main menu Issue 9 Aug 12 Type Allows the output type to be set as one of 0 to 10V 1 to 5 V 2 to 10V O to 5V O to 20mA 4 to 20mA RangeHigh Used to scale the Process
295. lfi2 i h Ref Feedback Phase 1 EPower 1 V2 vilfi2 i1 Ref Feedback 2P Ph 2 del EPower 2 V2 vilfi2 Ji Ref Feedback MESA EPower 3 Neutral Figure B2 2 5 Three phase control with Delta Star transformer primary and secondary with neutral tap and 4S load B2 2 6 Three phase control with Delta Delta transformer and 3S load 1V1 112 Q111 V2 vi 12 12 Phase 1 Ref Feedback sil s2 ase 1 EPower 1 a 7 Cal D 6 3 N2 vi 12 12 Phase 2 Ref EP a 2P A s ower Fr Ai 3V1 312 311 gt V2 vilfi2 i1 Bai si 2 Ref Feedback ae EPower 3 Figure B2 2 6 Three phase control with Delta Delta transformer and 3S load HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 241 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE B2 2 7 Three phase control with 6D primary and 4S secondary with 4S load Commonly used in salt baths and other heat treatment applications this configuration results in lower thyristor currents and therefore costs at the expense of higher cabling costs Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 1 lt
296. loat32 02F6 758 Network 4 Meas IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network float32 02F8 760 Network 4 Meas P True power measurement float32 0300 768 Network 4 Meas PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 02FF 767 Network 4 Meas PF Power Factor float32 0302 770 Network 4 Meas O Reactive Power float32 0303 771 Network 4 Meas S Apparent power measurement float32 0301 769 Network 4 Meas V Vrms of the load float32 02F9 761 Network 4 Meas V2 Vrms2 of the load float32 02FA 762 Network 4 Meas V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 02FB 763 Network 4 Meas Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 02FC 764 Network 4 Meas Vline Line voltage measurement float32 02EF 751 Network 4 Meas Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 02F0 752 Network 4 Meas Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 02F1 753 Network 4 Meas VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network float32 0310 784 Network 4 Meas Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 02FD 765 Network 4 Meas VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0308 776 Network 4 Meas VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network float32 02FE 766 Network 4 Meas Z Load impedance float32 0304 712 Network 4 Meas Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0305 773 Network 4 Meas Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0306 774 Network 4 Setup ChopOffNb Chop Off Number uint8 0315 789 Network 4 Setup ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1 uint8 0313 787 Network 4 Setup ChopOffThreshold2 Cho
297. loop Main voltage fault Output short circuit Partial load fault Partial load unbalance Temperature pre alarm Total Load Failure RESET ERRORS Invalid RAM checksum DSP no response DSP task Watchdog STANDBY ERRORS Invalid Power Module Revision Hardware mismatch Power Module n Ribbon Fault SYSTEM ALARMS Fuse Blown Mains Frequency Fault Missing mains NetworkDip Over Temperature Power Module 24V fault Thyristor Open circuit Thyristor Short circuit Table 5 2 2 Event types and IDs Notes 1 Event ID Fuse blown may appear in association with either Event Type System Alarm Network n or Event Type Power module n Error 2 Event ID Watchdog appears in association with Event Type General error and indicates that the microprocessor in the Driver Module has performed a watchdog reset 3 Event ID Watchdog fault appears with Event Type Power Module n Error and indicates that the relevant Power Module PIC microprocessor has performed a watchdog reset 5 2 3 Strategy Standby mode For SCADA systems in order to determine Standby mode the user should use bit 8 of the Faultdet Strategy Status parameter not the Instrument Mode parameter This is because Instrument Mode reflects user selection not error states such as Hardware Mismatch HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 43 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 ENGINEER AND CONFIGURATION LEVEL MENUS These two menu sets are mostly identica
298. m 18 4 ft Ib z ha N do N Front view SIS I E E Door Dimensions in millimetres inches Ln md len open O IN Y lx YI pia EXE AS E A see h YAN E F G H 163 248 Load cable entry i gt Doe mabaho ag PEE A 0 98 sq a zp 4 LO ie 3 a E El 50m FEI 5 ze AN x dle Mi ANN N o E BF 3k WZ N Na YON Bid TE Overall Widths mm Note Units are shown with individual No of phases 1 2 3 4 mounting brackets Multi phase units come Door closed 189 5 314 5 439 5 564 5 supplied with two three or four phase brackets Dooropen 251 0 376 0 501 0 626 0 as appropriate See table below for details Overall Widths inches Upper bracket Lower bracket No of phases 1 2 3 4 2 phase Use A and B Use E and F Door closed 7 46 12 38 17 30 22 22 3 phase Use A B and C Use E F and G Door open 9 88 14 80 19 72 24 65 4 phase Use A B C and D Use E F G and H Figure 2 1 1f Fixing details 500 Amp 630A units HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 9 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 2 2 1 Driver Module SUPPLY VOLTAGE The Line and neutral supply voltage connections are terminated using a 2 way connector SK8 located on the underside of the unit as shown in figure 2 2 1a below It is recommended that a 3 Amp slow blow fuse be incorporated in order to protect the supply voltage wiring FAN SUPPLIES CAUTION The Driver Module power supply is capable of working from any s
299. m is considered to be non active Alarms cannot be acknowledged until the trigger source has returned to a non active state 10 2 1 Total Load Failure TLF No load is connected to one or more power controllers The detection is based on RMS load current and RMS load voltage of the last mains half cycle In case of total load failure a load voltage is measured even though load current is equal or close to zero This method might not indicate the failed phase accurately in all load configurations e g closed delta configuration for 3 phase load 10 2 2 Output short circuit Firing is stopped if a short circuit is detected in the output circuit 10 2 3 Chop Off Triggered by one of two user configurable parameters viz ChopOff1 Threshold and ChopOff2 Threshold to be found in the Network setup area of configuration section 6 20 2 ChopOff1 Threshold triggers the chop off alarm when the load current meets or exceeds the threshold for more than 5 seconds Firing stops and will not re start until the alarm is acknowledged The threshold can be set to any value between 10096 and 15096 of the nominal load current ChopOff2 Threshold triggers the chop off alarm if the load current meets or exceeds the ChopOff1 threshold more than Number Chop Off times in Window Chop Off seconds where Number Chop Off is configurable between 1 and 16 and Window Chop Off can take values between 1 and 65535 seconds both values inclusive
300. mDet TLF Process alarm detection status Total Load Failure uint8 01FE 510 Network 2 AlmDis ChopOff Process alarm Chop Off uint8 01F0 496 Network 2 AlmDis FreqFault System alarm Frequency Fault uint8 01ED 493 Network 2 AlmDis FuseBlown System alarm Fuse Blown uint8 O1EA 490 Network 2 AlmDis MainsVoltFault Process alarm Mains Voltage Fault uint8 01F3 499 Network 2 AlmDis MissMains System alarm Missing Mains uint8 01E7 487 Network 2 AlmDis NetworkDips System alarm Mains Voltage Dips uint8 01EC 492 Network 2 AlmDis OpenThyr System alarm Open Thyristor uint8 01E9 489 Network 2 AlmDis OverCurrent Indication alarm Over Current uint8 01F5 501 Network 2 AlmDis OverTemp System alarm Over Temperature uint8 01EB 491 Network 2 AlmDis PB24VFail System alarm Power Board 24V Failure uint8 01EE 494 Network 2 AlmDis PLF Process alarm Partial Load Failure uint8 01F1 497 Network 2 AlmDis PLU Process alarm Partial Load Unbalance uint8 01F2 498 Network 2 AlmDis PreTemp Process alarm Pre Temperature uint8 01F4 500 Network 2 AlmDis ThyrSC System alarm Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 01E8 488 Network 2 AlmDis TLF Process alarm Total Load Failure uint8 01EF 495 Network 2 AlmLat ChopOff Process alarm latch Chop Off uint8 021D 541 Network 2 AlmLat FreqFault System alarm latch Frequency Fault uint8 021A 538 Network 2 AlmLat FuseBlown System alarm latch Fuse Blown uint8 0217 535 Network 2 AlmLat MainsVoltFault Process alarm latch Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0220 544 N
301. may be individually inverted and the output can also be inverted thus allowing the full range of logic functions to be implemented CONF gt Lgc8 EP D N Operation Use up down arrows to select Logic number then Enter Use return ED one or more times from within menu to return to this page Select AND OR Exclusive OR or OFF Lgc8 N lt D 3 Number of Select number of inputs from two to eight 3 Number o Eb 8 yi Use Enter key to move from input to input current Lgc8 N ED Invert niy 8 selection flashes Use up down key to select 3 Invert 0 invert solid yellow or not for the current selection A Final Enter quits Invert configuration Lgc8 N ES Out Invert No Output not inverted 3 Out Inve 4 No Yes Output inverted Lgc8 N ED In1 3in1 Eb 2 Off NO CA gt ED Input states 1 to N where N is the number of inputs selected two to eight i inclusive l BO Y gt The output status of the selected logic function Jp Back to Operation Figure 6 17 Lgc8 Menu Operation Allows selection of AND OR or Exclusive OR functions or OFF AND output is high only if all inputs are high OR output is high if any or all inputs are high XOR output is high if an odd number of inputs are high and low if an even number of inputs are high Logically a cascaded XOR function In1 In 2 In 3 In 4 9 In 8 Number of i
302. ment Display parameters Allows the user to select display language and to view the unit s serial number CONF gt Instr Instr 3 Display See figure 6 14 2 for Config menu Display Select Language Use up down arrows to Select L a English select display language Display Displays unit s serial number read only 3 Serial N al gt Back to Select Language Figure 6 14 1 Instrument Display submenu Serial Num Read only Displays the factory set Serial number of the unit Select Language The up and down arrow keys are used to select the required language from English French German or Italian Correct at time of writing further languages may be added during the life of this manual HA179769 Page 76 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 14 2 Instrument Config parameters Allows the user access to the current power network configuration CONF 3 Instr See figure 6 14 1 for Display menu Use up down arrows to enter the number of power modules fitted Confirmation required Power Modules Use up down arrows to enter number of I O mod ules fitted if any Use up down arrows to 2Phasel select power network type Use up down arrows to select coupling type For 2 x 2 leg systems use up down arrows to select coupling type for second load Displays revision level o power module 1 Displays revision level o power module 2 Displays revision level o power
303. mitation Indication alarm signalling status Limitation uint8 0449 1097 Control 4 AlmSig PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status PV transfer uint8 0448 1096 Control 4 AlmStop ClosedLoop Process alarm stop Closed loop break uint8 0450 1104 Control 4 AlmStop Limitation Indication alarm stop Limitation uint8 0452 1106 Control 4 AlmStop PVTransfer Indication alarm stop PV transfer uint8 0451 1105 Control 4 Diag Output Output of the controller float32 043F 1087 Control 4 Diag PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 0440 1088 Control 4 Diag Status Status of the controller uint8 043E 1086 Control 4 Limit PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 0437 1079 Control 4 Limit PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 0438 1080 Control 4 Limit PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 0439 1081 Control 4 Limit SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 043A 1082 Control 4 Limit SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 043B 1083 Control 4 Limit SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 043C 1084 Control 4 Limit Tl Integral time of the limit loop float32 043D 1085 Control 4 Main PV The main PV of the controller float32 0432 1074 Control 4 Main SP Main SP to control at float32 0433 1075 Control 4 Main TI Integral time ofthe main loop float32 0436 1078 Control 4 Main TransferPV The transfer proportional limit PV float32 0434 1076 Control 4 Main TransferSpan The transfer proportional limit span float32 0435 1077 Control 4 Setup EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit u
304. module or both has failed to understand the communication commands responses Comms timeout The phase 1 2 3 or 4 power module indicated that it wished to report a fault to the driver module but the communications transaction was not completed As for phase 1 above but for phase 2 3 or 4 Header information in power module 1 non volatile memory was found to be invalid at the instrument s start up self test procedure As for power module 1 above but for power module 2 3 or 4 The phase 1 2 3 or 4 power module microprocessor has detected that its watchdog timer has timed out A reset has been performed and this has caused the power module to report the fault The driver module s microprocessor has detected that its watchdog timer has timed out and has therefore performed a reset causing the instrument to restart The event log could not be restored at start up The calibration data stored in the non volatile memory of power module 1 2 3 or 4 is invalid and the default calibration will be used instead Invalid RAM checksum Internal fault DSP no response Internal fault DSP task watchdog Internal fault FuseConfig The driver module s internal fuses are incorrectly configured ErrRestart An error has occurred that requires the instrument to be restarted HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 33 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 QUICKSTART At first switch on the Driver Module enters the QuickStart menu
305. module 3 Displays revision level o power module 4 L jp Back to Power Modules Figure 6 14 2 Instrument Config submenu Power Modules Configures the number of power modules fitted If left at zero the system automatically determines the number of modules fitted and sets the parameter accordingly IO Modules Specifies the number of optional I O modules fitted If left at zero the system automatically determines the number of modules fitted and sets the parameter accordingly Network Type Selects the type of network to be used from 3 Phase Single Phase or 2 Phase Load Coupling For a three phase system this allows the user to select the wiring configuration from 3Star 3Delta 4Star or 6Delta For a two phase system only 3Delta or 3Star is selectable Load 2 Coupling As Load Coupling above but for the second load in 2 x 2 leg systems PwrMod1Rev Shows the revision level of power module 1 PwrMod2Rev Shows the revision level of power module 2 PwrMod3Rev Shows the revision level of power module 3 PwrMod4Rev Shows the revision level of power module 4 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 77 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 15 IP MONITOR MENU This monitors a wired parameter and records its maximum value minimum value and the cumulative time that its value spends above a configurable threshold An alarm can be set up to become active when the time over threshold excee
306. ms User Subnet_Mask_1 1st byte of Subnet mask uint8 0774 1908 Comms User Subnet_Mask_2 2nd byte of Subnet mask uint8 0775 1909 Comms User Subnet_Mask_3 3rd byte of Subnet mask uint8 0776 1910 Comms User Subnet_Mask_4 4th byte of Subnet mask uint8 0777 1911 Comms User Unitldent Unit Identity Enable 0 Strict 1 Loose 2 Instr uint8 0787 1927 Control 1 AlmAck ClosedLoop Process alarm ack Closed loop break uint8 03B7 951 O No Ack 1 Ack Control 1 AlmAck Limitation Indication alarm ack Limitation uint8 03B9 953 O No Ack 1 Ack HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 143 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 144 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Control 1 AlmAck PVTransfer Indication alarm ack PV transfer uint8 03B8 952 O No Ack 1 Ack Control 1 AlmDet ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status Closed loop break uint8 O3AE 942 O Inactive 1 Active Control 1 AlmDet Limitation Indication alarm detection status Limitation uint8 03B0 944 O Inactive 1 Active Control 1 AlmDet PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status PV transfer uint8 O3AF 943 O Inactive 1 Active Control 1 AlmDis ClosedLoop Process alarm Closed loop break uint8 03 AB 939 O Enable 1 Disable Control 1 AlmDis Limitation Indication alarm Limitation O Enable 1 Disable uint8 03AD 941 Control 1 AlmDis PVTransfer Indication alarm PV t
307. n di sao 90 Index HA179769 Page vi Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE PLM Channel Analoguesinput 442 024 sated dt Muay satya 50 Configuration with iTools 0 00 e eee 190 Analogue Outputs na aaa aoa eee sat anita 51 PEM TV Gi tse sien maan dd Ala Bale Annee 193 Digital VO cote Ky ante inet toes Cone oh enh MMS 69 PLM Chant ts Sess Ga Naa Pete DNA hasaan 99 Relay Sour enais reei PUDER ab KINANA TAW TAG ee 105 Blocks AA nih inchs ae a heel Sens ee 191 Remote panel PU aan 226 Modbus parameter addresses 170 171 PV Transfer ABAYA AA AA PEE 85 99 Alarm Acknowledge aaa 65 PLM Ut soaks aman ban Es 99 Alarm Detection papala Db 0bad ca oe ahha 62 PEMOUE to A a Sad eek nha aa ak Aa TG 96 Alarm Disable 0 0 0 0 0c ccc cece eee 61 PU PAG AA APA ata 32 92 231 Alarm Late hi ad a lanG Nan Lena napa la db 64 PLUthreshold pap oscar oe te ad 91 202 Alarm Signalling 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 63 BA teach eats Shean tees eee E E E a 97 197 Alarm STOP wor cide a4 thd NG GNG PLAN Aka 66 PMOD PV AL Remote panel aan 226 COMER gan ELA BAN aa eater ee 231 PM tO VS Gaan ka Nah ns arka ATA NANG Um 59 OIT a a LABAG KANAL Gaan 231 PWR indicator si add e a Dn ARENA RE 32 WD OG ies haa ag Pinag ma A oe sree na nab a map nba 231 A a YN PNG GP AMA a dna df 33 PIMOG AA e a ac AM hie ute dn an coe RAR 32 PWE A EEProO Mas data bd Boe deed NG 33 Polarising pins Pwe RIBBON Naa ANG dead
308. n5 AnSwitch In AnSwitch In7 AnSwitch In8 AnSwitch LowLimit AnSwitch Select Counter Clock Counter Direction Counter Enable Counter Target Digital Invert Digital Type Energy AutoScaleUnits Energy PulseLen Energy PulseScale Energy TotEnergyUnit Energy Type Energy UsrEnergyUnit Faultdet GlobalDis FiringOP DelayedTrigger FiringOP LoadType FiringOP SafetyRamp FiringOP SoftStart FiringOP SoftStop IPMonitor AlarmDays IPMonitor AlarmTime IPMonitor In IPMonitor Threshold Lgc2 FallbackType Lgc2 Hysteresis Lgc2 In1 Lgc2 In2 Lgc2 Invert Lgc2 Oper Lgc8 In1 Lgc8 In2 Lgc8 In3 Lgc8 In4 Lgc8 In5 Lgc8 In6 Lgc8 In7 Lgc8 In8 Lgc8 InInvert Lgc8 Numin Lgc8 Oper Lgc8 Outinvert Limit Control SP1 Limit Control SP2 Limit Control SP3 Page 132 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 5 FIELDBUS GATEWAY Cont EE CHECKSUM FAIL ERROR Cont Limit Control TI Main AnalogIP RangeHigh Main AnaloglP RangeLow Main AnalogIP Type Main AnalogOP RangeHigh Main AnalogOP RangeLow Main AnalogOP Type Main Control SP Main Control TI Main Control TransferSpan Main PLM Period Main PLM Type MainPrm LTC S1 MainPrm LTC S2 MainPrm LTC S3 MainPrm LTC TapNb MainPrm LTC Type Math2 Fallback Math2 FallbackVal Math2 HighLimit Math2 In1 Math2 In1Mul Math2 In2 Math2 In2Mul Math2 LowLimit Math2 Oper Math2 Resolution Math2 Select Math2 Units Modultr CycleTime Modultr LgcMode Modultr MinOnTime
309. nally re scaled as kilo values with 1 decimal place Parameter Name Condition Control n Setup NominalPV When Control n Main PV is wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Main PV When wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Main TransferPV When wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Main TransferSpan When Control n Main PV is wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit PV1 When wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit PV2 When wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit PV3 When wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit SP1 When Control n Limit PV1 is wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit SP2 When Control n Limit PV2 is wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq Control n Limit SP3 When Control n Limit PV3 is wired from Network n Meas P Vsq or Isq SetpProv n Remote1 When in Engineering units AND Control m Main PV is wired from Network m Meas P Vsq or Isq where m the instance of the Control block to which SetpProv n is wired SetpProv n Remote2 When in Engineering units AND Control m Main PV is wired from Network m Meas P Vsq or Isq where m the instance of the Control block to which SetpProv n is wired SetpProv n LocalSP When in Engineering units AND Control m Main PV is wired from Network m Meas P Vsq or Isq where m the instance of the Control block to which SetpProv n is wired HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 141 EPOWER CONTRO
310. ne PLM Network and the three phase units on another HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 199 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 10 ALARMS 10 1 SYSTEM ALARMS System alarms are considered to be Major Events which prevent proper operation of the system and the relevant module is placed in standby mode In some configurations e g four x single phase it is possible that a system alarm generated in one power module will set only that module into standby mode and the other three phases will continue as normal The following subsections describe each of the possible system alarms 10 1 1 Missing mains Supply power is missing from the relevant power module If one or more phase out of two or three phase systems are missing the system stops firing altogether in order to avoid unbalanced firing The alarm trigger depends on the type of load coupling 10 1 2 Thyristor short circuit A thyristor short circuit leads to current flow even when not firing 10 1 3 Thyristor open circuit This fault means that no current flow occurs even when the thyristor s should be firing The fault is detected is by measuring the load voltage so the fault is not detected if the remote sensing option is fitted 10 1 4 Fuse blown High speed fuses are fitted in series with the thyristors in order to protect them 10 1 5 Over temperature The thyristor heat sink temperature is measured and if it is considered to be too high for the current application the over t
311. ne or more Partial Load Unbalance alarm has been detected TLF One or more Total Load failure alarm has been detected HA179769 Page 32 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 3 4 5 Configuration errors InvPAdata InvWires 3 4 6 Standby errors PwrModRev HWDiffers ErrDSP Pwr1 Ribbon Pwr2 3 4 Ribbon Invalid parameter database The non volatile parameter database has become corrupt and should not be relied upon Invalid wiring table The non volatile storage of user soft wiring has become corrupt and should not be relied upon Power Module revision One or more power units has an invalid revision number or its revision level is not compatible with the firmware version of the driver module The fitted hardware does not match the instrument configuration Error s reported by the Digital Signal Processor during the instrument s start up self test procedure A fault was detected in the power module 1 ribbon cable during the instrument s start up self test procedure As above but for power module 2 3 or 4 3 4 7 Power module errors Ph1 2 3X4 ComErr The phase 1 2 3 or 4 power module has attempted to communicate with the driver Ph1ComTout Ph2 3 4 ComTout Pwr1EEProm Pwr2 3 4 EEProm Ph1 2 3X4 Wdog 3 4 8 General errors Watchdog LogFault PWR1 2 3 4 cal 3 4 9 Reset errors InvRamCsum DSPnoRSP DSP Wdog 3 4 10 Fatal errors module and either the driver module or the power
312. nector Neutral phase reference Either pin 11 12 Vv V2 Load Load voltage External feedback connections optional Figure B2 External feedback connector locations and pinout HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 237 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE B2 1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Conductor carrying current to be Feedback signal eo e Sl ai p mee gt gt PP Current transformer S2 Figure B2 1a Current transformer labelling The currenttransformer terminal S1 must be connected to terminal 11 ofthe relevant power unit the current transformer terminal S2 must be connected to the power unit terminal 12 Note S1 and S2 here are not related to the load transformer secondary labels S1 and S2 The arrow on the current transformer must point towards the load if the associated voltage tapping is connected to V1 The arrow on the current transformer must point away from the load if the voltage tapping is connected to V2 Figure B2 1b shows some correct and some incorrect examples Arrow must point towards the load if the associated voltage feedback is connected to V1 OK Wrong g gt z si 752 s 1 V1 V1 ES V2 D v2 Q y E 27 3 3 G So Ko D D Ss opi S OM w w Qi o fit fit Arrow must point away from
313. nel if fitted The power consumed can be displayed in one of number of units ranging from W to GW Figure 6 10 shows the menu CONF gt Energy Use up down arrows to select energy number then Enter Use return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Eb Shows the instantaneous measured power Normally wired to Network Meas P parameter Does not appear for the Global Energy Counter 1 Output fleetingly reset to zero O Output totalises Resetting the global counter resets all Energy counters 1 Output frozen at current value 0 Output totalises Holding the global counter holds all Energy counters Energy consumed by this network since reset 0 0 Global energy consumption this network The parameter value is not resettable 0 0 0 No pulse output 1 Pulse output enabled Units scaling for this Network Select 1Wh 10Wh 100Wh 1kWh 10kWh 100kWh 1MWh 10MWHh 100MWh 1GWh Energy N 3 UsrUnit Energy N pai xl As above but for Global consumption value 2 TotUnit Pulse length scaling Select Disable 1Wh 10Wh Energy N 100Wh 1kWh 10kWh 100kWh MWh gt PulseSca Minimum pulse length in ms Energy N 20 Valid entries 0 to 32000 inclusive gt PulseLen Energy N Global This is the global counter 3 IsGlobal No No This is a network counter
314. nently there is a configuration error in the network HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 195 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Cont NUMCHAN This parameter indicates how many channels on this Station are participating in the Load Management process See also TotalChannels below Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values LoadMng Station NumChan Always Read only Uint8 Min 1 Max 4 Note It is not necessary that all channels in a Station participate in the Load Management process TOTALSTATION This parameter indicates how many Stations are participating inthe Load Management process on this PLM link Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values TOTALCHANNELS LoadMng Network TotalStation Always Read only Uint8 Min 1 Max 63 This shows how many Channels are participating in the Load Management process on this PLM link Function block location Parameter name Accessible Minimum access level for editing Type Values LoadMng Network TotalChannels Always Read only Uint8 Min 1 Max 64 HA179769 Page 196 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Cont PMAX Indicates the total amount of power which is installed on the Load Management Network and is
315. nergy counter parameters eee eee 71 6102 PA AA 72 611 EVENT LOG MENU nA oe ANAN TUNA KA NG LABAN oe eee ee OS GNG 72 6 12 FAULT DETECTION MENU Stilo ei NUNG tad 73 6 13 FIRING OUTPUT MENU ss marcar date date a Gb cee wee 74 6 14 INSTRUMENT MENU oo esas cotas dice at e NG PO Ai 76 6 14 1 Instrument Display parameters 00 e eee eee eee eee 76 6 14 2 Instrument Config parameters 1 1 a 77 6 15 1P MONITOR MENU magnasang BULB TAKEN di holds g Oe ace Aas 78 6 16 LGC2 TWO INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR MENU uu 200 80 621 6 1 Lage Pardmeters iii NANGANAK HEPA LUNG NG PAGG NAAN Teas 80 6 17 LGC8 EIGHT INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR MENU 222220000 82 6 18 MATH2 MENU danna eng NG ND GEN PE eae ieee Fb tans NGA NUNG ES GANG 83 6 19 MODULATOR MENUS 350325 is Na 2G trar 85 6 20 NETWORK MENU csc la palag nori a cla hahaah dats nap ba pka 86 6 20 Meas SUBMENU rrm a 4 pee Fenda dads gH Be Ged NG SREY KATANA Olas 87 6 20 2 Network Setup SUBMENU sesos iia sai eee Bene is See 89 PARTIAL LOAD FAILURE CALCULATIONS 2200000 91 6 20 3 NetWork alas eG a MANG NG NG manahan eek Ba gis BALANG 92 NETWORK ALMDIS SUBMENU 0 0 eee ccc cece 92 NETWORK ALMDET SUBMENU 0 0 cece ences 93 NETWORK ALMSIG SUBMENU 2222222 93 NETWORK ALMLAT SUBMENU 222222000 93 NETWORK ALMACK SUBMENU uz 93 NETWORK ALMSTOP SUBMENU 0 0 ccc cece eee 93 6 21 PLM STATION AND NETWORK LM PARAMETERS MENU
316. ng In a system with several heating zones this allows a strategy to be implemented which distributes power over time in such a way thatthe overall power consumption remains as steady as possible thus reducing the peak power demand ofthe system Load Shedding In a system with several heating zones this allows a strategy to be implemented which limits the available load power at each heating zone and or switches zones off according to a defined priority level thus allowing the maximum running power consumption to be controlled The total running power is the maximum power supplied to the loads integrated over a 50 minute period See the Predictive Load Management option description section 9 for more details HA179769 Page 14 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont CONFIGURATION PORT This RJ11 connector located on the front of the Driver Module figure 2 2 1b is used for direct connection to a PC using ElA232C standard Optional jack plug EM a r 24V dc 1 l N C 1 2 mme 1 omm Rx l OVI 3 o Tx l DTR l Txi 4 l l N C 6 mmo Note omm 6 DSR sal Jack plug option a pi RTS Processor module from the epower manufacturer gm i CTS l L omm 9 f N C 9 way D type socket To PC EIA232 port REAR VIEW 24V dc 1 mmo omm N C 2 mamo 2 Tx 0V 3 1 7 3 RX TX 4 omm 4 Rx 5 m omm 5 N C 6 ae om 6
317. nimum value reached by the parameter since last reset This value acts as a trigger for the Time Above measurement Shows how many complete days the parameter value has spent above the Threshold value continuously or intermittently since last reset The Time Above value should be added to Days Above in order to find the total time Shows how many hours minutes and tenths of minutes that the parameter value has spent above the threshold value continuously or intermittently since last reset or since the last complete day once the value exceeds 23 59 9 it increments the Days Above value and resets itself to 00 00 0 The Time Above value should be added to Days Above in order to find the total time Together with Alarm Time this defines a total time above threshold value which when exceeded sets the Alarm out parameter On See Alarm Days above Reset Resetting causes the Max and Min values to be set to the current value sets the Days Above value to zero and the Time Above value to 00 00 0 Status Shows the status of the input parameter as either Good or Bad HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 79 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 16 LGC2 TWO INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR MENU This logic operator block provides a number of two input logic operations The output is always a Boolean logic O or 1 no matter whether the inputs are analogue or digital For anal
318. nitor context menu runnur nu 123 A Na AGE a A ha a as a Wire context MENU 6 ec eee 122 mDe Burst Analogue output pm peeve rie keria cerns 52 AP ak ma MA An AA 37 Control maana 62 Variable Xa naa mr DAA BRGY Paka PA gn ID tad Was ka 38 Load Management a 98 101 c Network AA 93 f A DER EE T AEE A E E QNG 101 Capture current values into a data set 136 CC Link HA179769 Index Issue 9 Aug 12 Page EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE PI OURS NANG Asaran mangan AN hala baon 17 Copy Specifications ls 208 COMMENT os mresa i pra Jaane akan reer Dalan 122 COn ai e ANA ios tee Ghana 124 Diagram fragment o 118 Chain Conan naam A LAWA ay GNG 123 Fragment to files cscs ov ges cava va cease esa eves 124 Checksum fail error 131 Function block context menu 124 Chop Off si ade hele CBee Ad os AN SSS 40 92 231 Orpesa Nr an an 124 ChopOff sat aaa eae Loewe Amanda va al 32 Graphical Wiring Editor 00 118 ChopOff1Threshold aan 90 201 MOTO rimas Laa LPG e Paced i n 123 ChopOff2Threshold aaa 90 201 Parameter ica YANA ids dd NANA 129 A AA PA AA 209 Wire context Menu a 121 Clear the selected data set 136 Wiring editor items a 124 Click to Select Output eti paneha 119 121 COUNT A cde ANA E Sa ART DEL PANGPANG 68 Clip Good Clip bad jai maa ma LAG 84 Counter Closed Loop MEN Usina km
319. nnection from one or more power modules is missing or open circuit CHOP OFF Triggered if the load current meets or exceeds a specified threshold for more than five seconds Firing stops until either the alarm is acknowledged or until 100mS has elapsed according to configuration See Network Setup for further details PLF Partial Load Failure The alarm is triggered if a change in static load impedance is detected over a mains cycle phase angle mode or burst period burst or logic mode The sensitivity of the measurement can be configured as described in the Network Setup area of EPower configuration PLU Partial Load Unbalance This alarm is triggered when the difference between the maximum and minimum currents of a three phase system exceeds a configurable threshold See Network Setup for further details VOLT FAULT One or more phases missing or out of limits PRE TEMP Acts as a warning that the operating temperature is unexpectedly high This alarm becomes active before unit operation is stopped PMOD WDOG One or more power module watchdogs has performed a reset PMOD COM ERR A power module communications error has been detected Typically this would be caused by a damaged inter module ribbon cable PMOD T OUT A power module communications time out error has occurred Typically this would be caused by a damaged inter module ribbon cable CLOSED LP The control loop cannot achieve setpoint despite the loop demanding 0 or 100 power Typic
320. nput range for scaling to process units float32 05D2 1490 O AnalogIP 1 Main Type Specify the input type uint8 05D0 1488 0 0to 10V 1 1to5V 2 2to 10V 3 0to 5V 4 0to20mA 5 4to20mA IO AnaloglP 2 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 05E2 1506 IO AnaloglP 2 Main PV Process variable float32 05E3 1507 1O AnalogIP 2 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05E0 1504 IO AnaloglP 2 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 O5E1 1505 IO AnaloglIP 2 Main Type Specify the input type as IP1 above uint8 05DF 1503 IO AnaloglP 3 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 05F1 1521 10 AnalogIP 3 Main PV Process variable float32 05F2 1522 IO AnaloglP 3 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 O5EF 1519 IO AnaloglP 3 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 05FO 1520 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec IO AnaloglP 3 Main Type Specify the input type as IP1 above uint8 O5EE 1518 1O AnaloglP 4 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 0600 1536 1O AnaloglP 4 Main PV Process variable float32 0601 1537 IO AnaloglP 4 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 O5FE 1534 IO AnalogIP 4 Main RangeLow Low input range for scaling to process units float32 O5FF 1535 IO AnalogIP 4 Main Type Specify the input typ
321. nputs Set the number of inputs to between two and eight inclusive This number defines how many invert keys appear in Invert and how many Input value pages appear Invert Between two and eight piano keys appear according to the number of inputs selected at the bottom line ofthe display with the left most one input 1 flashing The up or down arrow can be used to select invert for this input key goes solid yellow and or the Enter key can be used to move to the next input Once all the inputs have been accessed the final operation of the Enter key quits the Invert configuration and output invert is entered Out Invert No normal output Yes means that the output is inverted allowing NAND and NOR functions to be implemented In1 The state on or off of the first input In2 onwards The state of the remaining inputs Out The Output value of the function i e On or Off HA179769 Page 82 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 18 MATH2 MENU This feature allows a range of two input mathematical functions to be performed The available functions are listed below Off Out Resolution XXXXX Math2 N 3 Fallback CG BIT O Use up down arrows to select Math2 number then Enter Use return key EB one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use the up down keys to select required maths function see text for details Use the up down ke
322. ns can be added deleted from the view using the Columns item of the Explorer or context menus figure 7 4b HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 127 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 4 PARAMETER EXPLORER Cont Explorer View Options Window Copy Parameter Ctrl C Copy Parameter Ctrl C amp f Parameter Properties Parameter Properties D Parameter Help Shift F1 ef Parameter Help Shift F1 NG Edit Wire F bt Paste Wire ire Delete Wire ff Follow Wire 5 o v Address Address Displ v add ne Address Display ress Y Wired From F Limits ng Context Menu gt i ng Explorer Menu Y Wired From gt Comment s normas gt Figure 7 4b Column enable disable 7 4 1 Parameter explorer detail Figure 7 4 1a shows a typical parameter table This particular parameter has a number of subfolders associated with it and each of these is represented by a tab across the top of the table 33 epower 123 456 789 100 502 1D001 EPower Parameter Explorer Network 1 OB a e a a Setup AlmDis AlmDet AlmSig AlmLat AlmAck AlmStop Description Low Limit High Limit Wired From a Network 1 Meas 15 parameters 17 hidden Frequency Frequency of the line 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Vline Line voltage measurement 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 IsqBurst Average square value of loac 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 lsq Square value of the load cur
323. nt of the SetProv function block if it is enabled and its SPSelect parameter is set to Local If the value is greater than 99999 the displayed value is divided by 1000 and shown with suffix K in the format nnnn nK K kilo E G a value of 1000000 would be displayed as 1000 0K SP SEL Setpoint Select Available only in level 2 and if the associated SetProv function block in EPower is enabled allowing the user to select between local LSP and remote setpoints rSP E RST Energy Reset Available only in level 2 and if the Energy Counter is enabled in EPower User Energy total can be reset IRMS1 2 3 RMS Load current for phase 1 2 3 3 phase networks only VRMS1 2 3 RMS Load voltage for phase 1 2 3 3 phase networks only IAVG Average load current 3 phase networks only VAVG Average load voltage 3 phase networks only A5 2 3 Setpoint editing from the 32h8E Operating the up or down arrow key from any of the power summary displays e g IRMS takes the user to the WSP display Further operation of the up or down arrow causes the display to switch to SP provided that the unit is operationg in Local mode MAN illuminated rather than Remote mode REM illuminated In Rmote mode the SP parameter does not appear The mode can be changed between local and remote from the SPSEL parameter at level 2 or from the EPower operator interface iTools or over a comms link HA179769 Page 222 Issue 9 Aug 12
324. nt32 0821 2081 CustPage 3 CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 0822 2082 CustPage 3 CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 0823 2083 CustPage 3 Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0824 2084 CustPage 3 Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0825 2085 CustPage 3 Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 0826 2086 CustPage 3 Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 0827 2087 CustPage 3 UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4028 16424 CustPage 3 UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 402D 16429 CustPage 3 UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 4032 16434 CustPage 3 UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 4037 16439 CustPage 4 CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 0834 2100 CustPage 4 CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 0835 2101 CustPage 4 CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 0836 2102 CustPage 4 CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 0837 2103 CustPage 4 Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0838 2104 CustPage 4 Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0839 2105 CustPage 4 Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 083A 2106 CustPage 4 Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 083B 2107 CustPage 4 UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 403C 16444 CustPage 4 UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4041 16449 CustPage 4 UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 4046 16454 CustPage 4 UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 404B 16459 Energy 1 AutoScaleUnits Autoscale energy units 0 No 1 Yes bool OBOF 2831 Energy 1 Hold Hold the output of the counter bool 0B05 2821 Energy 1 Input Input to totalise float32 0B06 2822 Energy 1 prvTotEnergy Internal value of the Energy in Watt hours float32 0B10 2832 Energy 1 prvUsrEnergy Internal value of the
325. ntLog Event27ID Event 27 Identification 8 sys Alm N3 Act 40 Prc Alm ExtAckd uint8 0743 1859 EventLog Event27Type Event 27 type aa aro kA 12 cnl sl Sere uint8 0742 1858 EventLog Event28ID Event 28 Identificatio n SkA H Na Ac a3 ZPre Am bae uint8 0745 1861 EventLog Event28Type Event 28 type i ERAR ro a ag Ff Spe An Hana uint8 0744 1860 EventLog Event29ID Event 29 Identification 14 Pre Am n pa ib pre ain baha uint8 0747 1863 EventLog Event29Type Event 29 type Spica NI REEL las fea bal uint8 0746 1862 EventLog Event30ID Event 30 Identificatio 17 P lm NZA 49 F Am bianca uint8 0749 1865 EventLog Event30Type Event 30 type 19 Pre Alm N2 Ackd 51 Err Config uint8 0748 1864 EventLog Event31ID Event 31 Identificatio SEEE AIAN AG par er penera uint8 074B 1867 EventLog Event31Type Event 31 type 22 Prc Alm N3 Ackd 54 Err Netw2 uint8 074A 1866 EventLog Event32ID Event 32 Identification 23 Pre Aim ae p3 Err Nana uint8 074D 1869 Prc Alm N4 InAci 56 Err Netw4 gt EventLog Event32Type Event 32 type 25 Pre Alm N4 Ackd 57 Err Pwrl uint8 074C 1868 EventLog Event33ID Event 33 Identification 26 1nd Am NI Act 58 Err Pwr2 uint8 074F 1871 EventLog Event33Type Event 33 type 28 Ind Alm N1 Ackd 60 Err Pwr4 uint8 074E 1870 EventLog Event34ID Event 34 Identification 22 Z nd Alm N2 ina 61 Er DSP uint8 0751 1873 EventLog Event34Type Event 34 type 32 Ind Alm N3 Ac 63 Err Standby uint8 0750 1872 EventLog Event35ID Event 35 Identific
326. o x o gt Figure A2 Installation dimensions drawing HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 213 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A3 1 PINOUT Figure A3 1 below shows the rear terminal arrangement Line Supply Output 0 p 3 100 to 240Vac PV Output o p 1 48 to 62 Hz DiginB Changeover 7N la ra I br ES Nc Com No N L BBpl3cl3Bl3alLc LB 28 2aliBhia OF P v V VI LA C CT HF HE HD AC ABJAA NU lo af om 7 NT Bd gaano RTD gt ind ElA485 Sensor V mV H Digital comms wiring mA gt 2R49 Figure A3 1 Terminal arrangement A3 2 WIRING A3 2 1 Termination details The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0 5 to 1 5 mm 16 to 22AWG Hinged insulating covers prevent accidental contact with live wires The recommended maximum rear terminal screw torque is 0 4Nm A3 2 2 Supply voltage Please read the safety notes in section A1 1 of this manual Additionally 1 Only copper conductors may be used 2 The power supply input is not fuse protected Fusing must be provided externally by a type T fuse with a2 Amp 250V rating SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE 100 to 240Vac 15 1096 48 to 62 Hz Page 214 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A3 2 3 Signal wiring Notes 1 Input wires should not be run in proximity with power cables 2
327. o GAL ALO 123 WIPES ln BN whe LANA bA NKO KALAN KANG 124 Show Wires Using Tags aaa 119 Reset Show Hide grid voii NA eds LAAL 118 COUNT APA 68 Signal wiring Energy Counter cs ei el sei taa 71 imodulesn Un A pl Se eee rte bee Be 12 IP MONITO socks teks bee ee eed NA ite een 79 Remot panel evil o bled bs an 215 Totaliser tect AA 110 Watchdog and Relay 1 aa 13 Resolution Single ROW zae eop a Ad ode eg es 138 Energy counter 0 eee 72 SIXIG Slta wiring sie ess ee wes has tld atlas bende 27 29 TOtalisery cinco ita os wines Aha apt 110 SKS esi AAP 10 Return key tip 31 o A ee OA 10 Revision level Power module 17 SMPH coc ANING da isd Bee eae tS 84 RIP ple Carty isa ie oh mca A dn 67 MAPS Eta das 135 Rotating Incremental control 0oooccc o o 179 Soft Start Stop sce en tate nA deh oa cee kab ee 75 Rotating Incremental Distributed control 181 Software version 0 a i RotDisln iria yl eka roadie ahaa 95 181 SPA kna A ANT AN dla Tn Has 58 222 A AN RN Nana 95 179 193 SSB is ts HA 222 RUM tate ien aE aE r a Akt Lt We cleat Mahle Bala 110 SHOP oneen we bd Gn aasa Lang dela 59 RUN Beacon Laan de naag NAB AA AN 219 Space a AA 124 S Specifications 0 2 daria 55 span ea 203 EE NT PA NANA Coyne Meta aa cere aren 88 Communications Laan aan 208 Sosy ERES EE EEEE E EE 101 Environment s ae o Late 204 Safety Earth aan LEE NG AANO va tae e e es 11 Input output modules S
328. oad Master Address cnica pta aaa 97 Couple ia NN 35 77 Master election procesS oooooccccccocccccccccoo 198 Management a 175 199 Master Adan aNG BNG pa alab ala 198 Pata lo AA 36 194 Math2 Alarm Menus mos nA boda kaaa 98 Menta a APR AA 83 Configuration with iTools 190 Modbus parameter addresses 157 158 CONNECT etica ln Ap kalag 14 EA E A A OR 79 General description 175 ME mana EG GANA KG GA ad 91 Interface ko eas a a e oe aes oe 99 Meas gin te Stents o Pama 87 Main menu pamana nita goes aed umang 94 MeasVal Network menu coooocccccccco occ 97 Analogue input aer piaia BAL ea 50 Station MENU encina aaa 96 Analogue output nia haaa 51 Trouble shooting occcccccccccccccc o 199 Digital WO AA AA AA AA AA 69 TY sia AA 36 Relay sack anap a AnG PAWANG na ata tds GANA 105 SEQUENCING 2 ee eee 177 Mechanical Installation Sharing calientes adn 14 182 160 AMp UNIS nana evden nG and kad liar NG 6 Shedding nica ae A ide ee Sa 14 97 184 250 Amp Units onde Gls Aes YS lei ee 7 Comparison Ses iets sea ses 186 AOO Amp Units cated eta ok Mee Se ea Pee eats 8 TY DOr avai nabs sib thee i Pn nA E ane ede aah eee 35 74 SOLTO0 AMP URES eater ARI alan estos 5 TYPES an aNG Sinope NANA Ae heen ESA 203 IO AMP UNITS Aa NARRA nce bak oh Saale gs bee 9 Wiring examples 0 0 eee eee 26 Mises kapagka Sue dee toon NLA vada AN AA ae hed eae aia pdb eds toa 79 Load Over Gurtent cxa 2
329. od False bad True Good True Bad Lgc2 1 Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 OABB 2747 Lgc2 1 In1 Input Value 1 float32 0AB5 2741 Lgc2 1 In2 Input Value 2 float32 OAB 2742 Lgc2 1 Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 0AB8 2744 Lgc2 1 Oper Logic Operation If True Output 1 on uint8 OAB4 2740 0 Off 1 AND 2 OR 3 XOR 4 LATCH 5 Ip1 p2 6 Ip1 lp2 7 lp15 Ip22 8 Ip1 lt Ip2 9 Ip1 gt 1p2 10 Ip1 lt lp2 Lgc2 1 Out The Result O Off 1 On bool OAB9 2745 Lgc2 1 Status Output Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool OABA 2746 Lgc2 2 FallbackType Fallback Condition as Lgc2 1 uint8 DAC1 2753 Lgc2 2 Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 OAC5 2757 Lgc2 2 In1 Input Value 1 float32 OABF 2751 Lgc2 2 In2 Input Value 2 float32 OACO 2752 Lgc2 2 Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 OAC2 2754 Lgc2 2 Oper Logic Operation as Lgc2 1 uint8 OABE 2750 Lgc2 2 Out The Result 0 Off 1 On bool OAC3 2755 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 155 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 156 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Lgc2 2 Status Output Status O Good 1 Bad bool DAC4 2756 Lgc2 3 FallbackType Fallback Condition as Lgc2 1 uint8 OACB 2763 Lgc2 3 Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 OACF 2767 Lgc2 3 In1 Input Value 1 float32 0AC9 2761 Lgc2 3 In2 Input Value 2 float32 OACA 2762 Lgc2 3 Invert Sense of Input Value uint8 OACC 2764 Lgc2 3 Oper Logic Operation
330. ode Access IM Access Keylock Access QuickStartPasscode AlmDis Alarm Externln AlmDis AnalogOP OutputFault AlmDis Control ClosedLoop AlmDis Control Limitation AlmDis Control PVTransfer AlmDis LTC Fuse AlmDis LTC Temp AlmDis Network ChopOff AlmDis Network FreqFault AlmDis Network FuseBlown AlmDis Network MainsVoltFault AlmDis Network MissMains AlmDis Network NetworkDips AlmDis Network OpenThyr AlmDis Network OverCurrent AlmDis Network OverTemp AlmDis Network PB24VFail AlmDis Network PLF AlmDis Network PLU AlmDis Network PreTemp AlmDis Network ThyrSC AlmDis Network TLF AlmDis PLM PrOverPs AlmLat Alarm Externln AlmLat AnalogOP OutputFault AlmLat Control ClosedLoop AlmLat Control Limitation AlmLat Control PVTransfer AlmLat LTC Fuse AlmLat LTC Temp AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ AlmLat Networ FreqFault FuseBlown MainsVoltFault k MissMains NetworkDips OverCurrent OverTemp PB24VFail PLF PLU PreTemp ThyrSC TLF AlmLat PLM PrOverPs AlmStop Alarm Externin AlmStop AnalogOP OutputFault AlmStop Control ClosedLoop AlmStop Network MainsVoltFault AlmStop Network PLF AlmStop Network PLU AlmStop Network PreTemp AlmStop Network TLF AnSwitch Fallback AnSwitch FallbackVal AnSwitch HighLimit AnSwitch In1 AnSwitch In2 AnSwitch In3 AnSwitch In4 AnSwitch I
331. ogue inputs any value below 0 5 is deemed to be logic O off A value equal to or greater than 0 5 is treated as a logic 1 on Either input can be inverted as a part of the configuration that is a high input is treated as a low input and vice versa Figure 6 16 shows the LGC2 menu CONF 3 Lgc2 A wired input 0 0 Use up down arrows to select Lgc2 number then Enter Use return key ED one or more times from within menu to return to this page Select operator as OFF AND OR XOR LATCH ED ED SD YA gt lt y D DA SD y Lgc2 N ED Input1 Shows current value of input 1 If not wired 3 Input1 ED p0 allows a value to be entered y DD DA Dy Lgc2 N ED Inout2 Shows current value of input 2 If not wired p 3 Input2 ID 0 4900 allows a value to be entered YD MA DY Lgc2 N ED Fall Type Select FalseBad TrueBad FalseGood or gt Fall Type ED aFalseBad TrueGood as fallback type QD DA Lgc2 N ED Invert Select None Input1 Input2 or Both 3 Invert ED 4None for input inversion it D TP Output off Shows current value of the output y nm IS lt lt ZN N gt gt 3 O lt gt o Status Shows current status of the output Hyst Al lt gt gt Back to Oper Figure 6 16 LGC2 menu 6 16 1 Lgc2 Parameters Oper Allows the user to select a logic operation for the block The descripti
332. olled heater in the enclosure Grounding of the temperature sensor shield In some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while the Remote Panel is still powered up Under these conditions as additional protection against electric shock it is recommended that the temperature sensor shield be grounded Grounding through the framework of the machine should not be relied on Over Temperature Protection To prevent overheating of the process under fault conditions a separate over temperature protection unit should be fitted which will isolate the heating circuit This must have an independent temperature sensor The 32h8e is intended for this function Note Alarm relays within the unit do not give protection under all failure conditions To comply with European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary General guidance Refer to EMC Installation Guide Part no HA025464 Relay outputs lt may be necessary to fit a suitable filter depending on load type to suppress conducted emissions Table top installation If using a standard power socket compliance with commercial and light industrial emissions standard is usually required To comply with conducted emissions standard a suitable mains filter must be installed SYMBOLS Symbols used on the instrument are defined in the table below Equipment protected throughout by DOUBLE ISOLATION Caution refer to accompanying
333. on LoadCoupling2ndNetwork Load 2 coupling configuration as Load Coupling uint8 08A2 2210 Instrument Configuration LoadMFitted Load Management Card Fitted 0 No 1 Yes bool 08A4 2212 Instrument Configuration NetType The type of network O 3Ph 1 1Ph 2 2Ph uint8 0897 2199 Instrument Configuration PowerModules Number of power modules fitted uint8 0896 2198 Instrument Configuration PwrMod 1 Rev Power Module 1 Revision 0 invalid uint8 089C 2204 Instrument Configuration PwrMod2Rev Power Module 2 Revision 0 invalid uint8 089D 2205 Instrument Configuration PwrMod3Rev Power Module 3 Revision 0 invalid uint8 089E 2206 Instrument Configuration PwrMod4Rev Power Module 4 Revision 0 invalid uint8 089F 2207 Instrument Configuration RemotePV Remote PV float32 08A3 2211 Instrument Configuration TimerRes Sets resolution of time parameters uint8 08A0 2208 0 0 1sec 1 0 1 min Instrument Display Language Selected Language uint8 0879 2169 1 Eng 2 Fra 3 Ger 8 Ita 16 Spa Instrument Display SerialNo Serial Number int32 087A 2170 Instrument ID Instrument Identifier E190h int16 007A 122 Instrument Mode Instrument Mode uint8 00C7 199 0 Operator mode 1 Standby 2 Config O AnalogIP 1 Main MeasVal Measured value float32 05D3 1491 IO AnalogIP 1 Main PV Process variable float32 05D4 1492 IO AnalogIP 1 Main RangeHigh High input range for scaling to process units float32 05D1 1489 IO AnalogIP 1 Main RangeLow Low i
334. on of Hazardous Substances RoHS Product group Epower EPowerMC Table listing restricted substances Chinese bat EPower KZ BA BRR 502 BBR 100245 HERR 160235 RRR 250235 BIR 400235 RRR 500235 BR 630235 HERR 800235 HERR 1000235 MEG 1300284 HERIR 1700284 HBR 200025 BUS HEB 2000884 Si HERI 3000 224 HERIR 40002 3 SATA MAA AA ARABE NE E 1ESI T1 1363 2006 MEREN REE KRAF KIWAEEENREDERHANE AA PH SB HS T11363 2006 IERE KY REEK English Restricted Materials Table Product Toxic and hazardous substances and elements EPower Driver Power Module 50A Power Module 100A Power Module 160A Power Module 250A Power Module 400A Power Module 500A Power Module 630A Power Module 800A Power Module 1000 Power Module 1300A Power Module 1700 Power Module 2000A air cooled Power Module 2000A water cooled Power Module 3000A Power Module 4000A gt Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ T11363 2006 Approval Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager 1A029470U740 Issue 4 Dec 09 CN25945 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL LIST OF SECTIONS 1 INTRODUCTION coi nan tad a UNG AAA aude dan des gota bee ae 3
335. on time HA179769 Page 176 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 2 LOAD SEQUENCING Load sequencing is a time dependent distribution of Energy through the Load independent of the installed power per load in order to avoid big spikes of power demand at the beginning of each conduction period There are a number of different load sequencing types as described below Which particular type is chosen depends on the loads being driven The selection is made in the LoadMng Main area of configuration section 6 21 1 9 2 1 Incremental control type 1 With this kind of control several Loads receive a common Setpoint One channel is modulated with the required Duty Cycle n The remaining channels are at 10096 Full conduction or at 096 No conduction The total power distributed to the Loads is equal to the Setpoint For example for 11 Channels and setpoint of 50 i e input of Master channel 1 0 5 channels 1 to 5 are continuously on and channels 7 to 11 are continuously off Channel 6 modulates with a duty cycle of 5096 figure 9 2 1 100 Chan 11 0 100 Chan 10 o 100 Chan9 o 100 Chan 8 ox 100 Chan 7 oy 100 Chan 6 o Cana a RS Ca Katay 100 Chan 5 o 100 Chan 4 gy 100 Chan 3 gy 100 Chan 2 0 100 Chan 1 o Figure 9 2 1 Incremental control type 1 example HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 177 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE
336. ons ics chose cave bes Ce be we did 91 Nominal Voltage eects 35 Partial Load Unbalance PLU o ooooooo oo 202 NONE ess Mea tance gis sander ane ra eed KANA NANA cen es 230 Pass Code editing citar dl 49 AS Su akan ead naa E lene LLANA apn ered 96 Paste Number ofinp ts A ma a AG LG andas pa 82 COMMON nana ces ia ba aan abala 122 NumberChopOff 0c cece eect ees 90 Diagram fragment 118 NUMGNAN mt ete tapes Roane ead 196 EPFO adie ee ta weed PA Oe 120 O Fragment From File an 124 Occupied Stations a 54 Function block context menu aan 120 Off naib pa NG NPA Ka TAN LET A AN hak NAA BAG 80 Graphical Wiring Editor anan 118 On Monito Fest AGA dia Be oad ot ate AA 123 e hana 108 WIFE na ate y td AE haaa masagi 123 Pulsa BALA kidd eect oes 108 Wire context menu ieee reer eee es 121 One Shota an sarees kee haere tee a YAN 109 Wiring editor items 5 sees aasa 124 OPI to OPA ah eai ee eerti Na aei ar qog PB 2AM cis en pinagka ne Kakasa Aree stares 92 200 231 Beacons LEDS coco 219 A E Ao Ham TO eee Placer 88 S AA E LEO amp 136 PeakReset Loon rro 226 Open an existing watch recipe file 136 Pending Sinden Na Ik AN 199 Open Thyr Beki JA Lu EG Data O a ST aNG 92 231 o A Adan Kala a late ha NAG aa 95 193 AO AA E ah Lalo peed 80 A IE PEES II EEA aa 88 Operation nt Ad NON eed oad cue aS 82 Phin ComErr 2222s sees conc 33 Operator Phin Com POute crise eee oda oe 33 ema Io
337. ons below assume neither input is inverted High 1 or on Low 0 or off Off No logic operation selected AND Output high if both inputs high otherwise output is low OR Output high if either or both inputs high otherwise output low XOR Output high if either but not both inputs high Low if neither or both inputs high LATCH If i p2 low output latches next transition of i p1 Value remains latched until i p2 goes low when output i p1 see figure 6 16 1 Output high if both inputs are equal otherwise output is low lt gt Output high if inputs are unequal Output is low if both inputs are equal gt Output high if i p1 value greater than i p2 value otherwise output is low lt Output high if i p1 value less than i p2 value otherwise output is low gt Output high if i p1 value is equal to or greater than i p2 value otherwise output is low lt Output high if i p1 value is less than or equal to i p2 value otherwise output is low HA179769 Page 80 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 16 1 LGC2 PARAMETERS Cont Input 1 If wired shows the value of input 1 if not allows the user to enter a value Input 2 If wired shows the value of input 1 if not allows the user to enter a value Fall type Allows a fallback type to be selected This defines the output value and status displays if the status of one or both inputs is bad FalseGood Output value displays False Status displays Good Fal
338. ontroller Main PV The control strategy is using Main PV as the control input Transfer function The transfer input us being used as the input to the control active strategy Control limiting is currently active using limit PV1 2 3 and Limit 1 2 3 active limit SP 1 2 3 Output The current output demand in percent Normally wired to Modulator In or FiringOP In PA Limit Applies only to Burst Firing control modes If this parameter is wired to FiringOP PALimit the power module will deliver bursts of phase angle firing depending both on the Main Setpoint and on the Limit Setpoint HA179769 Page 60 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 5 Control Alarm disable parameters Allows each alarm of the control block to be disabled individually May be wired CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use EB Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use up down arrows to select AlmDis then Enter Used to disable the Loop Break alarm Eso id yellow Alarm disabled Y MW AlmDis gt PVTransf AlmDis 3 ClosedLo Used to disable the Transfer Active alarm Eso id yellow Alarm disabled Used to disable the Control Limit Active alarm So id yellow Alarm disabled AlmDis gt Limitati Ka A AA gt Back to Closed Loop Figure 6
339. or more times from within menu to return to this page Allows the user to select units for the selected user value Resolution Use the up down keys to set the decimal point position XXXXXX Enter maximum minimum values to ensure that the user value cannot be set out of range The up down arrows can be used to enter a value or the parameter can be wired to another parameter Shows the status of the input parameter or for test purposes status can be forced to Good or Bad by using the up down arrows Back to Units Figure 6 28 User Value menu Units Allows the selection of User value units Resolution Set the number of decimal places for the User Value value High Low Limit Allows the user to set limits to prevent the user value from being set out of bounds Value Allows the user to enter a value or the parameter is wired to a suitable parameter Status lf this parameter is wired it can be used to force a Good or Bad status onto the User Value for test purposes e g fallback strategy If not wired it reflects the status of the Value input if this input is wired HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 111 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 USING ITOOLS iTools software running on a pc allows quick and easy access to the configuration of the unit The parameters used are the same as those described in section 6 above with the addition of various diagnostic parameters Tools also gives the user the abilit
340. or the top of the units Assembly details for the bottom brackets is similar except that there is no safety earth fixing The power module shown is a 400 Amp unit for which the module is fixed to the support brackets using holes A and B Lower current power modules use only one screw C to secure the module to the support bracket Weight including 2 kg 4 4 Ib for driver module lb oz Current 1 phase 2 phases 3 phases 4 phases 0 1 1 6 ka lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 0 2 3 2 50 100A 6 5 14 3 11 0 243 15 5 34 2 20 0 441 f 0 3 4 8 160a 69 15 2 111 8 260 16 7 36 8 21 6 47 6 Weights 0 4 6 4 50gm 2 oz 0 5 8 0 250A 78 17 2 13 6 30 0 19 4 42 8 25 2 55 6 0 6 9 6 400A 11 8 26 0 21 6 47 6 31 4 69 2 41 2 90 8 07 11 2 500 A 14 0 30 9 26 0 57 3 38 0 83 8 50 0 110 2 0 8 12 8 630A 14 5 32 0 27 0 59 5 39 5 87 1 52 0 114 6 0 9 14 4 Table 2 1 1 Unit Weights Single phase power module mounting shown Multi phase mountings similar See table 2 2 1 for 500 630A Driver Safety Earth details module bracket Driver module Figure 2 1 1a Bracket fixing details HA179769 Page 4 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 1 1 FIXING DETAILS Cont Figures 2 1 1a to 2 1 1f show fixing centres and other mechanical details for the various modules
341. ork block alarm to be acknowledged Once acknowledged the associated signalling parameter is cleared Acknowledge parameters automatically clear after being written Note Alarms may not be acknowledged whilst the trigger source is still active NETWORK ALMSTOP SUBMENU Allows each individual alarm type to be configured to stop the related power module from firing Activated by the related Signalling parameter The alarm list is as given above HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 93 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 21 PLM STATION AND NETWORK LM PARAMETERS MENU This menu appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted and enabled LoadMng provides an interface to the parameters of the station and of the load management network A station is defined as a Driver module and associated power modules Figure 6 21 gives an overview of the menu Figure 6 21 2 Figure 6 21 3 Figure 6 21 4 Networ gt Total St Figure 6 21 1 Figure 6 21 Predictive Load Management Menu overview 6 21 1 Main This presents the main Load Management parameters See figure 6 21 2 for Station figure 6 21 3 for Network and figure 6 21 4 for Alarm parameters See text for available Types The modulation period for the 100 station in mains periods Back to Type Figure 6 21 1 Load Management Main menu HA179769 Page 94 Issue 9 Aug 12 E
342. ounters to be enabled and disabled Appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted Allows the user to select one of LMNo disabled Sharing IncrT1 IncrT2 Rotlncr Distrib Distlncr RotDisinc See section 9 for more details Load Man Address Appears only if the Predictive Load Management option is fitted Allows the user to Finish enter a Predictive Load Management address Select No to return to the top of the Quickstart menu or Yes to enter the User menu after confirmation See also note below Note The Finish item might not appear if an inconsistent or incomplete configuration is entered In such a case the Language selection page at the top of the menu re appears Page 36 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 4 2 SOME DEFINITIONS 4 2 1 Firing modes LOGIC Power switches on two or three zero crossings of the supply voltage after the logic input switches on Power switches off wo or three zero crossings of current after the logic input switches off For resistive loads voltage and current cross zero simultaneously With inductive loads a phase difference exists between the voltage and current meaning that they cross zero at different times The size of the phase difference increases with increasing inductance Power on off delay two or three mains l periods depending on where in the mains Jb cycle the logic output changes state Pow
343. ow uint16 01CC 460 Network 2 Setup FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold float32 01E4 484 HA179769 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 2 Setup HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 01D4 468 Network 2 Setup HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 01CF 463 Network 2 Setup HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 01C7 455 Network 2 Setup lextScale External current scale adjustment float32 01D7 471 Network 2 Setup IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 01DB 475 Network 2 Setup INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 OIDA 474 Network 2 Setup NetType The type of network Set in Instrument Configuration uint8 01D8 472 Network 2 Setup OverlThreshold Over Current Threshold uintl 01D3 467 Network 2 Setup OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 01CD 461 Network 2 Setup PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 01D0 464 Network 2 Setup PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 01D6 470 Network 2 Setup PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 01D1 465 Network 2 Setup PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 01D2 466 Network 2 Setup UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 01CE 462 Network 2 Setup VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 01C8 456 Network 2 Setup VextScale External voltage scale
344. ower demand n have the values given below during the relevant modulation period of 100 mains cycles The total installed Power on the Network is Pmax 1 285MW and the Demanded Power is Pt 433kW Channe Setpoin Channe Setpoin Nai t Power No A Power 1 10 58kW 17 45 69kW 2 1596 9kW 18 9 32kW 3 56 7kW 19 25 65kW 4 45 56kW 20 45 98kW 5 1 12kW 21 12 96kW 6 15 4kW 22 18 85kW 7 45 25kW 23 45 74kW 8 78 23kW 24 56 5kW 9 5296 45kW 25 6 2kW 10 54 12kW 26 39 8kW 11 56 45kW 27 96 7kW 12 4 78kW 28 65 74kW 13 5 36kW 29 58 85kW 14 58 25kW 30 9 65kW 15 78 14kW 31 7 5kW 16 12 58kW 32 56 8kW Table 9 4 3 Channel parameters WITHOUT LOAD SHARING SYNCHRONISED This is the worst case The simulation in figure 9 4 3a shows the Power profile on the Modulation Period if all the channels are started at the same time i e with no incremental control applied kw Pmax 1200 Max power available Pmax 1285kW 1100 Total power per modulation period Pt 433kW Efficiency Factor F 0 1000 Reduction factor r 100 900 800 700 600 500 Pt 400 300 200 100 0 Modulation period Figure 9 4 3a Synchronised without load sharing r 100 HA179769 Page 186 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 4 3 LOAD SHEDDING COMPARISON
345. ozen when disabled Direction Select up or down as the direction of count Up counters start at and are reset to zero down counters start from and are reset to the Target value below Ripple Carry The Ripple carry output of one counter can act as the enabling input for the next counter in a cascade Ripple carry is set true when the counter is enabled and its value is either zero for count down timers or equal to the Target value count up counters Overflow Overflow becomes true when the value of the counter is either zero for count down timers or equal to the Target value count up counters Clock The counter increments or decrements on a positive going edge 0 to 1 False to true HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 67 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 8 COUNTER MENU Cont Target Up counters Start at zero and count towards the Target value When this value is reached Overflow and Ripple carry are set true value 1 Down counters Start at the Target value and count towards zero When zero is reached Overflow and Ripple carry are set true value 1 Count The current value of the counter This is a 32 bit integer which accumulates clock transitions Minimum value is zero Reset Resets up counters to zero or down counters to the Target value Reset also sets Overflow to False i e Overflow 0 Clear Overflow Sets Overflow to False i e Overflow 0 6 8 2 Cascading counters As implied above
346. p Off Threshold2 uint16 0314 788 Network 4 Setup ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0316 790 Network 4 Setup FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold float32 032E 814 Network 4 Setup HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 031E 798 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 169 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 170 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 4 Setup HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 0319 793 Network 4 Setup HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 0311 785 Network 4 Setup lextScale External current scale adjustment float32 0321 801 Network 4 Setup IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0325 805 Network 4 Setup INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 0324 804 Network 4 Setup NetType The type of network Set in Instrument Configuration uint8 0322 802 Network 4 Setup OverlThreshold Over Current Threshold uintl 031D 797 Network 4 Setup OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0317 791 Network 4 Setup PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 031A 794 Network 4 Setup PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 0320 800 Network 4 Setup PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 031B 795 Network 4 Setup PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 031C 796 Network 4 Setup UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0318 792 Network 4
347. p Process alarm ack Pre Temperature uint8 0230 560 Network 2 AlmAck ThyrSC System alarm ack Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0224 548 Network 2 AlmAck TLF Process alarm ack Total Load Failure uint8 022B 555 Network 2 AlmDet ChopOff Process alarm detection status Chop Off uint8 01FF 511 Network 2 AlmDet FreqFault System alarm detection status Frequency Fault uint8 01FC 508 Network 2 AlmDet FuseBlown System alarm detection status Fuse Blown uint8 01F9 505 Network 2 AlmDet MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0202 514 Network 2 AlmDet MissMains System alarm detection status Missing Mains uint8 01F6 502 Network 2 AlmDet NetworkDips System alarm detection status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 01FB 507 Network 2 AlmDet OpenThyr System alarm detection status Open Thyristor uint8 01F8 504 Network 2 AlmDet OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status Over Current uint8 0204 516 Network 2 AlmDet OverTemp System alarm detection status Over Temperature uint8 O1FA 506 Network 2 AlmDet PB24VFail System alarm detection status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 01FD 509 Network 2 AlmDet PLF Process alarm detection status Partial Load Failure uint8 0200 512 Network 2 AlmDet PLU Process alarm detection status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0201 513 Network 2 AlmDet PreTemp Process alarm detection Status Pre Temperature uint8 0203 515 Network 2 AlmDet ThyrSC System alarm detection status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 01F7 503 Network 2 Al
348. p VMaximum Maximum Voltage of the stack 0 600V 1 690V uint8 0141 321 Network 1 Setup Zref PLF reference load impedance phase 1 float32 0139 313 Network 1 Setup Zref2 PLF reference load impedance phase 2 float32 013A 314 Network 1 Setup Zref3 PLF reference load impedance phase 3 float32 013B 315 Network 2 See Network 1 for enumeration values Network 2 AlmAck ChopOff Process alarm ack Chop Off uint8 022C 556 Network 2 AlmAck FreqFault System alarm ack Frequency Fault uint8 0229 553 Network 2 AlmAck FuseBlown System alarm ack Fuse Blown uint8 0226 550 Network 2 AlmAck MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack Mains Voltage Fault uint8 022F 559 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 2 AlmAck MissMains System alarm ack Missing Mains uint8 0223 547 Network 2 AlmAck NetworkDips System alarm ack Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0228 552 Network 2 AlmAck OpenThyr System alarm ack Open Thyristor uint8 0225 549 Network 2 AlmAck OverCurrent Indication alarm ack Over Current uint8 0231 561 Network 2 AlmAck OverTemp System alarm ack Over Temperature uint8 0227 551 Network 2 AlmAck PB24VFail System alarm ack Power Board 24V Failure uint8 022A 554 Network 2 AlmAck PLF Process alarm ack Partial Load Failure uint8 022D 557 Network 2 AlmAck PLU Process alarm ack Partial Load Unbalance uint8 022E 558 Network 2 AlmAck PreTem
349. pied stations is 3 then the next available address is 7 Number of occupied stations Maximum No of input definitions Maximum No of output definitions 1 2 3 4 3 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 Input definition 2 byte word parameter to be read by the master Output definition 2 byte word parameter to be written by master Allows the parity setting to be selected as None odd or Even None is often used because there are other corruption detection methods e g CRC in use and selecting Odd or Even increases the number of bits transmitted thus reducing throughput Selects Transmission Delay On or Off On inserts a guaranteed 10 millisecond delay between reception and response This is needed by some converter boxes in order to switch driver direction Enables disables the checking of the Modbus TCP Unit Identity field Strict The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field UIF does not have to match the instrument address The instrument responds only to Hex value FF in the UIF The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field UIF does not have to match the instrument address The instrument responds any value in the UIF The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field UIF must match the instrument address or no response will be made to messages A value of 0 in the UIF is treated as a Broadcast Message Allows the user to choose whether the IP address and subnet mask are fixed or to be supplied by a D
350. pty key indicates that the alarm is inactive a solid yellow key means that the alarm is active PV Transfer As for Closed Loop but for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Page 62 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 7 Control Alarm signalling parameters Signals that an alarm has occurred and has been latched if so configured in Alarm Latch section 6 7 8 If it is required that an alarm is to be assigned to a relay for example then the appropriate alarm signalling parameter should be used CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use Eb Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use up down arrows to select AlmSig then Enter E Solid yellow Indicates that the loop alarm has occurred Solid yellow Signals that the transfer alarm has occurred AlmSig gt Limitati gt Solid yellow Signals that the transfer alarm has occurred Jp Back to ClosedLoop Figure 6 7 7 Control Alarm Signalling menu Closed Loop The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display indicates whether the closed loop break alarm is currently active An empty key indicates that the alarm is inactive a solid yellow key means that the alarm is active PV Transfer As for Closed Loop b
351. put the lower of inputs one and two HotSwp Input one appears as the output for as long as input one is good If input one status is bad input two appears as the output instead SmpHld Sample and Hold The output follows input one for as long as input two is high sample When input two goes low hold the output is held at the value current when the output went low until input two goes high again Input two is normally a digital value low 0 or high 1 when it is an analogue value then any positive non zero value is interpreted as a high Power Output Input one raised to the power of input two In1 2 For example if input one has the value 4 2 and the value of input two is 3 then output 4 23 74 09 Sqrt The output is the square root of input one Input two is not used Log Output Logi input one Log base 10 Input two is not used Ln Output Log input one Log base e Input two is not used Exp Output elinputone Input two is not used 10 x Output 10 nputone Input two is not used Select If the Select input is high input two appears at the output if the Select input is low input one appears at the output Input1 Scale The scaling factor to be applied to input one Input2 Scale The scaling factor to be applied to input two Out Units Allows the user to choose units for the output eae Use the up and down arrows to position the decimal point as required Low Limit The low limit for all inputs to the funct
352. put and in this case it requires a high signal figure 2 2 1c to be applied to SK1 pin8 with the relevant zero voltage connected to pin 10 HA179769 Page 10 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 1 Driver Module Cont SAFETY EARTH The safety earth connection for the driver power module set is made to the mounting bracket above the unit as shown in figures 2 1 1a to 2 1 1f above The connection must be made using the correct size of terminal and correct gauge of cable as given in table 2 2 1 below Max load Minimum earth Hari Jeria current cable cross section Size Tightening torque 50 100A 25 mm M6 5 Nm 3 7 ft Ib 160A 35 mm M6 5 Nm 3 7 ft Ib 250A 70 mm2 M8 12 5 Nm 9 2 ft Ib 400A 120 mm M10 15 Nm 11 1ft Ib 500A 150 mm M12 25 Nm 18 4 ft Ib 630A 185 mm M12 25 Nm 18 4 ft Ib Table 2 2 1 Safety Earth details SIGNAL WIRING Figure 2 2 1b shows the location of the various connectors pinouts and typical wiring for SK1 fitted as standard are shown in figure 2 2 1c Wiring for optional I O units SK 3 to SK5 is similar except that they contain a relay in addition to the analog and digital circuits and the digital circuits are inputs only Configuration port ElA232 View on underside SK6 Relay 1 Watchdog relay SK7 Remote display isolated 22 ElA485 Communications
353. quently go non active leaving only the EPower alarm the beacon and PV display will resume flashing For manual latching alarms acknowledge is ignored and the alarm indication continues until the alarm trigger is no longer active Note Alarm parameters can be configured in Configuration mode as described in the 3200i Engineering handbook HA029006 A6 1 3 Sensor Break detection and indication An alarm condition Sbr is indicated if the indicator detects a break or over range condition in the temperature sensor circuit Notes 1 Fora resistance thermometer a sensor break is indicated if any of the three wires is broken 2 mA sensor breaks are not detected because the effect is masked by the resistor across the input 3 For Volt inputs sensor breaks might not always be detected because the effect is masked by the attenuator potential divider board connected across the input HA179769 Page 230 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A6 1 4 Error indication The following error indications can appear flashing in the top line of the display Com Er EP CnF EP Er Communication error Modbus transactions between the 32h8e and the EPower driver module fail Can be caused by a break in the physical communications link by the EPower module being powered down etc The number of power modules is selected as zero The indicator can therefore not show Current Voltage or Power values One or more
354. r Short Circuit uint8 018E 398 Network 1 AlmStop TLF Process alarm stop Total Load Failure uint8 0195 405 Network 1 Meas Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0118 280 Network 1 Meas HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 011A 282 Network 1 Meas HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 011B 283 Network 1 Meas HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 011C 284 Network 1 Meas Irms of the load float32 0103 259 Network 1 Meas 12 Irms2 of the load float32 0104 260 Network 1 Meas 13 Irms3 of the load float32 0105 261 Network 1 Meas lavg Average value of Irms float32 0106 262 Network 1 Meas IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network float32 0120 288 Network 1 Meas Isq Square value of the load current float32 0108 264 Network 1 Meas IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 0107 263 Network 1 Meas IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network float32 0109 265 Network 1 Meas P True power measurement float32 0111 273 Network 1 Meas PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 0110 272 Network 1 Meas PF Power Factor float32 0113 275 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 161 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 162 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 1 Meas O Reactive Power float32 0114 276 Network 1 Meas S Apparent power measurement float32 0112 274 Network 1 Meas V Vrms of the load float32 010A
355. r are active x See REM MAN BEACONS below for more details HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 219 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 1 1 FRONT PANEL DETAILS Cont REM MAN BEACONS Table A5 1 1 summarises the operating characteristics of the REM and MAN beacons which depend on the network with which the currently displayed value is associated and on which SetProv function blocks are enabled if any Network 1 If no SetProv blocks are enabled then MAN always illuminated Otherwise REM MAN operation depends on SetProv1 SPselect parameter Network 2 If no SetProv blocks are enabled then MAN always illuminated If SetProv 1 and SetProv 2 are enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv 2 SPselect parameter If SetProv 1 and SetProv 3 are enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv 3 SPselect parameter If only SetProv 1 enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv1 SPselect parameter Network 3 If no SetProv blocks enabled then MAN always illuminated If SetProv 1 and SetProv 3 are enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv 3 SPselect parameter If only SetProv 1 enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv1 SPselect parameter Network 4 If no SetProv blocks enabled then MAN always illuminated If SetProv 1 and SetProv 4 are enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv 4 SPselect parameter If only SetProv 1 enabled REM MAN operation depends on SetProv1
356. r cycle HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 95 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 21 2 Predictive Load management Station menu This menu contains all parameters related to Load Management Station configuration where a station consists of a Driver Module together wit hits associated Power modules Address Status Num Chans PLMO ut 1 to 4 Station gt PLMO ut4 NAA tion ddress See figure 6 21 1 for Main figure 6 21 3 for Network and figure 6 21 4 for Alarm parameters Address 0 to 63 inc of the station Sta Address i within the Load Management network 3A 0 o Load Management inhibited Station ED Status Shows the current Master Slave status of this unit gt Status xt ED Pending within the Load Management Network Station ED Num Chans Shows the number of channels participating in 3 Num Chans AED Q Load Management for this station Station EP PLMOut1 gt PLMOut1 Cw 0 Station EE PLMO ut2 gt PLMO ut2 PP Load Management Slot 1 to Slot 2 lt p 0 Ainterface output Must be wired to the rele CW MW A ED vant load management channel function block LMin to connect a channel of power Station ED PLMOut3 control to the Load Management network gt PLMOut3 LEE 0 D D YO L P Back to Address Figure 6 21 2 Load Management Station menu This is the address of the unit on the Load Management PLM network between O and 63 inclusive An address of O disables
357. ransfer 0 Enable 1 Disable uint8 03AC 940 Control 1 AlmLat ClosedLoop Process alarm latch Closed loop break uint8 03B4 948 0 No Latch 1 Latch Control 1 AlmLat Limitation Indication alarm latch Limitation uint8 03B6 950 0 No Latch 1 Latch Control 1 AlmLat PVTransfer Indication alarm latch PV transfer uint8 03B5 949 0 No Latch 1 Latch Control 1 AlmSig ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status Closed loop break uint8 03B1 945 0 Not latched 1 Latched Control 1 AlmSig Limitation Indication alarm signalling status Limitation uint8 03B3 947 0 Not latched 1 Latched Control 1 AlmSig PVTransfer Indication alarm signalling status PV transfer uint8 03B2 946 0 Not latched 1 Latched Control 1 AlmStop ClosedLoop Process alarm stop Closed loop break uint8 03BA 954 0 No Stop 1 Stop Control 1 AlmStop Limitation Indication alarm stop Limitation uint8 03BC 956 Control 1 AlmStop PVTransfer Indication alarm stop PV transfer uint8 03BB 955 Control 1 Diag Output Output of the controller float32 03A9 937 Control 1 Diag PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 OJAA 938 Control 1 Diag Status Status of the controller 0 Main PV 1 Transfr uint8 03A8 936 4 Limit 1 5 Limit 2 6 Limit 3 Control 1 Limit PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 03A1 929 Control 1 Limit PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 03A2 930 Control 1 Limit PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 03A3 931
358. rface after the editor is opened are lost on download When a block is dropped onto the diagram instrument parameters are changed to make the parameters for that block available If changes are made and the editor is closed without saving them there is a delay while the editor clears these parameters During download the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the block execution order and starts executing the blocks The diagram layout including comments and monitors is then written into instrument flash memory along with the current editor settings When the editor is reopened the diagram is shown positioned as it was when it was last downloaded HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 123 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont COLOURS Items on the diagram are coloured as follows Red Blue Green Magenta Purple Black Items which totally or partially obscure other items and items which are totally or partially obscured by other items Wires that are connected to unalterable or non available parameters Execution breaks Block execution orders for Task 1 Non available parameters in function blocks Block execution orders for Task 4 Task breaks Items added to the diagram since last download are shown as green dashed lines Block execution orders for Task 2 All selected items or any item over which the cursor is hovering Red wires when being hovered over by the mo
359. rface input uintl 0477 1143 Modultr 2 SwitchPA Switch Burst PA as Modultr1 uint8 047C 1148 Modultr 3 CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 048B 1163 Modultr 3 In Input of the modulator block float32 0489 1161 Modultr 3 LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection as Modultr1 uint8 048C 1164 Modultr 3 MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uint16 048A 1162 Modultr 3 Mode Modulator mode as Modultr1 uint8 048E 1166 Modultr 3 Out Modulator logical output float32 0488 1160 Modultr 3 PLMin Load management interface input uintl 048D 1165 Modultr 3 SwitchPA Switch Burst PA as Modultr1 uint8 0492 1170 Modultr 4 CycleTime Cycle time for fixed modulator uint16 04A1 1185 Modultr 4 In Input of the modulator block float32 049F 1183 Modultr 4 LgcMode Logic mode cycle selection as Modultr1 uint8 04A2 1186 Modultr 4 MinOnTime Minimum on time for variable modulator uintl 04A0 1184 Modultr 4 Mode Modulator mode as Modultr1 uint8 04A4 1188 Modultr 4 Out Modulator logical output float32 049E 1182 Modultr 4 PLMin Load management interface input uintl 04A3 1187 Modultr 4 SwitchPA Switch Burst PA as Modultr1 uint8 04A8 1192 Network 1 AlmAck ChopOff Process alarm ack Chop Off O NoAck 1 Ack uint8 0187 391 Network 1 AlmAck FreqFault System alarm ack Frequency Fault as ChopOff uint8 0184 388 Network 1 AlmAck FuseBlown System alarm ack Fuse Blown as ChopOff uint8 0181 385 Network 1 AImAck MainsVoltFault Process alarm ack
360. rgy 5 PulseLen Length of the pulse in ms uintl OB5A 2906 Energy 5 PulseScale Amount of energy per pulse as Energy 1 uint8 OB5C 2908 Energy 5 Reset Set the user counter back to zero bool 0B57 2903 Energy 5 TotEnergy The global energy float32 0B58 2904 Energy 5 TotEnergyUnit Total energy counter units as Energy 1 uint8 0B5D 2909 Energy 5 Type Type of energy counter 0 Normal 1 Global bool OB5E 2910 Energy 5 UsrEnergy User resetable energy float32 0B54 2900 Energy 5 UsrEnergyUnit User energy units multiplier as Energy 1 uint8 OB5B 2907 EventLog Event01ID Event 1 identification uint8 070F 1807 EventLog Event01Type Event 1 type uint8 070E 1806 EventLog Event02ID Event 2 Identification uint8 0711 1809 EventLog Event02Type Event 2 type uint8 0710 1808 EventLog Event03ID Event 3 Identification uint8 0713 1811 EventLog Event03Type Event 3 type uint8 0712 1810 EventLog Event04ID Event 4 Identification uint8 0715 1813 EventLog Event04Type Event 4 type uint8 0714 1812 EventLog Event05ID Event 5 Identification uint8 0717 1815 EventLog Event05Type Event 5 type uint8 0716 1814 EventLog Event06ID Event 6 Identification uint8 0719 1817 EventLog Event06Type Event 6 type uint8 0718 1816 EventLog Event07ID Event 7 Identification uint8 071B 1819 EventLog Event07Type Event 7 type uint8 071A 1818 EventLog Event08lD Event 8 Identification uint8 071D 1821 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 149 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4
361. ring Bit 5 Network 3 not synchronised Bit 6 Network 4 not firing Bit 7 Network 4 not synchronised Bit 8 Strategy in Standby Mode Bit 9 Strategy in Telemetry Mode Bits 10 to 15 Reserved Faultdet Watchdog Indicates Watchdog Relay Status 1 Active uint8 06A7 1703 FiringOP 1 DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04BA 1210 FiringOP 1 Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04BE 1214 FiringOP 1 In Input of the firing output block float32 04BB 1211 FiringOP 1 LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04B4 1204 0 3S 1 3D 2 4S 3 6D FiringOP 1 LoadType Load type configuration 0 Resistive 1 XFMR uint8 04B5 1205 FiringOP 1 Mode Firing Mode indication uint8 04B6 1206 0 IHC 1 Burst 2 PA 3 None FiringOP 1 PaLimitln Phase angle input for PA reduction in burst firing float32 04BC 1212 FiringOP 1 SafetyRamp Safety ramp duration float32 04B7 1207 FiringOP 1 SafetyRampStatus Status of the safety ramp O Ramping 1 Finished luint8 04BD 1213 FiringOP 1 SoftStart Soft start duration float32 04B8 1208 FiringOP 1 SoftStop Soft stop duration O Off 1 On float32 04B9 1209 FiringOP 2 DelayedTrigger Delayed Triggering for transformer loads uint8 04CF 1231 FiringOP 2 Enable Enable of the firing output block uint8 04D3 1235 FiringOP 2 In Input of the firing output block float32 04DO 1232 FiringOP 2 LoadCoupling Load coupling configuration uint8 04C9 1225 0 3S 1 3D 2
362. ring it and finally downloading it to the instrument Initially blocks and associated wires are drawn with dashed lines and when in this state the parameter list for the block is enabled but the block is not executed by the instrument The block is added to the instrument function block execution list when the Download icon is operated and the items are redrawn using solid lines If a block which has been downloaded is deleted it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form until the download button is pressed This is because it and any wires to from it are still being executed in the instrument On download it will be removed from the instrument execution list and the diagram A ghosted block can be undeleted as described in Context menu above When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately HA179769 Page 126 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 4 PARAMETER EXPLORER This view is displayed ie 2 3 4 Ds by clicking on the Parameter Explorer toolbar icon BB Parameter Explorer by double clicking on the relevant block in the tree pane or in the graphical wiring editor by selecting Function Block View from the Function block context menu in the Graphical wiring Editor by selecting parameter Explorer from the View menu by using the short cut lt Alt gt lt Enter gt In each case the function block parameters appear in the iTools window in tabular form such as the exampl
363. riod Displays true power measurement for the power network on the main period in phase angle and in burst firing Apparent power measurement Power Factor calculation Reactive power Calculation Load impedance for primary unit 2nd Phase load impedance 3rd Phase load impedance Heatsink temperature 1 Used in alarm strategy Heatsink temperature 2 Heatsink temperature 3 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 87 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 20 1 MEAS SUBMENU Cont This submenu presents power network measurements according to the network type All available measurements are listed below but which values actually appear depends on the network configuration Frequency Vline Vline2 Vline 3 12 13 Average 12 Burst 12 2Maxim Irms Max V V2 V3 V Average V2 Burst V2 V2 Maxim Vrms Max P Burst PF 72 Z3 HSink1 2 3 T Displays the calculated frequency of the supply voltage of the power channel associated with this network Supply voltage measurement on the primary power module Displays line to neutral except in three phase or two leg control when line to line voltage is displayed As for VLine but for power modules two and three respectively Load Irms measurement on primary power module The time base measurement is the main period in Phase Angle and the modulation period in Burst Mode As for above but for power modules two and three respectivel
364. rmally green but red in error or alarm states C Displays the units associated with the currently displayed process value For EPower parameters shows the network for the currently displayed process variable This displays scrolling event and or alarm messages e g INPUT SENSOR BROKEN ALM Indicates an active alarm Flashes if alarm unacknowledged SPX Alternative setpoint Not used in this application REM Illuminated when Remote Setpoint is selected for this EPower network RUN Timer or programmer running held Not used in this application MAN Illuminated when Local Setpoint is selected for this EPower network OP1 Illuminated if output 1 relay is active OP2 Illuminated if output 2 is active Not used in this application OP3 Illuminated if output 3 has been configured to retransmit the process value OP4 Illuminated if output 4 is active Not used in this application Four buttons to allow navigation and configuration functions Page key Toggles between process variable and summary parameters Also used simultaneously with the Scroll key to acknowledge alarms Scroll key Press to select new parameter Hold down to scroll through O parameters Also used simultaneously with the Page key to acknowledge alarms Q Up Arrow Used to change increase a parameter value O Down Arrow Used to change decrease a parameter value o If flashing this arrow head indicates that communications with EPowe
365. rrent scale adjustment float32 0132 306 Network 1 Setup IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0136 310 0 Ext100A 8 400A 16 Ext1300A 1 Ext160A 9 630A 17 Ext1700A 2 Ext250A 10 500A 18 Ext2000A 3 Ext400A 11 Ext500A 19 Ext3000A 4 Ext630A 12 50A 20 Ext4000A 5 100A 13 Ext50A 21 Ext5000A 6 160A 14 Ext800A 7 250A 15 Ext1000A Network 1 Setup INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 0135 309 Network 1 Setup NetType The type of network Set in Instrument Configuration uint8 0133 307 0 3Ph 1 1Ph 2 2Ph Network 1 Setup OverlThreshold Over Current Threshold uint16 012E 302 Network 1 Setup OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0128 296 Network 1 Setup PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 012B 299 0 Not adjusted 1 Adjusted Network 1 Setup PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 0131 305 O No 7 Request Network 1 Setup PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 012C 300 Network 1 Setup PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 012D 301 Network 1 Setup UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0129 297 Network 1 Setup VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 0123 291 Network 1 Setup VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 0140 320 Network 1 Setup VlineNominal Line nominal value float32 0130 304 Network 1 Setup VloadNominal Load Nominal voltage float32 0134 308 Network 1 Setu
366. rt the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 0595 1429 1O Digital 5 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 0596 1430 1O Digital 5 PV Process variable bool 0597 1431 1O Digital 5 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 0594 1428 1O Digital 6 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool O5A4 1444 1O Digital 6 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool O5A5 1445 1O Digital 6 PV Process variable bool O5A6 1446 1O Digital 6 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 05A3 1443 1O Digital 7 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 05B3 1459 1O Digital 7 MeasVal Measured value for outputs 1 output high bool 05B4 1460 1O Digital 7 PV Process variable bool 05B5 1461 IO Digital 7 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 05B2 1458 IO Digital 8 Invert Invert the sense of the digital lO 0 No 1 Invert bool 05C2 1474 1O Digital 8 MeasVal Measured value bool 05C3 1475 1O Digital 8 PV Process variable bool 05C4 1476 1O Digital 8 Type As lO Digital 1 Type uint8 05C1 1473 IO Relay 1 MeasVa Measured value bool 0670 1648 1O Relay 1 PV Process Variable bool 066F 1647 IO Relay 2 MeasVa Measured value bool 067C 1660 IO Relay 2 PV Process Variable bool 067B 1659 IO Relay 3 MeasVa Measured value bool 0688 1672 1O Relay 3 PV Process Variable bool 0687 1671 IO Relay 4 MeasVa Measured value bool 0694 1684 IO Relay 4 PV Process Variable bool 0693 1683 IPMonitor 1 AlarmDays Alarm time in days above
367. rtial load failure adjustment request To make the Partial Load Failure PLF alarm operate correctly the normal steady state condition must be known to the instrument This is done by activating the PLF Adjust Req for each Network once the controlled process has achieved a steady state condition This causes a load impedance measurement to be made which is used as a reference for detecting a partial load failure If the load impedance measurement is successful PLFAdjusted below is set The measurement fails if the load voltage V is below 30 of VNominal or the current I is below 30 of INominal The PLF alarm becomes active as setup in PLF Sensitivity below Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge Indicates that the user requested a PLF adjustment and that the adjustment was successful Partial load failure sensitivity This defines how sensitive the partial load failure detection is to be as the ratio between the load impedance for a PLFadjusted load and the current impedance measurement For example for a load of N parallel identical elements if the PLF Sensitivity s is set to 2 then a PLF alarm will occur if N 2 or more elements are broken i e open circuit If PLF Sensitivity is set to 3 then a PLF alarm occurs if N 3 or more elements are broken If N s is non integer then the sensitivity is rounded up E G if the N 6 and s 4 then the alarm is triggered if 2 or more elements are broken Page 90 HA179
368. s Note when entering from configuration level no password is required Once Engineer level has been selected the unit restarts in the Engineer top level menu AnyMenu M Operate Return repeatedly until no further changes occur AnyMenu enu then hold continuously EP nes until the access page appears ED Hold 4 to 5 secs Access Goto 4 Operator Display depends on existing access level Use up down arrow key to select Engineer Once selected wait a few seconds or operate the Enter key for pass code page Access Goto 4 Engineer D Code 1 Default code 2 but this may be edited in Code 2 the Configuration menu Wait or ED 120 3A 29943w Summary page 55 Hold Enter operated until first engineer level menu page appears gt Access AnaloglP AnalogOP Figure 6 1 1 Access to the Engineer level menu HA179769 Page 44 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 1 2 Configuration level menu The Configuration level menu is entered as follows figure 6 1 2 1 Operate the return key repeatedly until no further changes occur then hold the Return key continuously operated until the Access Goto display appears 2 Use the up or down arrow key until Configuration appears 3 Either wait for a few seconds or operate the Enter key 4 Use the up or down arrow key to change the code to the Engineer level code factory default 3 but reconfigurable in the CONF
369. s ite 2 3 From any display press and hold the page key until Lev 3 or ConF appears Operate the down arrow one or more times to display the required access level After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display A5 4 1 Level 3 Conf parameters Any display LEu 3 GOTO After a few seconds CODE O 2 Q gt 3 CODE ka Press and hold for 5 seconds O GOTO ConF After a few seconds 0 CODE 0 3 O 4 CODE After a few seconds HOME Figure A5 4 Selecting level 3 or Conf Most Level 3 and or Configuration level parameters associated with the remote panel indicator are described in the 3200i Engineering Handbook HA029006 available from the manufacturer There are a number of additional parameters associated with the 32h8e which are described below Level 3 access level makes those operating parameters which are not Read only available to the user Examples are Input Filter Time Constant Alarm Delay time and so on Level 3 is used typically when commissioning the indicator Configuration level enables the fundamental characteristics of the indicator to be changed This includes the quick start code parameters amongst others The menu structures for Level 3 and Configuration levels are identical see figure A5 4 1a but there are more parameters available within each heading at
370. s Goto 4 Config YID WA Access Goto Access Goto 2 Operator Operator Menu 1D HA Access Goto Access Pass Code Quick Start Menu Use up down arrows to select pass code default 4 then wait or use Enter key Figure 6 3 2a GoTo menu To change access level the Enter key is operated once to select Goto then for a second time to enter the Goto selection page The up down keys are used to select the required access level After a few seconds or after a further entry of the Enter key the unit restarts in the selected level except for Quick Start which requires the relevant Pass Code default 4 to be entered HA179769 Page 48 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 3 3 CONFIGURATION LEVEL ACCESS MENU Cont PASS CODE EDITING CONF Access See figure 6 3 2a for GoTo menu items Access Goto Config ED If access level left unchanged sEn Acces gineer Use up down arrows to set Code 42 new pass code default 2 C Access Use up down arrows to set ED Code new pass code default 3 onfig 3 Access Quick Use up down arrows to set Code new pass code default 4 Access CA 3 Quick Co Access E Access Keylock Use up down arrows to set Kevlock aN user interface access for gt Keyloc EID y None Operator Engineer levels A L P Back to Goto Figure 6 3 2b Access configuration Code As depi
371. s alarm ack Partial Load Failure uint8 0377 887 Network 4 AlmAck PLU Process alarm ack Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0378 888 Network 4 AlmAck PreTemp Process alarm ack Pre Temperature uint8 037A 890 Network 4 AlmAck ThyrSC System alarm ack Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 036E 878 Network 4 AlmAck TLF Process alarm ack Total Load Failure uint8 0375 885 Network 4 AlmDet ChopOff Process alarm detection status Chop Off uint8 0349 841 Network 4 AlmDet FreqFault System alarm detection status Frequency Fault uint8 0346 838 Network 4 AlmDet FuseBlown System alarm detection status Fuse Blown uint8 0343 835 Network 4 AlmDet MainsVoltFault Process alarm detection Status Mains Voltage Fault uint8 034C 844 Network 4 AlmDet MissMains System alarm detection status Missing Mains uint8 0340 832 Network 4 AlmDet NetworkDips System alarm detection status Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0345 837 Network 4 AlmDet OpenThyr System alarm detection status Open Thyristor uint8 0342 834 Network 4 AlmDet OverCurrent Indication alarm detection Status Over Current uint8 034E 846 Network 4 AlmDet OverTemp System alarm detection status Over Temperature uint8 0344 836 Network 4 AlmDet PB24VFail System alarm detection status Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0347 839 Network 4 AlmDet PLF Process alarm detection status Partial Load Failure uint8 034A 842 Network 4 AlmDet PLU Process alarm detection status Partial Load Unbalance uint8 034B 843 Network 4 AlmDet PreTemp Process alarm detec
372. s alarm detection status Total Load Failure uint8 02A3 675 Network 3 AlmDis ChopOff Process alarm Chop Off uint8 0295 661 Network 3 AlmDis FreqFault System alarm Frequency Fault uint8 0292 658 Network 3 AlmDis FuseBlown System alarm Fuse Blown uint8 028F 655 Network 3 AlmDis MainsVoltFault Process alarm Mains Voltage Fault uint8 0298 664 Network 3 AlmDis MissMains System alarm Missing Mains uint8 028C 652 Network 3 AlmDis NetworkDips System alarm Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0291 657 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 165 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 166 Issue 9 Aug 12 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 3 AlmDis OpenThyr System alarm Open Thyristor uint8 028E 654 Network 3 AlmDis OverCurrent Indication alarm Over Current uint8 029A 666 Network 3 AlmDis OverTemp System alarm Over Temperature uint8 0290 656 Network 3 AlmDis PB24VFail System alarm Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0293 659 Network 3 AlmDis PLF Process alarm Partial Load Failure uint8 0296 662 Network 3 AlmDis PLU Process alarm Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0297 663 Network 3 AlmDis PreTemp Process alarm Pre Temperature uint8 0299 665 Network 3 AlmDis ThyrSC System alarm Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 028D 653 Network 3 AlmDis TLF Process alarm Total Load Failure uint8 0294 660 Network 3 AlmLat ChopOff Process alarm latch Chop Off uint8 02C2 706 Network 3 AlmLat FreqFault System alarm latch Frequ
373. s and three LED beacons pa Beacons Figure 3 Operator interface 3 1 DISPLAY As mentioned above the display consists of four lines of characters these characters being formed using a seven high by five wide dot matrix This display together with the four pushbuttons allows full operation and configuration of the unit 3 2 PUSHBUTTONS The functions of the four pushbuttons below the display depend on whether the unit is in configuration mode or in operating mode EP GH ES Return Scroll Scroll Enter Down Up 3 2 1 Configuration Return Generally this button reverses the last operation of the Enter button Scroll down up Allows the user to scroll through the available menu items or values The up down arrow symbol appears against menu items that can be edited Enter Goes to next menu item 3 2 2 Operation In operation two pushbuttons may be operated simultaneously to carry out the following functions Scroll up Scroll down Acknowledge alarms Scroll up Enter Toggle between Local and Remote operation Scroll down Enter PLF adjustment request 3 2 3 Menu item value selection Menu items are scrolled through using the enter key Editing of the item s value is carried out by scrolling through the available choices using the up and down scroll keys Once the desired value is displayed it will become the selected value approximately two seconds after the f
374. s edie clay 201 Red wiring editor items anan nan 124 Process Value Transfer active 202 Redo E EB WAGE BANG Ea A 118 Profibus Reduction factor caos se Joni KAL ad t ha 184 rt a 16 A O 105 Specification ad 208 Modbus parameter addresses coco 154 Profinet lO Pino ticas KA 17 Specification 10 60sec sees naaa 207 Protection maala a ale eed Ca ea al EER er Ek 204 Watchdog 1 eee eeee eee nanana 13 PEOTOCO ka Kama A ANG LNG Bea BB JA Nd 54 Relay Tuli anna 13 PRS AA AA 226 Ue e RA LAG ha 35 36 Be Rtas dace a le UN a 97 194 194 REM Beacon an na a na 212 220 POMO Phoned i ta aE NU E N AS 202 Remote A EA E D lan aw 97 184 197 Panel connector L A aano nanasa 18 PU eee Ning An PA NAA A E T E RG 0G 226 Remote Local switching 0 sees aan 31 PU aa hae Beant AA Pma EN 226 Select ak ieee eee eee ALNG 107 A Bua te Sy aceasta relent age ge an aoe estos 71 Voltage sensing aaa nananana 20 PulseScale ci ed a AA eas biga BN Hi 71 ere UOCE 107 3 emove Pushto Bak 123 Allitems from this page sumama 139 Function block context menu 120 Recipe aaa aiara niin 136 Wire context MENU anuru 122 Selected item PN Ma Hee EN 139 RUSADUTONS taa 31 Rename Wiring Editor diagram a 124 AA AA AG NA ACR dE 5g ReRoute HA179769 Index Issue 9 Aug 12 Page vii EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE WWE Sr e ie tn ada ipo kay ath Alas Gran 2 ode AE 119 121 Names miya putter ind a Ah aa
375. s the selected data set with values Short cut lt ctrl gt lt A gt Clear the selected data set Removes values from the selected data set Short cut lt Shift gt lt Delete gt Open OPC Scope Opens a separate utility that allows trending data logging and Dynamic Data Exchange DDE OPC Scope is an OPC explorer program that can connect to any OPC server that is in the windows registry OPC is an acronym for OLE for Process Control where OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding 7 7 3 Watch Recipe Context Menu The Watch Recipe Context menu items have the same functions as described above for toolbar items HA179769 Page 136 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 8 USER PAGES User Pages Up to four user pages each with four lines can be created and downloaded to the unit These allow the operator interface to display particular sets of values in various formats Figure 7 8 below shows the initial display when User Pages is first clicked on epower 123 456 789 100 502 1D001 EPower User Page Editor DAR a i 9 al Promote Parameter List 0 items Style List Parameter User Text Selected User Page Selected Promote Parameter Graph Low MEA Graph High ltemNr 1 100 00 Style Figure 7 8 Blank User Page 7 8 1 User Page creation 1 Click on the up down arrow to select the required Page number for configuration Page 1 2 Double click one of the cells in the
376. schematic and practical wiring arrangements for a number of common three phase configurations Earthing and driver module wiring are omitted for the sake of clarity Fuses where fitted should have values compatible with the current carrying capacity of the associated wiring Appendix B contains a discussion of external feedback CAUTION 1 Neutral phase reference connections if applicable must be located between any isolating device and the relevant Power Module 2 For single phase configurations all Neutral reference connections must be individually fused Note The figures below are intended only as theoretical examples In order to comply with NEC requirements branch circuit protection must be incorporated by the user upstream of the equipment Such protection is not shown in the figures below for the sake of clarity The installation in its entirety must comply with all applicable local safety and emissions regulations Fuse rating must be lower than cable current rating THREE PHASE STAR CONFIGURATIONS 1 11 2 71 Phase rx EPower NE Phase 1 0 O aaa lt Phase 2 Phase 3 O_ O _ Vline o Neutral HIT V 5 Isolating TAT 3112 5 13 device J a m Fused 3 5 5 Neu
377. seBad Output value displays False Status displays Bad TrueGood Output value displays True Status displays Good TrueBad Output value displays True Status displays Bad Invert Allows none either or both inputs to be inverted Output Shows the current output value Status Shows the status of the output Good or Bad Hysteresis For comparison operators only e g gt this allows a hysteresis value to be entered For example ifthe operator is gt and hysteresis op VPI Wr2m ver gt curr P1 is H then the output goes high when input 1 um exceeds input 2 and remains high until input 4 G 1 falls to a value less than Input 2 H Not applicable to the equals function t t t i p 1 o p latches first transition of i p1 o p follows i p1 o p latches first transition ofi p1 o p follows i p1 o p latches first transition ofi p1 o p When i p2 goes low o p follows the next positive or negative transition of i p 1 points X and latches at this value until i p2 goes high When i p2 is high 0 p follows i p1 i p 2 Figure 6 16 1 Latch operation HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 81 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 17 LGC8 EIGHT INPUT LOGIC OPERATOR MENU This allows between 2 and 8 inputs to be combined using an AND OR or Exclusive OR EXOR logic function The inputs
378. set float32 03FE 1022 Control 3 Setup FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 03FC 1020 Control 3 Setup NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 03F9 1017 Control 3 Setup Standby Put controller into standby uint8 03F8 1016 Control 3 Setup TransferEn Enable Transfer Proportional limit uint8 03FB 1019 Control 4 See Control 1 for enumeration values Control 4 AlmAck ClosedLoop Process alarm ack Closed loop break uint8 044D 1101 Control 4 AlmAck Limitation Indication alarm ack Limitation uint8 044F 1103 Control 4 AlmAck PVTransfer Indication alarm ack PV transfer uint8 044E 1102 Control 4 AlmDet ClosedLoop Process alarm detection status Closed loop break uint8 0444 1092 Control 4 AlmDet Limitation Indication alarm detection status Limitation uint8 0446 1094 Control 4 AlmDet PVTransfer Indication alarm detection status PV transfer uint8 0445 1093 Control 4 AlmDis ClosedLoop Process alarm Closed loop break uint8 0441 1089 Control 4 AlmDis Limitation Indication alarm Limitation uint8 0443 1091 Control 4 AlmDis PVTransfer Indication alarm PV transfer uint8 0442 1090 Control 4 AlmLat ClosedLoop Process alarm latch Closed loop break uint8 044A 1098 Control 4 AlmLat Limitation Indication alarm latch Limitation uint8 044C 1100 Control 4 AlmLat PVTransfer Indication alarm latch PV transfer uint8 044B 1099 Control 4 AlmSig ClosedLoop Process alarm signalling status Closed loop break uint8 0447 1095 Control 4 AlmSig Li
379. sharing enabled See section 9 3 2 IncrT1 Incremental control type 1 section 9 2 1 3 IncrT2 Incremental control type 2 section 9 2 2 4 RotIncr Rotating incremental control section 9 2 3 5 Distrib Distributed control section 9 2 4 6 Distlncr Incremental distributed control section 9 2 5 Note If Type is not LMNo and Address is non zero the Master impose its own Type of Load Management on the associated slaves PERIOD This configures the modulation period for the Station This is used only by the PLM master and is imposed on all slaves It is recommended that all slaves are configured to have the same modulation period so that should the master lose control the newly elected master will inherit the period from the previous master If the period is different the new master imposes its own period on the network at the next power cycle Period may be set in the range of 50 to 1000 mains periods The accuracy of the power control is related to this value To increase the accuracy you must increase the period section 9 1 2 Function block location LoadMng Main Parameter name Period Accessible Always Minimum access level for editing Config Type Uint16 Values Min 50 Max 1000 mains periods HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 193 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 9 5 2 PREDICTIVE LOAD MANAGEMENT FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Cont ADDRESS Address ofthe Station on the Network This
380. ss senie tp a YG 54 55 194 SpecificatiO ceure LANG AE se ark kesh alta aa 205 Predictive load management 96 AnaloglP Ala MO Utrera ia a 110 Modbus parameter addresses 152 153 Alarms AND3 ud ma Ne LAG NG ats ae ee ANA 80 82 Acknowledgement 31 65 219 230 AYALA Soe NG KA e a AK GA 73 Global coral 73 ASCER tt Uta 228 Beacon Remote panel o oooooooooomo o 230 Atmosphere operating Spec 6 0 cece eee eee eee 204 Days MIMS AA AA 79 Auto scrolling ooo akan KP eae naawa 228 229 Ba AE 62 Autoscale vi ta NE de NG BE pA MGA NG an a al t 71 Disable aT de BA a UA AG TONG NA 61 92 B dication aa ti elt O 202 230 O ahhh Ka kar kata ma 129 A AN maar ahs AA CE AA AA 138 SD a ia Bar Graph TOE pA ng aa 138 PTO E An kab aa inate aes PAA Be A O a 54 55 Signalling ASSESS eS DEAN a BAL Ba ANG NAA BANAL 32 O da sei ie ed gt Ka Black wiring editor items 124 SYStEM Lana nananana kana Block execution order cee 118 AlarmsSPi nad do a dido NA kamao dn a es 110 Blue Align Tops Lefts ana Aes nean ta lp AA tics 124 irow ES N S 226 DOWN akslar ma 136 132 ALM DRACO hima 021 Da daye KAG rin PATAG BEAN KABA 219 230 LefuRight ee ALM indicator 32 PAGA AATA AS ES JON AlmAck Wiring editor items 2 0 eee eee eee 124 Analogue output eee eee 52 Bring To Front CON tO sac slic ears AA atta eke a a sa AA ANNA AA aaa 120 Load BAON O ha 8 A Mo
381. ssible to enable all of the SetProv function blocks thus allowing each control block to have individual local or remote setpoints This flexibility has an effect on the operation of the REM and MAN beacons as described in section A5 1 1 A6 3 1 Setpoint availability MULTIPLE SINGLE PHASE CONFIGURATION Figure A6 3 1a shows three examples of different single phase setpoint configurations Figure A6 3 1b is similar but shows three phase 2 x 2 leg examples SetProv 1 Control 1 Control 2 Control 3 With SetProv 1 supplying all control blocks only SP1 is available at the 32h8E Figure A6 3 With SetProv 1 supplying both control blocks only SP1 is available at the 32h8E SetProv 1 Control 1 Control 2 Control 3 With no SetProv blocks enabled SP1 SP2 and SP3 are all available at the 32h8E SetProv 1 PE If each network is wired to its own SetProv block SP1 SP2 and SP3 are all available at the 32h8E la Setpoint availability multiple single phases Control 1 Control 3 If no SetProv 1 blocks enabled SP1and SP2 are both available atthe 32h8e SetProv 1 EZ If each network is wired to its own SetProv block SP1 and SP2 are available at the 32h8e SetProv 3 Figure A6 3 1b Setpoint availability three phase 2 x 2 leg A6 4 PV RETRANSMISSION EPower parameters may be communicated to a Fieldbus Network Master i e S
382. st Average square value of load current in burst firing float32 0251 593 Network 3 Meas IsqMax Maximum squared current in a 3 phase network float32 0253 595 Network 3 Meas P True power measurement float32 025B 603 Network 3 Meas PBurst True Power measurement in burst firing float32 025A 602 Network 3 Meas PF Power Factor float32 025D 605 Network 3 Meas O Reactive Power float32 025E 606 Network 3 Meas S Apparent power measurement float32 025C 604 Network 3 Meas V Vrms of the load float32 0254 596 Network 3 Meas V2 Vrms2 ofthe load float32 0255 597 Network 3 Meas V3 Vrms3 of the load float32 0256 598 Network 3 Meas Vavg Average value of Vrms float32 0257 599 Network 3 Meas Vline Line voltage measurement float32 024A 586 Network 3 Meas Vline2 Line voltage measurement float32 024B 587 Network 3 Meas Vline3 Line voltage measurement float32 024C 588 Network 3 Meas VrmsMax Maximum rms voltages in the 3 phase network float32 026B 619 Network 3 Meas Vsq Square value of load voltage float32 0258 600 Network 3 Meas VsqBurst Average square value of the load voltage in burst firing float32 0263 611 Network 3 Meas VsqMax Maximum squared voltages in the 3 phase network float32 0259 601 Network 3 Meas Z Load impedance float32 025F 607 Network 3 Meas Z2 Load impedance2 float32 0260 608 Network 3 Meas Z3 Load impedance3 float32 0261 609 Network 3 Setup ChopOfNb Chop Off Number uint8 0270 624 Network 3 Setup ChopOffThreshold1 Chop Off Threshold1
383. stPage 1 CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 07F9 2041 CustPage 1 CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 07FA 2042 CustPage 1 CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 07FB 2043 CustPage 1 Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 07FC 2044 CustPage 1 Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 07FD 2045 CustPage 1 Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 07FE 2046 CustPage 1 Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 07FF 2047 CustPage 1 UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4000 16384 CustPage 1 UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4005 16389 CustPage 1 UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 400A 16394 CustPage 1 UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 400F 16399 CustPage 2 CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 080C 2060 CustPage 2 CISP2 Parameter 2 uint32 080D 2061 CustPage 2 CISP3 Parameter 3 uint32 080E 2062 CustPage 2 CISP4 Parameter 4 uint32 080F 2063 CustPage 2 Style1 Custom Line 1 Style uint8 0810 2064 CustPage 2 Style2 Custom Line 2 Style uint8 0811 2065 CustPage 2 Style3 Custom Line 3 Style uint8 0812 2066 CustPage 2 Style4 Custom Line 4 Style uint8 0813 2067 CustPage 2 UserText1 Custom Text 1 string 4014 16404 CustPage 2 UserText2 Custom Text 2 string 4019 16409 CustPage 2 UserText3 Custom Text 3 string 401E 16414 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 147 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Page 148 Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec CustPage 2 UserText4 Custom Text 4 string 4023 16419 CustPage 3 CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 0820 2080 CustPage 3 CISP2 Parameter 2 ui
384. stor uint8 02D9 729 Network 3 AlmStop OverCurrent Indication alarm stop Over Current uint8 02E5 741 Network 3 AlmStop OverTemp System alarm stop Over Temperature uint8 02DB 731 Network 3 AlmStop PB24VFail System alarm stop Power Board 24V Failure uint8 02DE 734 Network 3 AlmStop PLF Process alarm stop Partial Load Failure uint8 02E1 737 Network 3 AlmStop PLU Process alarm stop Partial Load Unbalance uint8 02E2 738 Network 3 AlmStop PreTemp Process alarm stop Pre Temperature uint8 02E4 740 Network 3 AlmStop ThyrsC System alarm stop Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 02D8 728 Network 3 AlmStop TLF Process alarm stop Total Load Failure uint8 02DF 735 Network 3 Meas Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0262 610 Network 3 Meas HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 0264 612 Network 3 Meas HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 0265 613 Network 3 Meas HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 0266 614 Network 3 Meas Irms of the load float32 024D 589 Network 3 Meas 12 Irms2 ofthe load float32 024E 590 Network 3 Meas 13 Irms3 of the load float32 024F 591 HA179769 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Network 3 Meas lavg Average value of Irms float32 0250 592 Network 3 Meas IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network float32 026A 618 Network 3 Meas Isq Square value of the load current float32 0252 594 Network 3 Meas IsqBur
385. sys com Beijing Office Telephone 86 10 5909 5700 Fax 86 10 5909 5709 10 E mail info eurotherm cn invensys com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone 33 478 664500 Fax 33 478 352490 E mail info eurotherm fr invensys com Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2012 GERMANY Limburg Invensys Systems GmbH gt EUROTHERM lt Telephone 49 6431 2980 Fax 49 6431 298119 E mail info eurotherm de invensys com INDIA Mumbai Invensys India Pvt Ltd Telephone 91 22 67579800 Fax 91 22 67579999 E mail info eurotherm in invensys com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone 353 1 4691800 Fax 353 1 4691300 E mail info eurotherm ie invensys com ITALY Como Eurotherm S r l Telephone 39 031 975111 Fax 39 031 977512 E mail info eurotherm it invensys com KOREA Seoul Invensys Operations Management Korea Telephone 82 2 2090 0900 Fax 82 2 2090 0800 E mail info eurotherm kr invensys com NETHERLANDS Alphen a d Rijn Eurotherm B V Telephone 31 172 411752 Fax 31 172 417260 E mail info eurotherm nI invensys com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z 0 0 Telephone 48 32 7839500 Fax 48 32 7843608 7843609 E mail info eurotherm pI invensys com POLAND Warsaw Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o o Telephone 48 22 8556010 Fax 48 22 8556011 E mail bieru invensys systems pl SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm Espa a SA Telephone 34 91 6616001 Fax
386. t STANDARD INPUTS OUTPUTS SK1 All figures are with respect to driver module OV unless otherwise stated Number of inputs outputs Number of analogue inputs 2 Number of analogue outputs 1 Number of digital inputs outputs 2 each configurable as an input or an output 10V Potentiometer supply 1 Update rate Twice the mains frequency applied to power module 1 Defaults to 83 2 Hz 12 ms if no power applied to power module 1 or if supply frequency lies outside the range 47 to 6 3Hz Termination Removable 10 way connector 5 08 mm pitch ANALOGUE INPUTS Performance See tables 11 a and 11 b Input types Each input is configurable as one of 0 to 10V 1 to 5V 2 to 10V 0 to 5V O to 20mA 4 to 20 mA Absolute maxima terminal 16V or 40mA terminal 1 5V or 300mA ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Performance See tables 11c and 11d Output types Each output is configurable as one of 0 to 10V 1 to 5 V 2 to 10V 0 to 5V 0 to 20mA 4 to 20 mA Absolute maxima terminal 0 7V or 300mA or 16V or 40mA OV terminal 2A 10V POTENTIOMETER SUPPLY Output voltage 10 3V 0 3V 5 5mA Short circuit o p current 15mA max Ambient temperature drift 0 012 C typ 0 04 C max Absolute maxima Pin1 0 7V or 300mA or 16V or 40mA DIGITAL I O Hardware response time 100us Voltage inputs Active level high 4 4V lt Vin lt 30V Non active level low 30V lt Vin lt 2 3V Input impedance 10kQ Contact
387. t 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Y Y Y Irms of the load 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Vims of the load 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 sqBurst Average square value of the i 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 sq Square value of load voltage j 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 True Power measurement in J 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 True power measurement 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Apparent power measuremer 1 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Power Factor 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Reactive Power i 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Load impedance 298 3 40282346638529024E38 10000000000 00 10000000000 00 Figure 7 4 1a Typical parameter table Notes ills Parameters in blue are non editable Read only In the example above all the parameters are read only Read write parameters are in black and have a pencil symbol in the read Write access column at the left edge of the table A number of such items are shown in figure 7 4a above Columns The default explorer window figure 7 4a contains the columns Name Description Address Value and Wired From As can be seen from figure 7 4b the columns to be displayed can be selected to a certain extent using either the Explorer menu or the context menu Limits have been enabled for the example above Hidden Parameters By default iTools hides parameters which are considered irrelevant in the current context Such hi
388. t of the current recipe values and saves them in a recipe number from 1 to 5 nonE does not save donE appears after a successful save See section A6 2 for further details Display units Table A5 3 1 below shows the available units in down arrow scroll order Definition Definition Definition No units Kelvins Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius Kilograms Grams Milligrams Miles hour ph pH Hours Minutes Seconds Milliseconds Revs minute Parts per milion Ohms Millivolts MilliAmps Amps Volts carbon potential carbon dioxide oxygen relative humidity Litres per minute Litres per hour Torr mm of mercury inches of water gauge mm of water gauge Kilograms square cm Pounds square inch Millibar Bar KiloPascals MegaPascals Pascals Percent Page 226 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 4 LEVEL 3 AND CONF LEVEL OPERATION To switch to level 3 parameters figure A5 4 1 2 3 4 From any display press and hold the page key until Lev 3 appears Lev1 or Lev2 appears first keep holding If required operate the up arrow to display ConF In either case after a few seconds the Code page appears Use the up arrow key twice to enter the value 3 to enter level 3 or 4 to enter Configuration level After a few seconds the display reverts to the home display To return to lower access level
389. t the current style for the selected parameter Short cut lt ctrl gt lt S gt 2 Remove all items from this page After confirmation this removes ALL items from the parameter list not just the highlighted ones Short cut lt ctrl gt lt X gt Note Most if the above functions are also to be found in the Pages menu in the context menu along with Parameter Help and Parameter properties items HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 139 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 PARAMETER ADDRESSES MODBUS 8 1 INTRODUCTION The iTools address fields display each parameter s Modbus address to be used when addressing integer values over the serial communications link In order to access these values as IEEE floating point values the calculation IEEE address Modbus address x 2 hex 8000 should be used The Communications manual HA179770 gives details of how to establish a suitable communications link Notes la Certain parameters may have values which exceed the maximum value that can be read from or written to using a 16 bit integer communications Such parameters have a scaling factor applied to them as described in section 8 3 When using 16 bit scaled integer modbus addressing time parameters can be read from or written to in 10ths of minutes or in 10ths of seconds as defined in the parameter Instrument config TimerRes 8 2 PARAMETER TYPES The following parameter types are used bool u
390. talised Shows the total energy value for the relevant network Not reset by Reset above This enables a pulse output which causes a pulse to be generated at a specified number of watt hours 1 10 100kW h or 1MW h The length of the pulse and a scaling factor can be entered as described below Allows a scaling units value to be entered for the energy display Selectable as 1Wh 10Wh 100Wh 1kWh 10kWh TOOkWh 1MWh TOMWh 100MWh or 1GWh As UsrUnit above but for the total energy counter One pulse is generated every n Watt hours where n can be selected as 1 10 100 1k 10k 100k 1M Watt hours This value and that of Pulse Len gth must be chosen to suit the application such that the next pulse is not requested before the previous one is finished In such a case the PulseScale factor is automatically increased Select pulse length between 0 and 32000 ms The actual pulse length is rounded to the next longest multiple of 1 2 the supply frequency Thus for a 50Hz system multiple 10ms pulse length entries of 1 to 10 will result in a pulse length of 10ms For entries of 11 to 20 the pulse length will be 20ms and so on This value and that of Pulse Scale must be chosen to suit the application such that the next pulse is not requested before the previous one is finished In such a case the PulseScale factor is automatically increased One only of the Energy blocks can be defined as being Global T
391. tate Interpretation LED state Interpretation Off No power Off No link no activity Steady green Controlled by a scanner in Run state Steady green Link established Flashing green Not configured or scanner in Idle state Flickering green Activity in progress Steady red Major fault Exception state fatal error etc Flashing red Recoverable fault Figure 2 2 11 Ethernet I P connector pinout NS Network status LED LINK LED LED state Interpretation LED state Interpretation Off No power or no connection Off No link no activity On line RUN connection with I O controller Link established no established Controller in Run state activity Flashing On line STOP connection with lO controller Flashing Green Activity in progress established Controller in Stop state Ms Module status LED LED state Interpretation Off Not initialised No power or the module is in SETUP or NW INIT state Green steady Normal operation The module has shifted from the NW_INIT state Green 1 flash Diagnostic event One or more Diagnostic Event present Green 2 flash Blink Used by engineering tools to identify the node on the network Red steady Exception error The module is in the EXCEPTION state Red flash Configuration error The Expected Identification differs from the Real Identification Red 2 flash IP address error The IP address is not set Red 3 flash Station Name error The Station name is not set Red 4
392. tem alarm stop Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0381 897 Network 4 AlmStop OpenThyr System alarm stop Open Thyristor uint8 037E 894 Network 4 AlmStop OverCurrent Indication alarm stop Over Current uint8 038A 906 Network 4 AlmStop OverTemp System alarm stop Over Temperature uint8 0380 896 Network 4 AlmStop PB24VFail System alarm stop Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0383 899 Network 4 AlmStop PLF Process alarm stop Partial Load Failure uint8 0386 902 Network 4 AlmStop PLU Process alarm stop Partial Load Unbalance uint8 0387 903 Network 4 AlmStop PreTemp Process alarm stop Pre Temperature uint8 0389 905 Network 4 AlmStop ThyrsC System alarm stop Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 037D 893 Network 4 AlmStop TLF Process alarm stop Total Load Failure uint8 0384 900 Network 4 Meas Frequency Frequency of the line float32 0307 775 Network 4 Meas HtSinkTemp Heatsink 1 temperature float32 0309 777 Network 4 Meas HtSinkTmp2 Heatsink 2 temperature float32 030A 778 Network 4 Meas HtSinkTmp3 Heatsink 3 temperature float32 030B 779 Network 4 Meas Irms of the load float32 02F2 754 Network 4 Meas 12 Irms2 of the load float32 02F3 755 Network 4 Meas 13 Irms3 of the load float32 02F4 756 Network 4 Meas lavg Average value of Irms float32 02F5 757 Network 4 Meas IrmsMax Maximum rms current in a 3 phase network float32 030F 783 Network 4 Meas lsq Square value ofthe load current float32 02F7 759 Network 4 Meas IsqBurst Average square value of load current in burst firing f
393. ter 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A1D 2589 Counter 2 OverFlow Overflow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A20 2592 Counter 2 Reset Counter Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A24 2596 Counter 2 RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output 0 Off 1 On bool OA1F 2591 Counter 2 Target Counter Target int32 0A22 2594 Counter 3 ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A38 2616 Counter 3 Clock Clock Input bool 0A34 2612 Counter 3 Count Count Value int32 0A36 2614 Counter 3 Direction Direction of Count 0 Up 1 Down bool 0A31 2609 Counter 3 Enable Enable the Counter O No 1 Yes bool 0A30 2608 Counter 3 OverFlow Overflow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A33 2611 Counter 3 Reset Counter Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A37 2615 Counter 3 RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0A32 2610 Counter 3 Target Counter Target int32 DA35 2613 Counter 4 ClearOverflow Clear OverFlow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A4B 2635 Counter 4 Clock Clock Input bool 0A47 2631 Counter 4 Count Count Value int32 0A49 2633 Counter 4 Direction Direction of Count 0 Up 1 Down bool 0A44 2628 Counter 4 Enable Enable the Counter 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A43 2627 Counter 4 OverFlow Overflow Flag 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A46 2630 Counter 4 Reset Counter Reset 0 No 1 Yes bool OA4A 2634 Counter 4 RippleCarry Ripple Carry Enable Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0A45 2629 Counter 4 Target Counter Target int32 0448 2632 CustPage 1 CISP1 Parameter 1 uint32 07F8 2040 Cu
394. ter Selecting this menu item causes a pop up window to appear which allows the user to view the parameter properties and also to view the parameter Help by clicking on the Help tab Produces Parameter Properties and Help information for the selected function block or parameter depending on the hover position of the cursor when the right click occurs Page 120 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 7 3 2 WIRING EDITOR OPERATING DETAILS Cont WIRES To make a wire 1 Drag two or more blocks onto the diagram from the function block tree 2 Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output Limitrv1 Diag Outputl or clicking on the Click to Select output icon at the LimitSP1 Diag PAOP bottom right corner of the block to bring up the DS Control 1 i Main PY Setup Standby Main SP Diag Status connection dialogue and clicking on the required gapan 2 parameter Recommended connections are shown with a gt Standby green plug symbol other parameters which are available T EnLimit B being shown in yellow Clicking on the red button causes T PARedEn all parameters to be shown To dismiss the connection Seen dialogue either press the escape key on the keyboard or pa kakang click the cross at the bottom left of the dialogue box fh FFOfiset 3 Oncethe wire has started a dashed wire is drawn from the S Q Man output to the current mouse position To complete the H
395. the Chain icon disappears It re appears when the mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right hand corner of the monitor box Comment Sample SA MinOnTime 4 1 Val Monitor Figure 7 3 2f Comment and Monitor appearance Monitor Context Menu rx Show names Toggles parameter names on and off in the monitor box Unlink Deletes the current link from the monitor v Show Names Cut Moves the monitor to the Clipboard ready to be pasted Unlink elsewhere Short cut lt ctrl gt lt X gt Y cut Girl Copy Copies the monitor from the wiring diagram to the Clipboard ready to be pasted elsewhere Short cut o Dd arte ee EB Paste Ctrl Paste Copies a monitor from the Clipboard to the wiring X Delete Del diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt V gt Delete Marks the monitor for deletion at next download Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken Bring Ta Front place since Push To Back Bring to Front Moves the item to the top layer of the diagram Parameter Hel Push to Back Moves the item to the bottom layer of the diagram sab Figure 7 3 2g Parameter Help Shows parameter help for the item Monitor context menu DOWNLOADING When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from the instrument No changes are made to the instrument function block execution or wiring until the download button is pressed Any changes made using the operator inte
396. the load if the voltage feedback is connected to V2 Figure B2 1b Current transformer orientation Notes 1 In each part of the drawing above the two positions i e solid and dashed for the current transformer are alternatives only one should be used in any one phase 2 The fuse value for voltage feedback wiring should be chosen to suit the current carrying capability of the cable it is protecting HA179769 Page 238 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE B2 2 FEEDBACK EXAMPLES FOR TYPICAL THREE PHASE NETWORKS CAUTION Where applicable reference connections to phase power or to neutral must be located between any isolating device and the relevant Power Module Note 1 The figures below are intended only as theoretical examples In order to comply with NEC requirements branch circuit protection must be incorporated by the user upstream of the equipment Such protection is not shown in the figures below for the sake of clarity The installation in its entirety must comply with all applicable local safety and emissions regulations 2 For pdf viewers the colours used in the figures below are used only to improve clarity No polarity should be inferred e g blue wires are not necessarily neutral red is not positive etc B2 2 1 Two phase control with Delta Star transformer and 3S load
397. the total number of stations present 3 Total St 1 within the Load Management network Network E Total Channels Shows the a number of AA a Ch Pasia 1 power control channels currently participating gt Tota bae ED in the Load Management strategy Shows the total power installed within the Load Network A Management network and which is currently gt Pmax ED 0 participating in the Load Management strategy Network ED Pt Indicates the total amount of power that has gt Pt Ped O been demanded from the network Network ED Ps Indicates the total amount of power that gt Ps Pa dl 99990 is allowed from the network Network ED Pr Indicates the total amount of power to be 3 Pr Pa dl O allowed from the network Network LE md Efficiency Shows how efficiently the load management gt Efficien ED QO systm is operating in per cent The address of the Network master LY Back to Total Stations Figure 6 21 3 Load management Network menu Shows the number of units within the Load Management PLM network Shows the number of load management power channels currently participating in the Load Management strategy This indicates the total amount of power installed and participating in the Load Management strategy within the PLM network The sum of the power demanded by all channels taking part in the Load Management strategy Configured by the user to restrict the power demanded from the network according to the Loa
398. threshold uint8 OA5F 2655 IPMonitor 1 AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A5D 2653 IPMonitor 1 DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 OA5E 2654 IPMonitor 1 In Input float32 0A57 2647 IPMonitor 1 InStatus Input Status O Good 1 Bad bool 0A60 2656 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 8 4 PARAMETER TABLE Cont Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec IPMonitor 1 Max Maximum value float32 0A59 2649 IPMonitor 1 Min Minimum value float32 OA5A 2650 IPMonitor 1 Out Timer Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool OA5C 2652 IPMonitor 1 Reset Reset All Monitor Functions 0 No 1 Yes bool 0A58 2648 IPMonitor 1 Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A56 2646 IPMonitor 1 TimeAbove Time in Hours Above Threshold time32 OA5B 2651 IPMonitor 2 AlarmDays Alarm time in days above threshold uint8 OA75 2677 IPMonitor 2 AlarmTime Alarm time above threshold time32 0A73 2675 IPMonitor 2 DaysAbove Days Above Threshold uint8 0A74 2676 IPMonitor 2 In Input float32 OA6D 2669 IPMonitor 2 InStatus Input Status 0 Good 1 Bad bool 0A76 2678 IPMonitor 2 Max Maximum value float32 0A6F 2671 IPMonitor 2 Min Minimum value float32 0A7O 2672 IPMonitor 2 Out Timer Alarm Output 0 Off 1 On bool 0A72 2674 IPMonitor 2 Reset Reset All Monitor Functions O No 1 Yes bool OA6E 2670 IPMonitor 2 Threshold Timer Threshold Value float32 0A6C 2668 IPMonitor 2 TimeAbove Time in Hours
399. tion Status Pre Temperature uint8 034D 845 Network 4 AlmDet ThyrSC System alarm detection status Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0341 833 Network 4 AlmDet TLF Process alarm detection status Total Load Failure uint8 0348 840 Network 4 AlmDis ChopOff Process alarm Chop Off uint8 033A 826 Network 4 AlmDis FreqFault System alarm Frequency Fault uint8 0337 823 Network 4 AlmDis FuseBlown System alarm Fuse Blown uint8 0334 820 Network 4 AlmDis MainsVoltFault Process alarm Mains Voltage Fault uint8 033D 829 Network 4 AlmDis MissMains System alarm Missing Mains uint8 0331 817 Network 4 AlmDis NetworkDips System alarm Mains Voltage Dips uint8 0336 822 Network 4 AlmDis OpenThyr System alarm Open Thyristor uint8 0333 819 Network 4 AlmDis OverCurrent Indication alarm Over Current uint8 033F 831 Network 4 AlmDis OverTemp System alarm Over Temperature uint8 0335 821 Network 4 AlmDis PB24VFail System alarm Power Board 24V Failure uint8 0338 824 Network 4 AlmDis PLF Process alarm Partial Load Failure uint8 033B 827 Network 4 AlmDis PLU Process alarm Partial Load Unbalance uint8 033C 828 Network 4 AlmDis PreTemp Process alarm Pre Temperature uint8 033E 830 Network 4 AlmDis ThyrSC System alarm Thyristor Short Circuit uint8 0332 818 Network 4 AlmDis TLF Process alarm Total Load Failure uint8 0339 825 Network 4 AlmLat ChopOff Process alarm latch Chop Off uint8 0367 871 Network 4 AlmLat FreqFault System alarm latch Frequency Fault uint8 0364 868 Network 4 Alm
400. tracking uint8 0526 1318 SetProv 2 SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 0528 1320 SetProv 2 WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 051D 1309 SetProv 3 DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0534 1332 SetProv 3 EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 053D 1341 SetProv 3 HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 053B 1339 SetProv 3 Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 0539 1337 SetProv 3 LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0530 1328 SetProv 3 RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint float32 0533 1331 SetProv 3 Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 0536 1334 SetProv 3 Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32 0537 1335 SetProv 3 RemSelect Remote setpoint selection uint8 0538 1336 SetProv 3 SPSelect Setpoint select uint8 0532 1330 SetProv 3 SPTrack Enable Setpoint tracking uint8 053A 1338 SetProv 3 SPUnits units of the setpoint uint8 053C 1340 SetProv 3 WorkingSP Working or active setpoint float32 0531 1329 SetProv 4 DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 0548 1352 0 No 1 Yes SetProv 4 EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0551 1361 SetProv 4 HiRange High range of a setpoint float32 054F 1359 SetProv 4 Limit Setpoint limit scalar float32 054D 1357 SetProv 4 LocalSP Local setpoint float32 0544 1348 SetProv 4 RampRate Ramp rate for the setpoint float32 0547 1351 SetProv 4 Remote1 Remote setpoint 1 float32 054A 1354 SetProv 4 Remote2 Remote setpoint 2 float32
401. tral ll Neutral C w i E reference 2T AM2 6 13 Vline2 mo Phase E o Phase 715 EPower 3 5 Star with neutral 4S 2 1 2 Phase EPower 1 Phase 1 O A sx Phase 2 O O _ Phase 3 0 O Y Isolating 3 device TAT 3 2 5 13 V V3 AT Ae Vline 2 E Ex Vline3 a de 7 4712 ji SEF V2 R Reference inputs S 5 Phase q gaalEPower 217 connected ENEE together Phase Lt EPower 375 Star without neutral 3S Figure 2 2 29 Typical wiring schemes Star HA179769 Page 26 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 2 2 2 POWER MODULES Cont THREE PHASE DELTA CONFIGURATIONS 1 11 2 T1 EP 1 MES Phase A ower Phase 1 Phase 2 O O Phase 3 O O Isolating device T T 3 12 5 13 Vline Ea Nin oO 10 oO s s 5 Vline3 2 2 2 lu Lu Ww 2 11 4 12 6 13 Reference inputs connected together Phase 7 EPower 2 pe y Phase 715 EPower 3 5 Closed Delta 3D Phase m Phase 10 91 Phase 20 O 2 Phase 3 O O 3 Isolating device y Ka EI w Vline All reference inputs fused EPower 3 D d z Phase EPower 2 Phase Open Delta 6D Fuse rating must be lower than cable current rating Figure 2 2 2g Cont
402. u Use up down arrows to select Setpoint Provider number then Enter Use return key ED one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use Up Down arrows to select Local or Remote as the current setpoint If Local is selected the LOC LED illuminates Rem1 or Rem2 to be used as remote set point when Remote selected Use up down arrows to enter setpoint value for use when Local is selected Shows the value of Remote Setpoint 1 Shows the value of Remote Setpoint 2 Applies a limit to the target set point Setpoint x Limit 100 The active value being provided as a setpoint output Maximum ramp rate for working SP Disa bled if Off Allows the user to enable disable Ramp Rate limiting Yes Rate limit is active No Rate limiting complete or disabled Yes Enable setpoint tracking No Disable setpoint tracking Select per cent or ENG Engineering units If Eng is selected HiRange and EngWorkingSP parameters appear in the menu Appears only if SPUnits set to Eng Allows a value to be entered to be used for scaling SP to Appears only if SPUnits set to Eng Displays working setpoint in Engineering units NOT to be used for control Back to SPSelect Page 106 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE SPSelect Remote Select LocalSP Remote 2 Limit WorkingSP RampRate DisRamp RateDone SPTra
403. uct would not be safe CAUTION Charged capacitors Before removing an instrument from its sleeve disconnect the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge Avoid touching the exposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve 1 This instrument is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications within the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC 2 Safety This instrument complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC by the application of the safety standard EN 61010 3 Unpacking and storage If on receipt the packaging or unit is damaged do not install but contact your supplier If being stored before use protect from humidity and dust in an ambient temperature range of 30 C to 75 C 4 Always observe all electrostatic precautions before handling the unit This instrument has no user serviceable parts Contact your supplier for repair 6 Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels Do not use water or water based products A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces 7 Electromagnetic compatibility This instrument conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC by the application of a Technical Construction File It satisfies the general requirements of the industrial environment defined in EN 61326 A HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 211 EPOWER CONTROLL
404. ug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 9 Control Alarm Acknowledgement parameters This menu allows individual alarms to be acknowledged On acknowledgement the related Signalling parameter is cleared The Acknowledge parameters automatically clear after being written If the alarm is still active as shown by the Alarm Detection display it may not be acknowledged CONF 3 Control Dew Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use Eb return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Use up down arrows to select AlmAck then Enter Closed Loop Solid yellow the closed loop alarm has not 40 E been acknowledged E Solid yellow the transfer alarm has not been acknowledged AlmAck gt Limitati Sera Figure 6 7 9 Control Alarm Acknowledge menu E Solid yellow the limitation alarm has not been acknowledged gt Back to ClosedLoop Closed Loop The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display shows whether the closed loop alarm has been acknowledged or not An empty key indicates that the alarm is acknowledged a solid yellow key indicates that the alarm is unacknowledged The up down arrow keys are used to acknowledge PV Transfer As for Closed Loop but for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12
405. uint8 026E 622 Network 3 Setup ChopOffThreshold2 Chop Off Threshold2 uint16 026F 623 Network 3 Setup ChopOffWindow Chop Off Window uint16 0271 625 Network 3 Setup FreqDriftThreshold Frequency Drift Threshold float32 0289 649 Network 3 Setup HeaterType Heater type of the load uint8 0279 633 Network 3 Setup HeatsinkPreTemp Heatsink pre alarm temperature threshold uint8 0274 628 Network 3 Setup HeatsinkTmax Maximum temperature of the heatsink uint8 026C 620 Network 3 Setup lextScale External current scale adjustment float32 027C 636 Network 3 Setup IMaximum Maximum Current of the stack uint8 0280 640 Network 3 Setup INominal Nominal current of the stack float32 027F 639 Network 3 Setup NetType The type of network Set in Instrument Configuration uint8 027D 637 Network 3 Setup OverlThreshold Over Current Threshold uintl 0278 632 Network 3 Setup OverVoltThreshold Over voltage threshold uint8 0272 626 Network 3 Setup PLFAdjusted Partial load failure adjusted acknowledge uint8 0275 629 Network 3 Setup PLFAdjustReq Partial load failure adjustment request uint8 027B 635 Network 3 Setup PLFSensitivity Partial load failure sensitivity uint8 0276 630 Network 3 Setup PLUthreshold Partial load unbalance threshold uint8 0277 631 Network 3 Setup UnderVoltThreshold Under voltage threshold uint8 0273 627 Network 3 Setup VdipsThreshold Voltage Dips Threshold uint8 026D 621 Network 3 Setup VextScale External voltage scale adjustment float32 028A 650 Network 3
406. unc Digital 2 Input function 0 Unused 1 SPSelect uint8 0849 2121 2 Alarm Ack 3 Custom OStart Energy Activate the computation of the energy uint8 0857 2135 OStart Feedback Main PV for the control block uint8 0847 2119 0 Open 1 V2 2 12 3 True Power 4 VRMS 5 IRMS OStart Finish Finished Quick start configuration O No 1 Yes uint8 0846 2118 OStart FiringMode Firing Mode uint8 084E 2126 0 None 1 Phase angle 2 Logic 3 Burst Var 4 Burst fix5 HC 6 Custom OStart LoadCurrent Nominal Current uint8 084C 2124 0 16A 1 25A 2 40A 3 50A 4 80A 5 100A 6 125A 7 160A 8 200A 9 250A 10 250A 11 315A 12 400A 13 Custom 14 Ext OStart LoadCurrentVal Nominal Current uintl 0856 2134 OStart LoadType Load Type 0 Resistive 1 transformer uint8 0851 2129 OStart LoadVoltage Load Voltage uint8 084D 2125 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 127V 5 200V 6 208V 7 220V 8 230V 9 240V 10 277V 11 380V 12 400V 13 415V 14 440V 15 460V 16 480V 17 500V 18 575V 19 600V 20 660V 21 690V 22 Custom OStart Relay1 Relay 1 function 0 Unused 1 Any alarm uint8 0850 2128 2 Network alarm 3 Fuse blown OStart Transfer Transfer Mode 0 None 1 V2 2 uint8 084F 2127 SetProv 1 DisRamp External input for enabling or disabling a ramp uint8 050C 1292 O No 1 Yes SetProv 1 EngWorkingSP Working Setpoint when in engineering units float32 0515 1301 SetProv 1 HiRange High range of a setpoint
407. upply voltage between 85V ac 265V ac The fans if fitted on the power modules are specified for use at 115V ac or 230V ac as defined at time of order It must therefore be ensured that the fan voltage matches the supply voltage or the fan will either fail within a short period or it will be ineffective at cooling The three way connector SK9 provides supply voltage for cooling fans which are fitted to all power modules except 50A and 100A modules Suitable looms harnesses for the fans are supplied with the units SK is not used for 50 100A modules because there are no cooling fans Supply output socket for power module fan s View on underside SK9 CO ll SK8 Power module Power module Power module Internal connections Internal a diagrammatic only connection ANO Enable interlock Integral with fan Fan cassette Supply voltage Slow blow SK9 not used with 50 1004 Fan cassette A Fan cassette A power modules i Fan looms supplied with the Figure 2 2 1a Driver module wiring ENABLE INPUT In order for the power module thyristors to operate the Enable input to the driver module must be valid In the default configuration this is achieved by shorting pins 8 and 10 of SK1 Digital input 1 figure 2 2 1b or by using a User Value block to apply a logic high to the enable input to the relevant firing block in iTools If required DI1 can be reconfigured as a voltage in
408. ur increments Power Range Watt hours eri Power Range Watt hours Wa 0 to 16 777 215 1 17 179 869 184 to 34 359 738 367 2 048 16 777 216 to 33 554 431 2 34 359 738 368 to 68 719 476 735 4 096 33 554 432 to 67 108 863 4 68 719 476 736 to 137 438 953 471 8 192 67 108 864 to 134 217 727 8 137 438 953 472 to274 877 906 943 16 384 134 217 728 to 268 435 455 16 274 877 906 944 to 549 755 813 887 32 768 268 435 456 to 536 870 911 32 549 755 813 888 to1 099 511 627 775 65 536 536 870 912 to 1 073 741 824 64 1 099 511 627 776 to2 199 023 255 551 131 072 1 073 741 824 to 2 147 483 647 128 2 199 023 255 552 to 4 398 046 511 103 262 144 2 147 483 648 to 4 294 967 295 256 4 398 046 511 104 to 8 796 093 022 207 524 288 4 294 967 296 to 8 589 934 591 512 8 796 093 022 208 to 17 592 186 044 415 1 048 576 8 589 934 592 to 17 179 869 183 1 024 Table 6 10 2 Energy counter resolution 6 11 EVENT LOG MENU This topic is identical with the Event log in the User Operator menu and is described in section 5 2 2 Page 72 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 12 FAULT DETECTION MENU This manages Alarm logging and provides an interface for the General Alarm Acknowledgement CONF gt Faultdet Fa 3 Global A Fa 3 Any Alarm Fau 3 Alm St bagi wag Figure 6 12 Fault detect menu Global Ack Any Alarm Network Alarm Fuse Alarm Global Disable StratStatus Watchdog
409. use cursor All items added to the diagram before the last download Block execution orders for Task 3 Redundant execution breaks Monitor and comment text DIAGRAM CONTEXT MENU Cut Copy Paste Re Route wires Align Tops Align Lefts Space Evenly Delete Undelete Select All Create Compound Rename Copy Graphic Save Graphic Active only when the right click occurs within the bounding rectangle which appears when more than one item is selected Moves the selection off the diagram to the Clipboard Short cut lt ctrl gt lt X gt As for Cut but the selection is copied leaving the original on the diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt C gt Copies the contents ofthe Clipboard to the diagram Short cut lt ctrl gt lt V gt Reroutes all selected wires If no wires are selected all wires are re routed Aligns the tops of all blocks in the selected area Aligns the left edges of all blocks in the selected area Spaces selected items such that their top left corners are spaced evenly across the width of the diagram Click on the item which is to be the left most item then lt ctrl gt lt left click gt the remaining items in the order in which they are to appear Marks the item for deletion at next download time Can be Undeleted up until download occurs Reverses the action of Delete on the selected item Selects all items on the current diagram Active only when the right click occurs
410. ut Remote panel 234 InVPA datan ccoo ieu ad a 33 HOtSWP A AA A 84 INVRIMESUM da lidia 33 HSink1 2 3 Temp a A kobe tt de 88 OA E ES KAG 33 Humidity limits eeri os rl A 204 IO Modules banag ANY BKA E PENE AI yom eee P EA ates anay 77 dao Etica 33 Specification maana naasa naan 205 Hysteresis AA AA PAA 81 EPA A a Aa kan AN 101 ROSS kA AN Kan E AN AA ea IP Add 54 IP Monit NAVE JEn a rn oe aa NANANG Be ee oe RET Cae 88 Ries 78 bi Bs hg EEEE ON tid anny seas Betas Wada 88 Modbus parameter addresses 154 155 AA NA AA San eee geoe BO o A hada 54 a T ean Be RG aa a anga alo 222 UG DE GN BT ee RS e gt sa Ms Maxi ana ng thie wana A ARE AAO ES 88 PA BA GA AN NG NGA A IRMSI Sica ie an 1222 AB re A AA 71 Gera i A AA AA NO F IsMaster IsSlave eee 195 ee AN KE EE ARA AA Hi PA AA riada sida olen be 112 139 XIU UNAT eee sA duc bang Sen ace na Dala Nh 8 COBRA GA o eng Bin oh aako Serb aida Ana 113 n th Load M LEAK SPA 19 FITO OUTED Ut daanan maaga Gia WANG NN a 75 L a a GO 9 INPUUMONILOR eto late cds Lic cow done dace hang 79 O AO ANA 35 76 A E AA 110 A ERAN 80 In1 E A A AA ABNER 32 A EEEE 82 Left arrow key dna caida deans 31 NGA NN NG NS AN 84 Leftorigin Bari mica sde he 3 138 E a pared 84 Level 1 operation Remote panel aan 220 Incremental control Level 2 operation Remote panel 224 Distributed merani ade cdi iy maan 180 Level 3 operation Remote panel aan
411. ut Output of the controller float32 03DB 987 Control 2 Diag PAOP Phase angle output for PA reduction in burst firing float32 03DC 988 Control 2 Diag Status Status of the controller uint8 O3DA 986 Control 2 Limit PV1 Threshold Limit PV1 float32 03D3 979 Control 2 Limit PV2 Threshold Limit PV2 float32 03D4 980 Control 2 Limit PV3 Threshold Limit PV3 float32 03D5 981 Control 2 Limit SP1 Threshold limit setpoint 1 float32 03D6 982 Control 2 Limit SP2 Threshold limit setpoint 2 float32 03D7 983 Control 2 Limit SP3 Threshold limit setpoint 3 float32 03D8 984 Control 2 Limit Tl Integral time of the limit loop float32 03D9 985 Control 2 Main PV The main PV of the controller float32 03CE 974 Control 2 Main SP Main SP to control at float32 03CF 975 Control 2 Main TI Integral time of the main loop float32 03D2 978 Control 2 Main TransferPV The transfer proportional limit PV float32 03DO 976 Control 2 Main TransferSpan The transfer proportional limit span float32 03D1 977 Control 2 Setup EnLimit Enable Threshold Limit uint8 03C8 968 Control 2 Setup FFGain Feedforward gain float32 03CB 971 Control 2 Setup FFOffset Feedforward offset float32 03CC 972 Control 2 Setup FFType Defines the type of Feed Forward to be used uint8 O3CA 970 Control 2 Setup NominalPV Nominal PV of this phase of power control float32 03C7 967 Control 2 Setup Standby Put controller into standby uint8 03C6 966 Control 2 Setup TransferEn Enable Transfer Proportional
412. ut for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 63 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 7 8 Control Alarm Latch parameters Allows each alarm to be configured as latching or not latching The latched status is shown in the Network AlmSig submenu ref section 6 20 3 CONF 3 Control Control N Use up down arrows to select the required control loop then Enter Use ED Setup return key one or more times from within menu to return to this page Control gt AlmLat Use up down arrows to select AlmLat then Enter Closed Loop Solid yellow Indicates that the loop alarm is 40 BE con igured as a latching alarm HE Solid yellow Signals that the transfer alarm is configured as a latching alarm Solid yellow Signals that the limitation alarm is E configured as a latching alarm AlmLat gt Limitati Jp Back to ClosedLoop Figure 6 7 8 Control Alarm latching menu Closed Loop Use the up down arrows to change the latching status of the alarm The piano key in the bottom right corner of the display indicates whether the closed loop alarm is latching solid yellow or non latching empty PV Transfer As for Closed Loop but for the Transfer Active alarm Limitation As for Closed Loop but for the Control limit active alarm HA179769 Page 64 Issue 9 A
413. utput automatically operates in fail safe mode in that it is de energised in Alarm It will A5 OPERATING MODE A5 1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT When the instrument starts or after quitting the quickstart procedure the Operator level 1 display is entered and the page defined as the Home page in Set 1 is displayed unless there are any errors in which case the unit displays the relevant error messages Figure A5 1 below shows the home page forthe case where V has been selected as Home display in Set 1 Process value e g RMS Voltage Message centre Beacons VRM Network number EPower Operator buttons communications Figure A5 1 Display panel details Page 218 HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE A5 1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT Cont A5 1 1 Front panel details Process Variable Units Network number Message centre Beacons Operator buttons Comms indicator Normally shows the value of the selected process variable Where EPower variables are being displayed the value for network 1 is displayed by default Other network values are accessed by using the Page key If the instrument is in an error state then an indication of what the error might be is flashed on and off instead e g Sbr is flashed if an input sensor break has been detected Set1 PV colour allows this part of the display to be selected as permanently green G permanently red R or no
414. ve range 0 to 5V O to 10V Note 4 After warm up Ambient 25 C Table 11 a Analogue input specification table voltage inputs Analogue input current input performance Parameter Typical Max Min Total current working input span 1mA to 25mA Resolution noise free note 1 12 bits Calibration error notes 2 3 lt 0 25 lt 0 5 Linearity error note 2 0 1 Ambient temperature error note 2 lt 0 01 C Input resistance ve to ve terminal 2350 Input resistance ve terminal to OV 1500 Allowable voltage ve terminal to OV lt t1V Series mode rejection of mains 46dB 33008 interference Common mode dc rejection 46dB gt 40dB Hardware response time 5ms Note 1 w r t total working span Note 2 of effective range 0 to 20mA Note 3 After warm up Ambient 25 C Table 11 6 Analogue input specification table current inputs Analogue output Voltage output performance Parameter Typical Max Min Total voltage working span within ny RO Hee span cle Short circuit current lt 24mA Resolution noise free note 1 12 5 bits Calibration error note 2 note 3 lt 0 25 lt 0 5 Linearity error note 2 lt 0 1 Ambient temperature error note 2 lt 0 01 C Minimum load resistance gt 800Q DC output impedance lt 2Q Hardware response time 10 to 90 20ms lt 25ms Note 1 w r t total working span Note 2 96 of effective range 0 to 5V 0 to
415. view and in some cases to edit communications parameters associated with the communications option The user may also view the Address and Baud Rate parameters associated with the Remote Panel option 6 6 1 Communications User menu parameters The following parameter list includes all parameters which can appear Only those parameters which are relevant to the fitted communications option appear in the menu list ID Displays the type of communications board fitted RS 485 ElA 485 Ethernet or a Network comms board such as Profibus or DeviceNet These options are fully discussed in the Communications manual HA179770 ID is not user editable Protocol Read only Displays the current transmission protocol Modbus Modbus TCP Network Profibus DeviceNet CANopen CC Link EtherNet IP Baud Allows the Baud rate setting for the unit to be set Available values vary according to the type of communications board fitted Address Allows the instrument address to be set up Each instrument in a communications Occupied Stations link must have a unique address allocated to it The available address ranges vary according to link protocol Appearing for CC Link protocol only this read only value shows the number of addresses occupied by the unit according to the number of input and output definitions are set up in Tools Fieldbus I O Gateway and as shown in the table below For example if the address of this unit is 4 and the number of occu
416. y This is the average of the current in the three channels of a three phase system This is relevant only for 3 phase and 2 leg controlled systems laysAvg lems Irms2 Irms3 3 Average square value of load current in burst firing The average Isq in burst firing the average is taken over the duration of the burst period This is typically used for monitoring and alarming over the burst period Square value of load current in Burst Firing and over the main period in phase angle Typically used for Isq control In 3 phase or 2 leg control this is the average of the three network squared currents calculated as I2Phase1 I Phase2 I 2Phase3 3 In a three phase network this is the maximum of 12 12 and 132 Used in current limiting in three phase networks and in alarm strategies The RMS value of I7Max measured over the mains period Typically used for current limiting or current transfer in 3 phase networks in phase angle mode Load Vrms measurement on primary power module of this channel of power control Displays load to neutral or to second line except in three phases star or delta load coupling displays load1 to load2 voltage The time base measurement is the main period in phase angle and the modulation period in burst mode As for V but for 2nd and 3rd Power Modules respectively The average of the voltage in the three channels of a three phase system This is relevant only for three phase and two leg power networks VaysAvg
417. y are not running Ensure that all sources of hazardous voltages are isolated from the units before carrying out any work on the units The heat sink becomes hot whilst the unit is running and it can take up to 15 minutes to cool after the unit is shut down Touching the heat sink even briefly must be avoided whilst the unit is operating 12 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Please read the warnings above before attempting to carry out any work on the unit s 1 Every six months check that all power and protective earth cable connections are correctly tightened section 2 2 This check should include the safety earth connections to the cabinet 2 Every six months check the condition of the ribbon cable between the Driver Module and the adjacent Power module and of the ribbon cables between Power Modules if more than one fitted If damage e g chafing or scratching is evident the damaged ribbon cable must be replaced in order to maintain proper protection against damage due to electrostatic discharge 3 To maintain maximum cooling efficiency the Power Module heat sink must be cleaned regularly Periodicity depends on the local environment but should not exceed six months 4 To maintain maximum cooling efficiency the Power Module fan grilles must be cleaned regularly Periodicity depends on the local environment but should not exceed six months Note the thyristor heat sink is the metal part of the Power modu
418. y counter occ 225 A A E ena a ade le Who 129 Energy Reset orso crcr niac cece eee eee eee 222 225 Fo r st r WNN mo pio acn a e e a 26 Engineer level MenU oooccccccccoccco 44 FREQ FAULT A 231 Eng Working SP Li AIN das NG 107 Freq hall td ro eS 92 200 O NE 222 225 Freq Drift Woldin cocacola teoria 13 90 Enter key cies torn Nan la Tepe ae ON 31 FREQUENCY ma a Ries NGA bee ka NG 88 Environment Function Blocks a coca nan AGA Pa AD wae 119 Specification 204 CONE MeN Una les 119 A A E 234 MAA Mr tl NA a NA AA GNG ete 119 ER CAF stacey maana Ma Laban Baan ine ale agn 231 Fuse ERE a her eee eae GG 231 NE is Ghee ON Ela ice Reh et 73 EPM Aa eee de Os 226 Bl Wood orar pta 13 92 200 231 EA cias 226 Driver Module ad rake 10 EP UAERIM a a a 226 Phase Reference input aaa 26 EPower Thyristor protection 0 0 eee eee 210 Panel installation 4 FuseBlowWn psa Vide na KUNG Bead Ee clo aes 32 Unpacking t nevi lc he aaa 3 EE is kaa NG banana a atl neds alee Gad 33 EMDSR rra dans dada dates hems dera soe 33 G Error Wa Fah a AG sno Bp ana a KG a Pi Woes Pato te 55 Gateway 1 O AA O NG 54 Indication Remote panel aaa 231 Ghosted wiring editor items cece ee eee 126 ErrR Sta ES Aia rn eta ecw Sa 33 AE ct tek th BARE etree o PE ka NG 73 EtherNet Global Disable 4a jaan Ann DANG Kha PAA saa 73 Specification css tide cea pde ha 2 RC toch finns ihe cin dein eee Rate oe 32 Status ai EE 55 HA179769 Index Issue 9
419. y to create software wiring between function blocks something that is not possible from the operator interface Such wiring is carried out using the Graphical wiring Editor feature In addition to the guidance given here there are two on line Help systems available within Tools Parameter help and Tools help Parameter help is accessed by clicking on Help in the toolbar opens the complete parameter help system by right clicking on a parameter and selecting Parameter Help from the resulting context menu or by clicking on the Help menu and selecting Device Help Tools help is accessed by clicking on the Help menu and selecting Contents Tools help is also available in manual format under part number HA028838 either as a physical manual or as a pdf file O Contents Release Notes iTools on the Web KU EA Device Help Help 4 Device Information Toolibaricontor System Information parameter hel p Tools Installation Diagnostics About Help menu Figure 7 Help access 7 1 Tools CONNECTION The following descriptions assume that Tools software as been correctly installed on the pc 7 1 1 Serial communications Once the serial link has been correctly wired start iTools and click on the Scan toolbar icon The Tools scanning feature initiates a search for compatible instruments and a thumbnail of each one found a appears in the Panel Views pane normally located at the bottom of the screen
420. ys to enter the scaling factor to be applied to input 1 Use the up down keys to enter the scaling factor to be applied to input 2 Use the up down arrows to select output units see text for details Use the up down arrows to select the number of decimal places for the output value Use the up down arrow keys to enter the output low limit Use the up down arrow keys to enter the output high limit The state to which the output and status parameters are forced under fault condi tions See text for details Specifies the value which the output takes under fault conditions nput 1 normally wired to an input source nput 2 normally wired to an input source Displays the current output value Displays Good or Bad J gt Back to Operation Figure 6 18 Analogue maths functions menu HA179769 Issue 9 Aug 12 Page 83 EPOWER CONTROLLER USER GUIDE 6 18 MATH2 MENU Cont Note For the sake of this description High 1 and True are synonymous as are Low O and False Operation Defines the mathematical function to be applied to the inputs None No operation Add Adds input one to input two Sub Subtracts input two from input one Mul Multiplies inputs one and two together Div Divides input one by input two AbsDif The difference in value between inputs one and two ignoring sign SelMax Output the higher of inputs one and two SelMin Out

User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents